All Protocols List

Name Type Lock Description Entry Action Exit Action
Name Type Lock Description Entry Action Exit Action
ORU PATIENT MOVMT action This is the option used to review orders when a patient is discharged or transferred. I '$D(ORACTION) D REV^ORCHART(DFN)
IBTRED BI MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBTRC PRINT REV WORKSHEET action D RW^IBTRC4
IBCNSP PERSONAL RIDERS action D RIDERS^IBCNSP3
IBCNSM PERSONAL RIDERS action D RD^IBCNSP3
IBDF COMPILE FORM action Allows forms to be compiled into a format that is very fast to print. D CMPLACTN^IBDF19
IBCNSC INS CO RX CLAIMS action S IBY=",11," D EA^IBCNSC1 S VALMBG=41
IBCNS QUIT action S VALMBCK="Q" S VALMBCK="Q"
IBTRC CHANGE PATIENT action D CP^IBTRC1
IBTRV CHANGE PATIENT action D CP^IBTRV1
PRCP CC/IK POSTING MENU menu This protocol allows the user to post specific items used in a case cart or instument kit to the using secondary and patient.
PRCP CC/IK ITEM EDIT action This protocol allows the user to edit the quantity returned from the secondary inventory point for items contained in a case cart or instrument kit. D EDIT^PRCPOPP1
PRCP CC/IK REMOVE REUSABLES action This protocol allows the user to remove all the reusable items contained in a case cart or instrument kit from the list of items to post. This provides a more compact list of items to post and should be used if all reusable items ordered are returned. D REMREUSE^PRCPOPP1
PRCP CC/IK REMOVE CC/IK action This protocol allows the user to remove a case cart or instument kit from the list of case carts and instrument kits to post. If a case cart or instrument kit is removed from the list, all items contained in the case cart or instrument kit will be removed from the list. D REMCCIK^PRCPOPP1
PRCP CC/IK POST action This protocol allows the user to post the items contained in the case cart or instrument kit to the secondary inventory point and patient. D POST^PRCPOPP2
PRCP ENTER/EDIT INVENTORY ITEMS MENU menu This protocol menu allows the user to add/edit the inventory item data.
PRCP DIST ORDER CHECK action This protocol will check the items on a distribution order for errors in the inventory point. Errors include, issue and receipt units, available quantity on-hand, etc. D CHECKORD^PRCPOPER
PRCP DIST ORDER RELEASE action This protocol allows the user to release a distribution order for filling by the primary inventory point. D RELEASEL^PRCPOPR
PRCP DIST ORDER PROCESSING menu This protocol menu provides the options to generate and post orders from a primary inventory point to a secondary inventory point.
PRCP DIST ORDER DELETE action This protocol will delete the distribution order from the system. D ORDRDELM^PRCPOPD
PRCP DIST ORDER ITEM EDIT action This protocol allows the user to add/edit items to the distribution order. D EDIT^PRCPOPEE
PRCP DIST ORDER ITEM DELETE action This protocol allows the user to delete specific items from the distribution order. D ITEMDELM^PRCPOPD
PRCP DIST ORDER PICKING TICKET action This protocol allows the user to print a picking ticket of the order. Before the picking ticket can be printed, the order must be released. D PICKLM^PRCPOPT
PRCP DIST ORDER POSTING action This protocol allows the user to post the items on the distribution order to the secondary inventory point. Before the order can be posted, the order must have the picking ticket printed on a printer. D POST^PRCPOPP
PRCP EDIT ITEM DESCRIPTION action This protocol allows the user to edit the items descriptive data. D DESCRIP^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT COSTING DATA action This protocol allows the user to edit the item costing data. D COST^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT ISSUE UNITS action This protocol allows the user to edit the items issue units. D ISSUNITS^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT LEVELS action This protocol allows the user to edit the items levels. D LEVELS^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT QUANTITIES action This protocol allows the user to make adjustments to the inventory quantity on-hand and total value. D QUANTITY^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT DUEINS action This protocol allows the user to edit the items due-ins. D DUEIN^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT SPECIAL PARAMETERS action This protocol allows the user to edit special miscellaneous item parameters. D SPECIAL^PRCPEIL1
ORB BLANK LINE17 limited protocol
PRCP EDIT SOURCES action This protocol allows the user to edit the procurement sources for the item. D SOURCES^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT DRUG ACCT action This protocol allows the user to edit the drug accountability parameters. Before this protocol can be selected, the primary inventory point must be set up as a drug accountability inventory point. D DRUGACCT^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT ALL FIELDS action This protocol allows the user to edit all item data fields. It is mostly used when adding new items to the inventory point. D ALL^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT REMOVE ITEM FROM INVPT action This protocol allows the user to remove an item from an inventory point. D DELETE^PRCPEIL1
PRCP EDIT SECONDARY ITEMS action This protocol allows primary inventory point users to edit secondary inventory point item data. The secondary inventory point must be defined as a distribution inventory point and the user must be an authorized inventory point user. D SECOND^PRCPEIL1
PRCP DIST ORDER INV ITEM EDIT action This protocol allows the user to enter/edit inventory item data without having to leave the distribution order processing protocol menu and return. D EEITEMS^PRCPOPL
PRCP CHECK ORDER MENU menu This protocol menu is generated if there are errors which need to be corrected by the user before release and posting of items on a distribution order.
PRCP CHECK ORDER ITEM EDIT action This protocol allows the user to enter/edit inventory item data and correct errors on the spot without having to leave the option and return. D EEITEMS^PRCPOPER
PRCP CC/IK EDIT INVENTORY ITEMS action This protocol allows the user to enter/edit inventory item data from within the cc/ik protocol menu without having to leave the option and return. D EEITEMS^PRCPOPPC
PRCP CC/IK CHECK ITEMS MENU menu This protocol menu is generated if there are errors which need to be corrected by the user before release and posting of items on a distribution order.
PRCP CC/IK CHECK ITEMS EDIT action This protocol allows the user to enter/edit inventory item data and correct errors on the spot without having to leave the option and return. D EEITEMS^PRCPOPEC
PRCP INVENTORY PARAMETERS MENU menu This protocol is the main menu for entering and editing the inventory point parameters.
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT DESCRIPTION action This protocol allows the user to edit the inventory descriptive parameters. D DESCRIP^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT SPECIAL action This protocol allows the user to edit the inventory special parameters. D SPECIAL^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT ALL FIELDS action This protocol allows the user to edit the descriptive, special parameters, inventory user, and mis costing section fields. D ALL^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT FCP action This protocol allows the user to edit the fund control points assigned to the inventory point. D FCP^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT DISTRPTS action This protocol allows the user to edit the distribution points assigned to the inventory point. D DISTRPTS^PRCPENE2
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT MISCOST action This protocol allows the user to edit the MIS costing section. D MISCOST^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT USERS action This protocol allows the user to give authorized users access to the inventory point. D USERS^PRCPENE1
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT STOCKEDBY action This protocol allows the user to add/delete inventory points which stock this inventory point. D STOCKED^PRCPENE2
PRCP INVENTORY EDIT FLAGS action This protocol allows the user to edit the inventory flags which include the emergency stock level, automatic purge, and regular whse issues due date. D FLAGS^PRCPENE1
PRCP PURCHASE ORDER RECEIPT MENU menu This protocol is the main protocol for receiving purchase orders into the inventory point.
PRCP PURCHASE ORDER RECEIVE action This protocol allows the user to receive the purchase order into the inventory point. D RECEIVE^PRCPPOL1
PRCP PURCHASE ORDER DIST COST action This protocol allows the user to cost items to distribution points for those items which are not stored in the inventory point. D DISTCOST^PRCPPOL0
PRCP PURCHASE ORDER E/E ITEMS action This protocol allows the user to enter/edit inventory item data. D EEITEMS^PRCPPOL0
PRCP ISSUE BOOK POSTING MENU menu This is the top level menu for the protocol to Post the Issue Book from the warehouse to the primary inventory point.
PRCP ISSUE BOOK E/E ITEMS action This protocol allows the user to jump to the Enter/Edit Inventory Item data option, change inventory item data, and return to the posting of the issue book. D EEITEMS^PRCPWPL0
PRCP ISSUE BOOK QTY TO REMAIN action This protocol will allow the user to set the quantity to post to the quantity remaining to post (outstanding quantity) for all line items on the issue book request. D REMAIN^PRCPWPL0
PRCP ISSUE BOOK QTY TO ONHAND action This protocol will allow the user to set the quantity to post to the current on-hand quantity in the warehouse inventory point. D ONHAND^PRCPWPL0
PRCP ISSUE BOOK QTY TO ENTER action This protocol allows the user to enter the quantity to post for each line item. D ENTER^PRCPWPL0
ORB BLANK LINE18 limited protocol
PRCP ISSUE BOOK SHOW NSN action This protocol will allow the user to include the items NSN on the list manager's list. D SHOWNSN^PRCPWPL0
PRCP ISSUE BOOK CANCEL LINE action This protocol will allow the user to cancel a line item on the issue book request. D CANCEL^PRCPWPL2
PRCP ISSUE BOOK SUBSTITUTE LINE action This protocol will allow the user to substitute an item for an ordered item. The line item will be cancelled and a new line item added to the issue book request. D SUBST^PRCPWPL1
PRCP ISSUE BOOK POST action This protocol will allow the user to post the issue book to the primary inventory point. D POST^PRCPWPL3
PRCP ISSUE BOOK MAKE FINAL action This protocol will allow the user to make the issue book a final. D FINAL^PRCPWPL2
PRCP RECEIVE ISSUE BOOK MENU menu This is the top level menu for the protocol to Receive the Issue Book into the primary inventory point.
PRCP RECEIVE ISSUE BOOK E/E ITEMS action This protocol allows the user to jump the the Enter/Edit Inventory Item data option, change inventory item data, and return to the receiving of the issue book. D EEITEMS^PRCPWPP0
PRCP RECEIVE ISSUE BOOK QTY TO ENTER action This protocol allows the user to enter the quantity to receive for each line item. D ENTER^PRCPWPP0
PRCP RECEIVE ISSUE BOOK QTY TO REMAIN action This protocol will allow the user to set the quantity to receive to the difference between the quantity posted by the warehouse and the quantity received by the primary. D REMAIN^PRCPWPP0
PRCP RECEIVE ISSUE BOOK RECEIVING action This protocol will allow the user to receive the issue book into the primary inventory point. D RECEIVE^PRCPWPP3
PRCP UPLOAD BARCODE DATA MENU menu This protocol controls the barcode upload for physical counts and usage.
PRCP UPLOAD BARCODE E/E ITEMS action This protocol allows the user to jump to the Enter/Edit Inventory Item data option, change inventory item data, and return to the uploading of barcode data. D EEITEMS^PRCPBAL1
PRCP UPLOAD BARCODE EDIT QTY action This protocol allows the user to change the quantities for items which have been uploaded. D EDITQTY^PRCPBAL1
PRCP UPLOAD BARCODE POST action This protocol allows the user to post the uploaded quantities to the inventory point items. D POST^PRCPBAL1
IBCNSJ PLAN SELECT action D SP^IBCNSU2
IBCNSJ PLAN LOOKUP menu
IBCNSJ CHANGE PLAN action D CSTP^IBCNSJ2
IBCNSJ INACTIVATE PLAN action D IA^IBCNSJ1
IBCNSC INS CO DELETE COMPANY action D ^IBCNSCD
IBCNSJ EDIT PLAN INFO action D PI1^IBCNSP11 S VALMBG=1
IBCNSC PLAN DETAIL menu
IBCNSJ INS CO EDIT COVERAGE LIMITS action D CV1^IBCNSJ5 S VALMBG=1
IBCNSJ EDIT COVERAGE LIMITS action D CV^IBCNSJ5 S VALMBG=$G(IB1ST("PLIM"),1)
IBCNSC PLAN LIST menu
IBCNSJ PLAN VIEW/EDIT action D VP^IBCNSJ5
IBCNSJ UPDATE ANNUAL BENEFITS action D AB^IBCNSJ5 I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNSJ INS CO INACTIVATE PLAN action D IA^IBCNSJ5
IBCNSJ SWITCH PLANS action D CP^IBCNSJ5
IBCNSJ INS CO PLANS action D PL^IBCNSJ5 S VALMBG=1
IBCNSJ PLAN COMMENT action D PC^IBCNSJ5
ORB BLANK LINE19 limited protocol
IBCNSJ PLAN UR INFO action D IT1^IBCNSP1 S VALMBG=1
IBJP MCCR PARAMETERS MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT AR ACCOUNT PROFILE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBARCOMM) D REBLD^IBJTTA I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTTA",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT AR COMMENT HISTORY MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTTC",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT BILL CHARGES MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTBA",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT BILL DX MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTBB",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT BILL PROCEDURES MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTBC",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT CLAIM SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT CT/IR COMMUNICATIONS LIST MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTRA",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT INACTIVE LIST SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT NS VIEW AN BEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBCNSA",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT NS VIEW EXP POL MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBCNSVP",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT NS VIEW INS CO MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBCNSC",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT PT ELIGIBILITY MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTEA",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP AUTO BILLING MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP CLAIMS TRACKING MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP IB SITE PARAMETER MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT NS PI VIEW PAT INS MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT SHORT MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP IB SITE PARAMETER EDIT action D NXEDIT^IBJPS
ORB BLANK LINE20 limited protocol
IBJP CT GENERAL EDIT action D CTEDIT^IBJPC(3)
IBJP CT RANDOM SAMPLE EDIT action D CTEDIT^IBJPC(2)
IBJP CT TRACKING EDIT action D CTEDIT^IBJPC(1)
IBJP CT EDIT ALL action D CTEDIT^IBJPC(0)
IBJP IB SITE PARAMETER SCREEN action D EN^IBJPS
IBJP CLAIMS TRACKING SCREEN action D EN^IBJPC
IBJP AUTO BILLING SCREEN action D EN^IBJPB
IBJP AB INPATIENT EDIT action D ABEDIT^IBJPB(1)
IBJP AB GENERAL EDIT action D ABGEDIT^IBJPB
IBJP AB PRESCRIPTION EDIT action D ABEDIT^IBJPB(4)
IBJP AB OUTPATIENT EDIT action D ABEDIT^IBJPB(2)
IBJ EXIT action D FASTEXIT^IBJU1
IBJT ACTIVE LIST SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $D(IBFASTXT),IBFASTXT>4 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT ACTIVE LIST SCREEN action D EN^IBJTLA
IBJT INACTIVE LIST SCREEN action D EN^IBJTLB
IBJT CLAIM SCREEN ACTIVE action D NX^IBJTLA("IBJT CLAIM INFO")
IBJT NS VIEW INS CO SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBCNSC") D VI^IBJTNA(0)
IBJT NS VIEW EXP POL SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBCNSVP") D VP^IBJTNB(0)
IBJT NS VIEW AN BEN SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBCNSA") D AB^IBJTNB(0)
IBJT BILL CHARGES SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTBA") D EN^IBJTBA
IBJT BILL DX SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTBB") D EN^IBJTBB
IBJT BILL PROCEDURES SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTBC") D EN^IBJTBC
IBJT AR ACCOUNT PROFILE SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTTA") D EN^IBJTTA
IBJT CHANGE DATES INACTIVE action D CDI^IBJTA1
IBJT CHANGE PATIENT action D CP^IBJTA1
IBJT ACTIVE LIST SCREEN SKIP action S:'$G(IBNOTPJI) IBFASTXT=4 Q:'$G(IBNOTPJI) D FULL^VALM1 W !!,*7,"This action is not available for the current path into TPJI" S VALMBCK="R" N DIR S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR W !
IBJT AR TRANSACTION PROFILE SCREEN action D NX^IBJTTA("IBJT AR TRANSACTION PROFILE")
IBJT CLAIM SCREEN INACTIVE action D NX^IBJTLB("IBJT CLAIM INFO")
IBJT CLAIM SCREEN SKIP action S IBFASTXT=3
IBJT CHANGE BILL action D CB^IBJTA1
ORB BLANK LINE21 limited protocol
IBJT PT ELIGIBILITY SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTEA") D EN^IBJTEA
IBJT CT/IR COMMUNICATIONS LIST SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTRA") D EN^IBJTRA
IBJT CT/IR REVIEWS/APPEALS SCREEN action D NX^IBJTRA
IBJT HS HEALTH SUMMARY action D HS^IBJTA1
IBJT AR COMMENT HISTORY SCREEN action I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTTC") D EN^IBJTTC
IBJT AR TRANSACTION PROFILE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT CT/IR REVIEWS/APPEALS MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT NS VIEW EXP POL REDISPLAY action D VP^IBJTNB(1)
IBJT NS VIEW AN BEN REDISPLAY action D AB^IBJTNB(1)
IBJT NS VIEW INS CO REDISPLAY action D VI^IBJTNA(1)
IBJT NS PI VIEW PAT INS SCREEN action D VPI^IBJTNC
IBJT NS PI VIEW AN BEN SCREEN action D NX^IBJTNC("IBJT NS VIEW AN BEN")
IBJT NS PI VIEW EXP POL SCREEN action D NX^IBJTNC("IBJT NS VIEW EXP POL")
IBJT NS PI VIEW INS CO SCREEN action D NX^IBJTNC("IBJT NS VIEW INS CO")
IBJT AR COMMENT ADD action D ARCA^IBJTA1
IBTRE VIEW PAT INS action D NX^IBTRCD1("IBCNS VIEW PAT INS",1)
PRCO VENDOR REVIEW menu
PRCO REVIEW ENTRY action D REV^PRCORV1
PRCO EDIT VENDOR ENTRY action D EDIT^PRCORV1
PRCO SEND VRQ action D SEND^PRCORV1
PRCO DELETE VRQ action D DELETE^PRCORV1
PRCO PRINT ENTRY action D PRINT^PRCORV
SC PATIENT PROFILE DISPLAY TEAM INFO action This action allows the user to display team information during the specified date range. K SDY S SDALL=1,(SDTYP,SDFLG)=7,GBL="^TMP(""SDPPALL"","_$J_")" D ^SDPPALL
SC PCMM INPATIENT ACTIVITY extended action This is used to send MailMan messages to practitioners who are currently ADMISSION, TRANSFER, OR DISCHARGE (as appropriate) and yyy is the patient's name and PID. assigned to positions that: o Have been assigned to this patient and the position is defined to receive inpatient messages for the position's patient panel. o Are part of teams that have been assigned to this patient and the position is defined to receive messages for all patients in the team's patient panel. The Messages are labeled 'INPATIENT' xxx 'for' yyy. Here xxx is D MAIL^SCMCPM
SC CLINIC ENROLL/DISCHARGE EVENT DRIVER extended action Generic team event driver to handle the assignment of patients to teams D EXIT^SCMCEV3
SC TEAM AUTO-ADD action This is the action that adds a patient to a team via the SC TEAM EVENT DRIVER. D COMPARE^SCMCEV3(DFN)
SCMC PATIENT TEAM CHANGES extended action This is fired off whenever the Patient Team Assignment File (#404.42) is SCTMNDAF = 0 Node of Team (#404.51) After SCPTTM = Pointer to Patient Team Assignment (#404.42) SCTMB4 = Pointer to Team (404.51) Before SCTMAF = Pointer to Team (404.51) After Notes: o The 7th piece of the Team File (i.e. $P(SCTMND,U,7)) is a pointer to the institution file. o The 8th piece of the Patient Team Assignment File is the Assignment Type Field (#.08). Its internal value is '1' if it is a primary updated. care assignment. Its value could be either null or '99'. '99' is 'Other'. You can check the variable, SCPCTM (1 or 0) to see if this is a primary care team assignment. Note: Utility: $$INSTPCTM^SCAPMC(DFN,DATE,SCERR) Input: DFN - ien of PATIENT File (#2) DATE - date to check (default=DT) SCERR - error array (default=^TMP("SCERR",$J)) - contains info about bad data. It is only set if there is bad data. Returned: 0 if no Primary Care Team on Date or SC4^Institution Name^SCTM^Team Name SC4 = ien of Institution File SCTM = ien of Team File Available Output Variables: =========================== SCPCTM = 1 if it this is a primary care team assignment, 0 otherwise SCPTTMB4 = 0 Node of Patient Team Assignment (#404.42) Before SCPTTMAF = 0 Node of Patient Team Assignment (#404.42) After SCTMNDB4 = 0 Node of Team (#404.51) Before
SCMC PATIENT TEAM POSITION CHANGES extended action This should be fired off whenever the PATIENT TEAM POSITION ASSIGNMENT Available Variables: ==================== SCPCTP = null or 0 if not a primary care assignment 1 if a primary care practitioner assignment 2 if a primary care attending assignment SCPTTPB4 = 0 Node of Patient Team Position Assignment (#404.43) Before SCPTTPAF = 0 Node of Patient Team Position Assignment (#404.43) After SCTMNDB4 = 0 Node of Team (#404.51) Before SCTMNDAF = 0 Node of Team (#404.51) After SCTPNDB4 = 0 Node of Team Position (#404.57) Before file (#404.43) is updated SCTPNDAF = 0 Node of Team Position (#404.57) After SCPTTP = Pointer to Patient Team Position Assignment (#404.43) SCTPB4 = Pointer to Team Position (404.57) Before SCTPAF = Pointer to Team Position (404.57) After Protocol Name: SCMC Patient Team Position Changes, hang an entry off of this to use this protocol (I do not believe you will be using this one) Description: This should be fired off whenever the PATIENT TEAM POSITION ASSIGNMENT file (#404.43)is updated.
SC DISPLAY TEAM INFO action Display team information for a selected patient. D SEL^SCMCU1 S:$G(TDFN)'>0 VALMBCK="R" Q:$G(TDFN)'>0 D EN^VALM("SC TEAM INFORMATION") K ^TMP("SCTI",$J),TDFN
SCMC PT TEAM CHANGE MAIL MESSAGE action This fires off the MailMan Message for changes to File #404.42. D MAIL^SCMCTMM
SCMC PT POSITION CHANGE MAIL MESSAGE action This fires off the MailMan Message for changes to File #404.43. D MAIL^SCMCTPM
SC ASSIGN PC TEAM ON DISCHARGE action This is called from the patient movement event driver. If the movement is a discharge, and the patient does not have a current or future assignment to a primary care team - it will prompt the user to assign the patient to a primary care team. D:'$G(^DPT(DFN,.35)) PCMMDIS^SCMCPM1
GMRADGPM MARK CHART extended action This protocol will hang off of the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol and for a new admission, a bulletin to mark that patients chart for all of the active allergies will be fired. D EN1^GMRADGMV
GMRAOR ALLERGY ENTER/EDIT action This protocol will allow the user to enter/edit patient allergy/adverse reaction data. N DFN S DFN=$S(ORVP[";DPT(":+ORVP,1:0) D:DFN>0 EN2^GMRAPEM0 K GMRAUSER,GMRAOUT
GMRA SIGN-OFF ON DATA extended action This protocol will be activated whenever a reaction is Signed. $P Field name Field type --------------------------------------------------------------- 1 PATIENT Pointer to File 2 (PATIENT) 2 REACTANT Free Text of Reaction 3 GMR ALLERGY Variable Pointer * 4 ORIGINATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 5 ORIGINATOR Pointer to File 200 (NEW PERSON) 6 OBSERVED/HISTORICAL Set of Codes (o=Observed,h=Historical) 12 ORIGINATOR SIGN OFF Set of Codes Listed below are the variables that will be defined for that reaction. (1=Signed,(Zero or Null)=Unsigned) 14 MECHANISM Set of Codes (U=Unknown,P=Pharmacologic,A=Allergy) 16 VERIFIED Set of Codes (1=Verified,(0 or Null)=Not Verified) 17 VERIFICATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 18 VERIFIER Pointer to File 200 20 ALLERGY TYPE Free Text/Set of Codes 1 to 3 characters long (Where "D" = Drug, "F" = Food, "O" = Other) *The GMR ALLERGY field is a variable pointer which points to one of five possible files. They are: File Name File Reference --------- -------------- GMR ALLERGIES GMR(120.8, (e.g., 212;GMR(120.8,) Variables: NATIONAL DRUG PSNDF( DRUG PSDRUG( DRUG INGREDIENTS PS(50.416, VA DRUG CLASS PS(50.605, GMRAPA = The Internal Entry Number of the reaction in File 120.8 (PATIENT ALLERGIES) GMRAPA(0) = The zero node of the entry in File 120.8. Below is a description of the data for that node.
GMRA VERIFY DATA extended action This protocol will be activated whenever a reaction is Verified. $P Field name Field type --------------------------------------------------------------- 1 PATIENT Pointer to File 2 (PATIENT) 2 REACTANT Free Text of Reaction 3 GMR ALLERGY Variable Pointer * 4 ORIGINATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 5 ORIGINATOR Pointer to File 200 (NEW PERSON) 6 OBSERVED/HISTORICAL Set of Codes (o=Observed,h=Historical) 12 ORIGINATOR SIGN OFF Set of Codes Listed below are the variables that will be defined for that reaction. (1=Signed,(Zero or Null)=Unsigned) 14 MECHANISM Set of Codes (U=Unknown,P=Pharmacologic,A=Allergy) 16 VERIFIED Set of Codes (1=Verified,(0 or Null)=Not Verified) 17 VERIFICATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 18 VERIFIER Pointer to File 200 20 ALLERGY TYPE Free Text/Set of Codes 1 to 3 characters long (Where "D" = Drug, "F" = Food, "O" = Other) *The GMR ALLERGY field is a variable pointer which points to one of five possible files. They are: File Name File Reference --------- -------------- GMR ALLERGIES GMR(120.8, (e.g., 212;GMR(120.8,) Variables: NATIONAL DRUG PSNDF( DRUG PSDRUG( DRUG INGREDIENTS PS(50.416, VA DRUG CLASS PS(50.605, GMRAPA = The Internal Entry Number of the reaction in File 120.8 (PATIENT ALLERGIES) GMRAPA(0) = The zero node of the entry in file 120.8. Below is a description of the data for that node.
GMRA ENTERED IN ERROR extended action This protocol will be activated whenever a reaction is Entered in Error. $P Field name Field type --------------------------------------------------------------- 1 PATIENT Pointer to File 2 (PATIENT) 2 REACTANT Free Text of Reaction 3 GMR ALLERGY Variable Pointer * 4 ORIGINATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 5 ORIGINATOR Pointer to File 200 (NEW PERSON) 6 OBSERVED/HISTORICAL Set of Codes (o=Observed,h=Historical) 12 ORIGINATOR SIGN OFF Set of Codes Listed below are the variables that will be defined for that reaction. (1=Signed,(Zero or Null)=Unsigned) 14 MECHANISM Set of Codes (U=Unknown,P=Pharmacologic,A=Allergy) 16 VERIFIED Set of Codes (1=Verified,(0 or Null)=Not Verified) 17 VERIFICATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 18 VERIFIER Pointer to File 200 20 ALLERGY TYPE Free Text/Set of Codes 1 to 3 characters long (Where "D" = Drug, "F" = Food, "O" = Other) *The GMR ALLERGY field is a variable pointer which points to one of five possible files. They are: File Name File Reference --------- -------------- GMR ALLERGIES GMR(120.8, (e.g., 212;GMR(120.8,) NATIONAL DRUG PSNDF( Variables: DRUG PSDRUG( DRUG INGREDIENTS PS(50.416, VA DRUG CLASS PS(50.605, GMRAPA = The Internal Entry Number of the reaction in File 120.8 (PATIENT ALLERGIES) GMRAPA(0) = The zero node of the entry in File 120.8. Below is a description of the data for that node.
GMRA MEDWATCH DATA COMPLETE extended action This protocol will be activated whenever a reaction has a MEDWatch form $P Field name Field type --------------------------------------------------------------- 1 PATIENT Pointer to File 2 (PATIENT) 2 REACTANT Free Text of Reaction 3 GMR ALLERGY Variable Pointer * 4 ORIGINATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 5 ORIGINATOR Pointer to File 200 (NEW PERSON) 6 OBSERVED/HISTORICAL Set of Codes (o=Observed,h=Historical) entered. Listed below are the variables that will be defined for that 12 ORIGINATOR SIGN OFF Set of Codes (1=Signed,(Zero or Null)=Unsigned) 14 MECHANISM Set of Codes (U=Unknown,P=Pharmacologic,A=Allergy) 16 VERIFIED Set of Codes (1=Verified,(0 or Null)=Not Verified) 17 VERIFICATION DATE/TIME Date/Time (FileMan format) 18 VERIFIER Pointer to File 200 20 ALLERGY TYPE Free Text/Set of Codes 1 to 3 characters long reaction. (Where "D" = Drug, "F" = Food, "O" = Other) GMRAPA1 = The Internal Entry Number of the reaction in File 120.85 (ADVERSE REACTION REPORTING) GMRAPA1(0) = The zero node of the entry in File 120.85. Below is a description of the data for that node. $P Field name Field type --------------------------------------------------------------- 1 DATE/TIME OF EVENT Date/Time (FileMan format) 2 PATIENT Pointer to File 2 (PATIENT) 3 QUESTION #1 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 4 QUESTION #2 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 5 QUESTION #3 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 6 QUESTION #4 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 7 QUESTION #5 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 8 NO. DAY HOSPITALIZED Numeric 9 QUESTION #6 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) Variables: 10 QUESTION #7 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 11 QUESTION #8 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 12 DATE MD NOTIFIED Date/Time (FileMan format) 13 OBSERVER Pointer to File 200 (NEW PERSON) 14 SEVERITY Set of Codes (1=Mild, 2=Moderate, 3=Severe) 15 RELATED REACTION Pointer to File 120.8 (PATIENT ALLERGIES) GMRAPA = The Internal Entry Number of the reaction in 16 QUESTION #9 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) 17 QUESTION #10 Set of Codes (y=YES,n=NO) *The GMR ALLERGY field is a variable pointer which points to one of five possible files. They are: File Name File Reference --------- -------------- GMR ALLERGIES GMR(120.8, (e.g., 212;GMR(120.8,) File 120.8 (PATIENT ALLERGIES) NATIONAL DRUG PSNDF( DRUG PSDRUG( DRUG INGREDIENTS PS(50.416, VA DRUG CLASS PS(50.605, GMRAPA(0) = The zero node of the entry in File 120.8. Below is a description of the data for that node.
GMRA RECEIVE action Receive a Health Level Seven (HL7) message from the OE/RR package. D EN1^GMRAOR4(.XQORMSG)
IBDF HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
IBDF PCE EVENT action This protocol is the event handler attached updated. This protocol ensures that data during data entry through PCE or scheduling flags a manual data entry field in the Form Tracking file. to the PXK VISIT DATA EVENT protocol. In order to determine if all data from encounter forms has been collected it is necessary to flag all printed forms as having data input. If the input is from AICS then the Form Tracking file is automatically updated. If data entry is done through Scheduling or PCE then the form tracking file is not D MAN^IBDFPCE
PXCA DATA EVENT extended action This is the event point invoked by PCE Device Interface Module when it has not found any errors in the data passed to it. This makes the data available to other users of the data including users of any Local data that may be included.
PXK VISIT DATA EVENT extended action This is a Protocol that PIMS can hook onto to find the data that was collected by PCE using List Manager,Scanning etc. PIMS has developed a protocol, SDAM PCE EVENT, which will use the visit related data to do an auto-checkout. S PXKSPX=1 K PXKSPX
IBDF EF QUIT action Allows the user to exit the system without quitting through the hierarchy of screens, or the user can exit to the previous screen. D FASTEXIT^IBDFU3
IBDF EF QUEUE PARMS MENU menu
IBDF EF EDIT QUEUE PARMS action D EDT^IBDFPE1
IBDF EF ADD QUEUE PARMS action D ADD^IBDFPE1
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP ADD action D ADD1^IBDFCG
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP MENU menu
IBDF EF PARAMETER GROUP JUMP action D JUMP^IBDFPE
IBDF EF QUEUE PRINT FORMS action D ^IBDFQS
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP MENU ACTION action D EN^IBDFCG K IBDFCG I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP JUMP action D JUMP^IBDFCG
IBDF EF QUEUE STATS action D STAT^IBDFPE1
IBDF EF EXIT action S VALMBCK="Q"
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP EDIT action D EDIT^IBDFCG
IBDF RESEQUENCE LIST action Allows the list to be resequenced by any subcolumn. D SEQUENCE^IBDF4
IBDFC ADD FORM TO LIST action Allows a single form to be added to the list for conversion. D ADDONE^IBDFC
IBDFC CONVERSION UTILITY MENU menu Menu for the conversion utility screen.
IBDFC REMOVE FORM FROM LIST action Used to remove a form from the current list of forms to be converted for scanning. D REMOVE^IBDFC
IBDFC MENU FOR CONVERTED FORMS menu Menu for working with the list of converted forms.
IBDFC LIST CONVERTED FORMS action Used to go to the screen that lists all of the converted forms. D LIST^IBDFC1 I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBDF EF HELP SPEC INST action D EN^IBDFHLP
IBDF EF HELP MENU menu
IBDFC CONVERT LISTED FORMS action Converts all the forms on the list. The original forms are left unchanged. The forms are copied, the copied form is renamed with a CNV. prefix, and it is the copy that is converted. D CNVTLIST^IBDFC
IBDFC VIEW SCANNING WARNINGS action Allows the potential problems discovered durring the conversion process to be viewed. D WARNINGS^IBDFC1
IBDFC REPLACE IN CLINICS action Used to substitute the converted forms for the original forms in the clinics. D REPLACE^IBDFC3
IBDF PRINT FORM DEFINITION action Allows the information in the Form Definition table to be printed. This is the information used form scanning. D FORMDEF^IBDFC4
IBDFC DELETE CONVERTED FORM action Allows a form listed in the conversion log to be deleted if it is not in use. D DELFORM^IBDFC1
IBDFC PURGE CONVERSION LOG action Allows the log to be purged. D PURGE^IBDFC1
IBDF EF TASK INTERUPT action S IBDFSTOP=1 D STAT^IBDFPE1 K IBDFSTOP
IBDF UTIL PRIMARY PROTOCOL menu
IBDF UTIL JUMP action D JUMP^IBDFUTL2
IBDF UTIL CHANGE LIST action S IBDF1=1 D CHGLST^IBDFUTL2 K IBDF1
IBDF UTIL DELETE FROM SELECTION LIST action D DELETE^IBDFUTL2
IBDF UTIL COMPLETE INVALID LIST action D START^IBDFLST
IBDF UTIL COMPLETE LIST MENU menu
IBDF UTIL INVALID CODES JUMP action D JUMP^IBDFLST
IBDF UTIL REPLACE CODE action D REPLACE^IBDFUTL3
IBDF QUICK SELECTION EDIT action D ^IBDFQSL
IBDF QUICK EDIT ACTIONS MENU menu
IBDF QUICK ACTION EDIT action D EDIT^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK ACTION DELETE action D DELETE^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK ACTION ADD action D ADDSLCTN^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK ACTION ADD BLANK action D ADDBLANK^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK ACTION FORMAT GROUP action D FORMAT^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK GROUP ADD action D GROUPADD^IBDFQEA
IBDF QUICK SELECTION EDIT 2ND SCREEN action D EDITBLK^IBDFQSL,IDXFORM^IBDF5A()
IBDF FT MENU menu
IBDF FT STATISTICS action D EN^IBDFST
IBDF FT STATS MENU menu
IBDF FT STATUS SELECT action D START^IBDFSS,EN^IBDFSS
IBDF FT STATUS SELECT MENU menu
IBDF QUICK GRP COPY action D ^IBDFGRP D INIT^IBDFQSL1 S VALMBCK="R"
IBDF QUICK GRP MENU menu
IBDF QUICK GROUP COPY SELECTION action D GRPCOPY^IBDFGRP
IBDF QUICK GRP DELETE action D GRPDEL^IBDFQEA
IBDF FT CHANGE LIST action S IBDF1=1 D CHGLST^IBDFFT K IBDF1
IBDF QUICK EDIT GRP action D GRPEDIT^IBDFQEA
IBDF EF CLINIC GROUP DELETE action D DEL^IBDFCG
IBDF EF DELETE QUEUE PARMS action D DEL^IBDFPE1
PSJ OR PAT OE protocol This protocol allows the entry of Unit Dose and non-fluid IV orders through the Order Entry/Results Reporting package. This protocol assumes that the patient has been selected prior to this protocol being selected. D ^PSJORA
PSJU OR PAT PR action This allows a user to print to any device a profile (list) of a patient's Unit Dose orders for the patient's current or last (if patient has been discharged) admission. If the user's terminal is selected as the printing device, this option will allow the user to select any of the printed orders to be shown in complete detail, including the activity logs, if any. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. D ENOR^PSGPR
PSJ OR PAT MENU protocol menu This contains Inpatient (Unit Dose and IV) Medications reports for use with the OE/RR package. These reports assume that the patient has been selected prior to the protocol being selected.
PSJI OR PAT PR action This will allow a patient's IV profile to be sent to a printer. With each profile printed, a view of each order within the profile can also be printed. This protocol assumes that a patient has been selected prior to this protocol being selected. D ENOR^PSIVPR
PSJU OR VBW action This allows the user to verify (or take other actions) on non-verified Unit Dose orders for patients. If the user is a pharmacist, this protocol will show all orders not verified by a pharmacist for a ward group, ward, or single patient, as the user chooses. If the user is a nurse, this protocol will show all orders not verified by a nurse. If the user is ward staff, this protocol will show patients with orders not verified by a nurse, but not allow any action to be taken. D ^PSGVBW
PSJ OR MENU protocol menu This contains Inpatient (Unit Dose and IV) Medications reports that may be run by ward personnel through the OE/RR package.
PSJU OR AP-1 action This allows the user to print a profile of patients' active Unit Dose orders for review by the physician. It includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is also included for new orders. D ^PSGAP
PSJU OR AP-2 action This allows the user to print a profile of patients' active Unit Dose orders for review by the physician. It includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is also included for new orders. D ^PSGCAP
PSJU OR 7D MAR action This allows the user to print selected patients' Unit Dose orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a seven day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). D EN7^PSGMMAR
PSJU OR 14D MAR action This allows the user to print selected patients' Unit Dose orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a fourteen day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). D EN14^PSGMMAR
PSJU OR PAT AP-1 action This allows the user to print a profile of a patient's active Unit Dose orders for review by the physician. It includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is also included for new orders. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. D ENOR^PSGAP
PSJU OR PAT AP-2 action This allows the user to print a profile of a patient's active Unit Dose orders for review by the physician. It includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is also included for new orders. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. D ENOR^PSGCAP0
PSJU OR PAT VBW action This allows the user to verify (or take other actions) on non-verified Unit Dose orders for a patient. If the user is a pharmacist, this protocol will show all orders not verified by a pharmacist for a selected patient. If the user is a nurse, this protocol will show all orders not verified by a nurse. If the user is ward staff, this protocol will show the patient's orders not verified by a nurse, but not allow any action to be taken. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. D ENOR^PSGVBW
PSJU OR PAT DS action This gives the physician and/or Outpatient Pharmacy a report of the active Unit Dose medications for a patient about to be discharged or transferred to Authorized Absence, and allows the physician to mark the appropriate action deemed necessary for each medication. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. D ENOR^PSGDS
PSJ OR PAT PR action This allows the user to print Inpatient Medications orders for a selected patient. This protocol assumes that the patient has already been selected. S:'$G(PSGP)&(+$G(ORVP)) PSGP=+ORVP Q:'$D(PSGP) D ENOR^PSJPR(PSGP) K PSGP
PSJU OR DS action This gives the physician and/or Outpatient Pharmacy a report of the active Unit Dose medications for patients about to be discharged or transferred to Authorized Absence, and allows the physician to mark the appropriate action deemed necessary for each medication. D ^PSGDS
PSJU OR PR action This allows a user to print to any device a profile (list) of patients' Unit Dose orders for the patient's current or last (if patient has been discharged) admission. If the user's terminal is selected as the printing device, this protocol will allow the user to select any of the printed orders to be shown in complete detail, including the activity logs, if any. The user may print patients' profiles for a single patient, or for an entire ward group or an entire ward. D ^PSGPR
PSJU OR PAT 14D MAR action This allows the user to print a selected patient's Unit Dose orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a fourteen day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. S PSGMARDF=14 D ENOR^PSGMMAR
PSJU OR PAT 7D MAR action This allows the user to print a selected patient's Unit Dose orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a seven day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. S PSGMARDF=7 D ENOR^PSGMMAR
PSJ OR PAT PR MENU menu These are Inpatient Medications profiles for use with the OE/RR package. These protocols all assume that the patient has already been selected through the OE/RR package.
PSJ OR PR action This allows the user to print Inpatient Medications orders for selected patients. Profiles can be printed by patient, ward, or ward group. D ^PSJPR
PSJI OR PR action This will allow a patient's IV profile to be sent to a printer. With each profile printed, a view of each order within the profile can also be printed. D ^PSIVXU Q:$D(XQUIT) D ^PSIVPR,ENIVKV^PSGSETU K J,N2,ORIFN,P17
PSJ OR PAT ADT action This takes the appropriate action on a patient's Inpatient Medication orders whenever the patient is Admitted, Discharged, or Transferred (ADT). This is an action protocol to be used within the DG MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. D ^PSJADT
PSJI OR PAT FLUID OE protocol This allows entry of IV fluids orders through OE/RR. This protocol assumes that a patient has been selected prior to this protocol being selected. D ^PSIVORA
PSJI OR PAT HYPERAL OE action This allows limited processing of IV Hyperal orders through OE/RR. S ORPK="TESTING ORPK SET" D ^PSIVORH
PSJI OR PAT FLUID OE MENU protocol menu Placeholder, possible replacement: PSJI OR PAT FLUID OE
PSJ OR PAT OE MENU protocol menu This is a menu that allows the entry of Unit Dose and non-fluid IV orders through OE/RR. This menu should contain the Inpatients Medications order entry protocol and any Inpatient Medications quick order protocols.
PSJQ4 AMY protocol D PROCESS^PSJQSET(4)
PSJQ5 MAI protocol D PROCESS^PSJQSET(5)
VAQ PDX1 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for status screen PDX1
VAQ DISPLAY PDX action D DIS^VAQREQ01
VAQ CREATE REQUEST action CALLS REQUEST SCREEN (PDX2) D EP^VAQREQ02
VAQ PDX2 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for status screen PDX2
VAQ CHANGE PATIENT action D PAT^VAQREQ02 D EXIT^VAQREQ02
VAQ ADD/EDIT REQUEST action ADD/EDIT INFO TO CREATE A PDX REQUEST D REQ^VAQREQ02
VAQ TRANSMIT REQUEST action TRANSMIT PDX REQUEST, UPDATE TRANSACTION FILE D TRAN^VAQREQ02
VAQ COPY REQUEST action Allows the users to create multiple entries D COPY^VAQREQ02
VAQ PDX3 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for manual process PDX activity screen PDX3
VAQ PROCESS RELEASE action Manual process PDX request, Release D REL^VAQEXT02
VAQ PROCESS REJECT action Manual process PDX, Reject D REJ^VAQEXT02
VAQ PDX4 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for manual process screen PDX4
VAQ PROCESS MANUAL action This option allows the user to select the PDX to manually process D PM^VAQEXT04
VAQ PDX5 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for status screen PDX5
VAQ LOAD EDIT action D LED^VAQLED01
VAQ PDX6 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for status screen PDX6
VAQ LOAD DATA action LOADS ALL FIELDS IN DATA SEGMENT TO THE LOCAL PATIENT FILE D LOAD^VAQLED02
VAQ LOAD FIELD action LOADS THE FIELD OR FIELDS SELECTED TO THE LOCAL DATA BASE D FIELD^VAQLED02
VAQ PDX8 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for possiable matches screen
VAQ DUPLICATE action D SEL^VAQLED03
VAQ PDX7 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for update screen PDX7
VAQ ADD PATIENT action ADDS PATIENT TO LOCAL DATA BASE D ADD^VAQLED07
VAQ DIS1 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for display screen DIS1
VAQ PDX9 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for display screen PDX9
VAQ DISPLAY SELECT action D SEL^VAQDIS11
VAQ PDX11 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for segment screen PDX11
VAQ DIS SELECTED SEGMENT action D SEL^VAQDIS15
VAQ DIS ALL SEGMENT action D ALL^VAQDIS15
VAQ PDX12 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for data display screen PDX12
VAQ NEW PATIENT action Allows the users to a new patient in the database D NEW^VAQLED03
VAQ DISPLAY BY REQUESTOR action D SEL^VAQDIS12
VAQ PDX10 (MENU) menu display custom options to user for display screen PDX9
DVBA DISCHARGE TYPES (MENU) menu S XQORM("B")="AL"
DVBA C&P SCHD EVENT action AMIE C&P appointment processing protocol. This protocol is executed from the SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS protocol as an Item. It asks a series of questions to any user making a C&P appointment. It's purpose is to provide a tracking mechanism between AMIE 2507 exams and C&P appointments. D ^DVBCSDEV
DVBA ADD DISCHARGE TYPE action D ADD^DVBALD
DVBA DELETE DISCHARGE TYPES action D DELETE^DVBALD
DVBA CREATE DISCHARGE TYPE LIST action D CREATE^DVBALD
DVBA ACCEPT DISCHARGE TYPES action /// D ACCEPT^DVBALD
SR SURGERY REQUEST protocol This protocol allows the entry and editing of operation requests through OE/RR. D EN^SROERR K SRSITE,^TMP($J,"SRCUSS")
DVB ADMISSION HINQ action D EVENT^DVBHT2 Q
IBDF FT DELETE action Allows for deleting of Forms Tracking Entries that are not associated with an appointment. D DELFT^IBDFDEA
VSIT PATIENT STATUS extended action This option is called from the EVENT DRIVER (DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS) when a patient is admitted or discharged or an admission or discharge is edited. The visits for that patient are updated with inpatient or outpatient status based upon the admission and discharge dates. D EN^VSITSTAT
PXK SDAM TO V-FILES action Populates the V-Provider file based on the Provider identified by MAS clerks in the PIMS Check-out process. The V-Provider entry will only be created if the PIMS Check-out process has the Visit entry that the V-Provider entry should be related to. This protocol should be attached to the SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS Protocol. D EN1^PXKCO
PXCE ADD/EDIT action This action allows you to edit existing encounters or add one or more of the following: measurements, providers, problems treated at visit, CPT procedures, immunizations, skin tests, patient education, exams, health factors or treatments. You may also select an encounter to update by entering the number associated with the item at the "Select Item(s)" prompt. D GETVIEN^PXCEAE,EN^PXCEAE D MAKELIST^PXCENEW,DONE^PXCE
PXCE ADD/EDIT DISPLAY BRIEF action This action allows you to display a summarized profile of the selected patient encounter. S VALMBG=1,PXCEAEVW="B" D BUILD^PXCEAE1(PXCEVIEN,PXCEAEVW,"^TMP(""PXCEAE"",$J)","^TMP(""PXCEAEIX"",$J)") D DONE^PXCE
PXCE ADD/EDIT DISPLAY DETAIL action This action allows you to expand the display to include all available information related to the encounter, including the encounter date and time, the patient name, the hospital location and the workload credit stop. S VALMBG=1,PXCEAEVW="D" D BUILD^PXCEAE1(PXCEVIEN,PXCEAEVW,"^TMP(""PXCEAE"",$J)","^TMP(""PXCEAEIX"",$J)") D DONE^PXCE
PXCE ADD/EDIT HIDDEN menu This is the menu of hidden actions of the Update Encounter screen.
PXCE ADD/EDIT KNOWN ENCOUNTER action THIS PROTOCOL IS CALLED BY ANOTHER PROTOCOL Use this action to add new items or edit items about a patient encounter. I $G(PXCEVIEN)>0,$D(^AUPNVSIT(PXCEVIEN,0))#2 D EN^PXCEAE D MAKELIST^PXCENEW,DONE^PXCE
PXCE ADD/EDIT MENU menu This is the protocol menu of actions on the Update Encounter screen.
PXCE ADD/EDIT PATIENT CHANGE action This action allows selection of a new patient without returning to the "Appointment List" or "Encounter List" screen. After you select a new patient, a current list of appointments or encounters will be displayed for the selected patient. Enter the name in one of the standard formats: LASTNAME,FIRSTNAME LASTNAME, FIRST INITIAL First letter of last name + last 4 digits of SSN D NEWPAT2^PXCEPAT Q
PXCE BLANK 1 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE BLANK 2 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE BLANK 3 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE CHANGE HOSPITAL LOCATION action This action allows you to change the list of encounters based on the hospital location. If the list includes encounters for all locations, and a list for a specific location is desired, you may select a new location. The list will be redisplayed with encounters that relate to the new location. D NEWHLOC^PXCENEW D DONE^PXCE
PXCE CPT ADD action The action allows you to add/edit CPT coded procedures for a patient encounter. Additional information related to the CPT code may also be entered. This information may include: provider information, provider narrative, quantity, and diagnosis. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("CPT") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE DATE CHANGE action This action allows you to change the date range used for displaying encounters or appointments. You may change the beginning and/or ending date. D NEWDATE^PXCEDATE D DONE^PXCE
PXCE DELETE V-FILE action This action allows you to delete any item associated with an encounter, including providers, CPT codes, diagnoses, exams, immunizations, etc. You may delete one item, several items separated by commas, or a range of items separated by a hyphen. D DEL^PXCEAE D DONE^PXCE
PXCE DISPLAY DETAIL action This action allows you to expand the display to include all available information related to the encounter, including the encounter date and time, the patient name, the hospital location and the workload credit stop. I $D(^TMP("VALM DATA",$J,VALMEVL,"EXP")),^("EXP")]"" X ^("EXP") S:'VALMCC VALMBCK="R"
PXCE EDIT V-FILE action This action allows you to edit an entry for a selected encounter. You may edit one item, several items separated by commas, or a range of items separated by a hyphen. You may also edit entries by entering the number associated with the item at the "Select Item(s)" prompt. D EDIT^PXCEAE D DONE^PXCE
PXCE ENCOUNTER EDIT action This action displays encounter information related to the encounter, including the Encounter Date and Time, the Check Out Date and Time, the Evaluation and Management code, the Service Connected Status, Agent Orange Exposure, Ionizing Radiation Exposure, and Persian Gulf Exposure. If this is a main encounter, you may edit the Check Out Date and Time, the Evaluation and Management code and Service Connected. S PXCEFIEN=+^TMP("PXCEAEIX",$J,1) D EN^PXCEVFIL($S($P(^AUPNVSIT(+PXCEFIEN,0),"^",7)="E":"HIST",1:"VST")) D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE ENCOUNTER LIST action This action allows you to change the display from a list of appointments for this patient to a list of encounters for this patient. S $P(PXCEVIEW,"^",2)="V" S PXCECONT=1 Q
PXCE EXAM ADD action This action allows you to add an exam for the patient. You may enter additional information related to the exam such as the results of the exam, provider information and comments. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("XAM") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE HEALTH FACTORS ADD action This action allows you to add/edit a Health Factor for a patient encounter. You may also add additional information such as Level/Severity and Comments. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("HF") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE HOSPITAL LOCATION VIEW action This action allows you to change the display of appointments or encounters based on a clinic. For example, if your current list includes all appointments for a specified date range for the selected patient, and you want to display all appointments for a specific clinic, you may use this action to change the display to include appointments or encounters for the desired clinic. D NEWHOSL^PXCENEW D DONE^PXCE
PXCE IMMUNIZATION ADD action This action allows you to add an immunization for a patient encounter. You may also add additional information such as the encounter provider, the series (optional), reaction, date and time, and ordering provider. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("IMM") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE SDAM LIST MENU menu This action allows you to change which appointments will be displayed based on their status of the appointments. For example, you may change the display to list cancelled, checked in, checked out, future appointments, inpatient appointments, appointment where no action has been taken, non count appointments, no show appointments or all appointments. D FULL^VALM1 S XQORM(0)="1A" S:'$D(VALMBCK) VALMBCK="" D EXIT^PXCESDAM
PXCE MAIN HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This is the hidden actions for the PCE Encounter List display.
PXCE MAIN MENU menu This is the list of protocols that are the actions on the PCE Encounter List display.
PXCE NEW ENCOUNTER extended action This action allows you to add a new encounter for a patient. S PXCEVIEN="" D SDSALONE^PXCEPAT D:$G(PXCEPAT)>0 EN^PXCEVFIL("SIT")
PXCE PATIENT CHANGE action This action allows you to change the display of encounters based on the patient. If you select a new patient, the display will include encounters or appointments for the selected patient. D NEWPAT^PXCEPAT D DONE^PXCE
PXCE PATIENT ED ADD action This action allows you to add an education topic to indicate that the patient received education. Additional information such as level of understanding, encounter provider, and ordering provider may also be added. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("PED") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE POV ADD action This action allows you to add/edit an ICD coded diagnosis for a patient encounter. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("POV") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE PROVIDER ADD action This action allows you to enter or edit one or more providers for an encounter. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("PRV") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE QUIT action This action allows you to exit the PCE Update Encounter screen and return to the Appointment or Encounter List screen. D CHECK^PXCEVFI5 Q:PXCEEXIT D:'PXCEEXIT DONE^PXCE
PXCE QUIT COMPLETELY action This action allows you to exit PCE and return to your menu. K PXCEVIEW,PXCECONT Q
PXCE SDAM DISPLAY DETAIL action This action expands the display to include all available information related to one encounter for a selected appointment. I $D(^TMP("VALM DATA",$J,VALMEVL,"EXP")),^("EXP")]"" X ^("EXP") S:'VALMCC VALMBCK="R"
PXCE SDAM EXPAND action This action allows you to display all the patient demographics and appointment event log items that have been entered for a selected patient appointment. This action displays information from the Scheduling package and not from PCE. D EN^SDAMEP S:'VALMCC VALMBCK="R"
PXCE SDAM LIST action This action allows you to change your view from a list of existing encounters to a list of appointments. S $P(PXCEVIEW,"^",2)="A",PXCECONT=1 K:PXCEVIEW["P" PXCEHLOC Q
PXCE SDAM MENU menu This is the list of protocols that are the actions on the PCE Appointment List screen.
PXCE SDAM UPDATE ENCOUNTER action This action allows you to edit an encounter that is associated with an appointment. You may also edit additional information such as provider, diagnosis, procedure, treatment, measurement, immunization, skin test, patient education, exams, and treatments. You may also edit an encounter that is associated with an appointment by entering the number associated with the item at the "Select Item(s)" prompt. D SEL^PXCESDAM D MAKELIST^PXCENEW,DONE^PXCE
PXCE SKIN TEST ADD action This action allows you to enter a skin test or skin test code. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("SK") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE TREATMENT ADD action This action allows you to record one or more treatments for a patient encounter. A treatment is a procedure that can not be associated with a CPT code. S PXCEFIEN="" D EN^PXCEVFIL("TRT") D INIT^PXCEAE
PXK CPT-SCH TO V-CPT action This will only be connected to the protocol that is used by scheduling Redesign to transfer prodecures from the scheduling file to the V-CPT file along with associated diagnosis and provider. D EN1^PXSCH1
PXCE GMRP REVIEW SCREEN extended action This protocol can be added to the PCE menu protocols, PXCE MAIN MENU and PXCE SDAM MENU, to allow the user of PCE's user interface to go to Progress Notes without leaving the interface. D FULL^VALM1,JUSTDFN^PXCEPAT S:$G(DFN)'>0 XQORQUIT=1 D JUSTDFNK^PXCEPAT,DONE^PXCE
PXCE GMTS HS ADHOC extended action This protocol can be added to the PCE menu protocols, PXCE MAIN MENU and PXCE SDAM MENU, to allow the user of PCE's user interface to go to Health Summary without leaving the interface. D FULL^VALM1,JUSTDFN^PXCEPAT S:$G(DFN)'>0 XQORQUIT=1 D JUSTDFNK^PXCEPAT,DONE^PXCE
PXCE GMPL OE DATA ENTRY extended action This protocol can be added to the PCE menu protocols, PXCE MAIN MENU and PXCE SDAM MENU, to allow the user of PCE's user interface to go to Problem List without leaving the interface. D FULL^VALM1,JUSTDFN^PXCEPAT S:$G(DFN)'>0 XQORQUIT=1 D JUSTDFNK^PXCEPAT,DONE^PXCE
PXCE BLANK PL action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE BLANK PN action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE BLANK HS action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE BLANK 4 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE ADD/EDIT INTERVIEW action This action allows you to go through the interview questions for this encounter. D UPDATENC^PXCEINTR D INIT^PXCEAE
PXCE SDAM INTERVIEW action This action allows you to go through the interview questions for an encounter that is associated with an appointment. You may also edit additional information such as provider, diagnosis, and procedure. You may also edit an encounter that is associated with an appointment by entering the number associated with the item at the "Select Item(s)" prompt or using the Update Encounter. D SDINTRVW^PXCEINTR("INTV") D MAKELIST^PXCENEW,DONE^PXCE
PXCE INTERVIEW action This action allows you to go through the interview questions for an encounters. You may also edit additional information such as provider, diagnosis, and procedure. You may also select an encounter to update by entering the number associated with the item at the "Select Item(s)" prompt or by using the Update Encounter. D INTRVIEW^PXCEINTR D MAKELIST^PXCENEW,DONE^PXCE
PXCE HISTORICAL ENCOUNTER extended action Record an old encounter or an encounter at a different facility even on VA facilities. S PXCEVIEN="" D NEWENC^PXCEHELP D:Y EN^PXCEVFIL("HIST")
PXCE CHANGE CLINIC STOP action This action allows you to change the display of encounters based on the credit stop. You may select from the following credit stop views: (M) Main Encounter Only; (A) All Encounters; or (O) One Clinic Stop. If you select "M", ony the main encounters will be displayed. If you select "A", all encounters will be displayed. If you select "O", you will be prompted to specify a Clinic Stop. D NEWCLST^PXCENEW D DONE^PXCE
PXCE BLANK SELECT NEW PATIENT action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PXCE SDAM STANDALONE extended action This action allows you to add a new encounter for a patient. D SDSALONE^PXCEPAT S PXCEVIEN=$$VISITLST^PXAPI($G(PXCEPAT),PXCEDBEG,PXCEDEND,$G(PXCEHLOC),"OP",-1,"A") D:PXCEVIEN="A" EN^PXCEVFIL("SIT") D SDKALONE^PXCEPAT
SDAM PCE EVENT action This protocol is the event handler attached to the PXK VISIT DATA EVENT protocol. The protocol processes scheduled appointment check out data made available by this PCE event point. PCE currently obtains this check out data from MCCR data capture pilots and also a manual entry module within the PCE package. D EN^SDPCE
SDAM CPT action This action permits the user to update the procedures associated with appointments that have a check out date/time. D CO^SDCOAM("CPT","procedure")
SDCO CPT action This action permits the user to update the procedures associated with appointments that have a check out date/time. D EN^SDCO9
FB BATCH STATUS action S FBPR="BS" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB INVOICE DISPLAY action S FBPR="INV" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB DISPLAY VENDOR action D DV^FBPHON2
FB LIST BATCH action S FBPR="BT" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB DISPLAY AUTHORIZATION action S FBPR="DA" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB PHONE MENU menu
FB CHANGE VENDOR action D CV^FBPHON2
FB CHANGE VETERAN action D CP^FBPHON2
FB DISPLAY CHECK action S FBPR="DC" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB EXPAND VIEW action S FBPR="EV" D ^FBPHON2 K FBPR
FB CPT DESCRIPTION action S FBPR="CD" D EN^FBPHON2 K FBPR
RA OERR EXAM protocol This option is used to link the Rad/Nuc Med Package with the Order Entry Package (OE/RR) being developed by the Salt Lake City ISC. D ^RAORR
RA OERR PROFILE action This action protocal is used in OE/RR for reporting results of radiology and nuclear medicine reports. Q:'$D(ORVP) S RADFN=+ORVP,RAHEAD="**** RAD/NUC MED PATIENT EXAMS ****" S (RAF1,RAREPORT)=1 D ^RAPTLU Q:X["^"!'$D(RADUP) D OERR^RAORDQ K RAF1,RAREPORT D READ^ORUTL
RA OERR DEFAULT PROTOCOL protocol D ^RAORR
RA ORDERABLE ITEM UPDATE extended action Invoked whenever a single Radiology/Nuc Med procedure is added or edited. and Radiology/Nuclear Medicine V4.5 have been installed at a site. This protocol is NOT used for this initial population. Instead, function calls are used in this one-time event. Creates an HL7 message array containing all data associated with the procedure. The triggering event may be an add/edit of an entry in the Rad/Nuc Med Procedure file (which can change any data item related to a procedure), or an add/edit of the Rad/Nuc Med Common Procedure file (which only affects the Common Order Flag of the ZRA segment). An initial, one-time only population of the OE/RR Orderable file with Rad/Nuc Med procedures will occur at the point in time when both OE/RR V3 K:$L($G(RAVARBLE)) @RAVARBLE,RAVARBLE
RA EVSEND OR extended action Invoked when a request is created or changed by the Radiology/Nuclear Medicine package (the "backdoor") and the data is passed to the Order Entry package, Version 3.0 or greater. K:$L($G(RAVARBLE)) @RAVARBLE,RAVARBLE
RA RECEIVE action D EN1^RAO7RO(.XQORMSG)
RA REG event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is registered. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM message consisting of PID, ORC, OBR and OBX segments. The message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. Q
RA CANCEL event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is cancelled. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM message consisting of PID, ORC, OBR and OBX segments. The message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of cancellation, procedure modifiers, patient allergies and clinical history. Q
RA RPT event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine report enters into a status of Verified or Released/Not Verified. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORU message consisting of PID, OBR and OBX segments. The message contains relevant information about the report, including procedure, procedure modifiers, diagnostic code, interpreting physician, impression text and report text. Q
IVM MEANS TEST EVENT extended action Center. This event will be called each time a means test is added, edited, or deleted. It will check two things: 1) If the means test meets IVM criteria for tranmsission, it will send demographic and income information to the IVM Center. 2) If the IVM Center has already received data about the patient for the means test year, updated information will be sent to the IVM D ^IVMPMTE
IVM INSURANCE EVENT extended action This event will be called when patient insurance policy data is added, that patient's Means Test data is queued for transmission. edited, or deleted. Two checks are performed: 1) If the insurance status of an active IVM patient has changed since that patient's Means Test data was last transmitted to the IVM Center, the data will be queued for re-transmission. 2) If the patient is Category C, has no active case record, and does not have active insurance, a case record is added and D ^IVMPINS
IBAMTV REV PASS CHARGE action D PC^IBAMTV32
IBAMTV REV IND CHARGES menu
IBAMTV REV CANC CHARGE action D CC^IBAMTV32
IBAMTV SEL PATIENT action D SP^IBAMTV31
IBAMTV REV PATIENT menu
IVMLS PURGE SSN action This protocol will be used by the IVM SSN Update utility to purge an entry on the list if the user feels it is not appropriate. D PU^IVMLSU2
IVMLS UPLOAD SSN action This protocol may be used to upload an SSN from the list of suggested SSN received back from the Social Security Administration (SSA). D UP^IVMLSU2
IVMLS SSN UPLOAD menu This menu contains all the activities allowed when updating IVM information using the Upload IVM Data option.
IVMLI DISPLAY ENTRY action D DE^IVMLINS1
IVMLI INSURANCE UPLOAD menu
IVMLD SELECT UPLOADABLE action D UD^IVMLDEM1
IVMLD DEMO UPLOAD menu
IVMLD UPLOADABLE DEMO menu
IVMLD UPLOAD FIELDS action D UF^IVMLDEM4
IVMLD SELECT NON-UPLOADABLE action D ND^IVMLDEM1
IVMLD DELETE FIELDS action D DF^IVMLDEM4
IVMLD SELECT HELP action D EN^IVMLDEM5
IVMLD NON-UPLOADABLE FIELDS menu
IVMLI SELECT HELP action D EXHLP^IVMLINS5
SCDX AMBCARE EVENT action This is the ambcare event handler that will hang off of the Scheduling event driver. It will monitor the events that are happening and populate the necessary Ambcare files in the case of new encounters, edits or deletes to existing encounters. D EN^SCDXHLDR
SCDX AMBCARE SEND SERVER FOR ADT-Z00 event driver HL7 server protocol for the sending of batch ADT-Z00 messages by the Ambulatory Care Reporting Project. These batch messages will contain ADT-A08 & ADT-A23 messages as required and used by the National Patient Care Databse.
SCDX AMBCARE SEND CLIENT FOR ADT-Z00 subscriber HL7 client protocol for the sending of batch ADT-Z00 messages by the Ambulatory Care Reporting Project. These batch messages will contain ADT-A08 & ADT-A23 messages as required and used by the National Patient Care Databse.
GMPL HIDDEN MENU menu This menu contains the List Manager functions relevant to the operation of the Problem List application; it is accessible from any "Select Action" prompt by entering "??".
GMPL PROBLEM LIST menu This menu uses the List Manager utility to display a patient's problem list with data relevant to the needs of a clinician. Various actions may be taken here such as adding, removing, editing, inactivating, and appending comments; the user may also see a detailed display of selected problem(s) or change which problems appear on the displayed view of the list. A new patient's list may be selected or a printout of the list generated.
GMPL DATA ENTRY menu This menu uses the List Manager utility to display a patient's problem list with data relevant to the needs of a clinic or billing clerk. Various actions may be taken here such as adding, removing, editing, and printing problems.
GMPL DT MENU menu This menu contains actions available for navigating the problems selected to review in the "Detailed Display" action. The user may go on to the next selected problem when finished reviewing, or exit and return to the problem list.
GMPL EDIT MENU menu This protocol is for use with the List Manager utility, to display the current editable values of the selected problem entry in a list format for editing.
GMPL USER PREFS menu This menu contains actions allowing a user to change his/her preferred view of patient problem lists. A set of services may be defined here that will be used as a default screen when displaying patient problem lists for this user; the view may be changed dynamically within the Problem List application through the "Change View" action, but it will not be stored as a new default unless updated here.
GMPL LIST MENU menu This protocol is for use with the List Manager utility, to display the user's preferred list of commonly seen problems to facilitate selection and addition to the patient's problem list.
GMPL MENU BUILD LIST menu This menu allows the creation of lists of problems, to facilitate selecting a new problem to add to a patient's problem list. Problems are added or removed in categories, which may also be ordered or titled for clarity.
GMPL MENU BUILD GROUP menu This menu allows the creation of categories of problems, to facilitate selecting a new problem to add to a patient's problem list. Categories may then be linked together to form lists, in which they may be ordered and titled. Categories may be reused in multiple lists, as well.
GMPL CODE LIST menu This menu uses the List Manager utility to display all of a patient's problems with data relevant to a billing clerk/coder. Only the ICD code may be edited, but a detailed display of all information stored about a problem is available to facilitate the assignment of a code.
GMPL NEW PROBLEM action This action will allow the addition of a new entry to a patient's problem list. The user will be asked to select a term from the Clinical Lexicon Utility describing the problem, and to enter other relevant information. D ADD^GMPL
GMPL EDIT REFORMULATE action This action allows limited reformulation of the current problem. If new problem text is entered, the narrative is passed to the Clinical Lexicon Utility to find a match; both the user's narrative and the new Clinical term will be stored, as with a new problem entry. If the new problem selected from the CLU is already an entry on the patient's list, the user will be alerted. D TERM^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL ANNOTATE action This action will append a brief comment(s) to a problem entry, up to 200 characters in length. D NOTES^GMPL
GMPL DETAILED DISPLAY action This action will present an expanded display of each problem selected from the patient's problem list. All available information will be shown, including comments by all authors and an audit trail of changes made to the problem. D EXPAND^GMPL
GMPL PATIENT action This allows selection of a new patient from within the Problem List application; a new list will be generated and displayed for review. D NEWPAT^GMPLMGR1
GMPL PRINT action This action allows printing a copy of the problem list, either the currently displayed view (which may be abbreviated) or the complete list in chartable format. D EN^GMPLPRNT
GMPL INACTIVATE action This action allows a problem to be inactivated. D STATUS^GMPL
GMPLX BLANK1 action Blank placeholder for menu actions. Q
GMPLX BLANK2 action Blank placeholder for menu actions. Q
GMPL EDIT PROBLEM action This option allows editing of select fields of a problem entry; all changes made to a patient's problem are recorded in the Problem Audit file. A problem is selected, and control is transferred to the List Manager and GMPL EDIT MENU protocol. D EDIT^GMPL
GMPL DELETE action This action will remove an entry from a patient's problem list; the problem is not physically deleted from the file, but flagged as "removed" and, except for historical purposes, generally ignored. D DELETE^GMPL
GMPL EDIT PROVIDER action This action allows the entry/editing of the primary provider of care for this problem. D PROV^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL EDIT SAVE action This action allows the user to save any changes made to the current problem, and return to the entire problem list. If this action is not selected and the problem has been changed, the user will be asked when exiting if s/he wishes to save the changes. W !!,"Saving ..." D EN^GMPLSAVE W " done." S VALMBCK="Q"
GMPL EDIT REMOVE action This action will remove the current entry from the patient's list; the problem is not physically deleted from the file, but flagged as "removed" and, except for historical purposes, generally ignored. The user is then returned to the entire problem list. D DELETE^GMPLEDT2
GMPL EDIT NOTES action This action will allow editing of comments that have previously been appended to a problem entry. Notes will be displayed for editing only if the current user is the author of the note; accessing this action through the Manager's Menu will set a flag allowing all notes for the current problem to be displayed and edited. D NTES^GMPLEDT4 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL EDIT STATUS action This action allows editing the status assigned to a problem; if the problem is inactivated, the user will be asked for Date Resolved also. D STATUS^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL EDIT ONSET action This action allows the entry/editing of the date of onset of a problem. D ONSET^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL EDIT SC action This action allows editing the service connection status of the current problem; if the service connection of this problem was previously unknown, it may be entered here. Data will only be asked for if the patient has service connection indicated in the Patient file. MCCR will be using this data for billing purposes. D SC^GMPLEDT1 I 'GMPSC W !!,"This patient has no service-connection on file.",! H 2 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL VIEW ACTIVE action This action will screen the problems from the current patient's list for only those that are currently active. S:GMPLVIEW("ACT")'="A" GMPREBLD=1,GMPLVIEW("ACT")="A"
GMPL VIEW SERVICE action This action will screen the problems from the current patient's list for only those associated with the selected service(s) for care. D NEWSRV^GMPLMGR1
GMPL VIEW PROVIDER action This action will screen the problems from the current patient's list for only those listed as being treated by the selected provider. D NEWPROV^GMPLMGR1
GMPL VIEW INACTIVE action This action will screen the problems from the current patient's list for only those that are currently inactive. S:GMPLVIEW("ACT")'="I" GMPREBLD=1,GMPLVIEW("ACT")="I"
GMPL VIEW BOTH action This action will remove any current screen on problem status and include problems that are both active and inactive on the display. S:GMPLVIEW("ACT")'="" GMPREBLD=1,GMPLVIEW("ACT")=""
GMPL EDIT SERVICE action This action allows the entry/editing of the service primarily responsible for the care of this problem. This data will be used for screening and grouping the problems displayed in the user's selected view of the list. D SOURCE^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL EDIT NEW NOTE action This action will allow appending addtional comment(s) to the currently selected problem. D NOTE^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL VERIFY action If the parameter "Verify Transcribed Problems" is turned on in the Problem List Site Parameters file (#125.99), this action will allow a clinician to mark the selected problem(s) as verified. A "$" will appear immediately in front of the problem text for problems that were transcribed in by a clerk and the above described parameter is on; entering a "$" at the "Select Action" prompt will invoke this action. D VERIFY^GMPL
GMPL DT CONTINUE action If multiple problems were selected for review under the "Detailed Display" action, this will allow retrieval of the data from the next problem of those selected. D EN^GMPLDISP
GMPL PRINT LIST action This action will generate a complete listing of the patient's problem list in chartable format. Active and inactive problems will appear here in this listing. S Y="A",VALMBCK=$S(VALMCC:"",1:"R") D EN1^GMPLPRNT
GMPL VIEW ALL PROV action This action will remove any current screen on primary providers of care for problems, and include problems being treated by all providers. S:GMPLVIEW("PROV")'=0 GMPLVIEW("PROV")=0,GMPREBLD=1
GMPL VIEW ALL SERV action This action will remove any current screen on services associated with problems, and include problems being treated by all services. S:"S"'[GMPLVIEW("VIEW") GMPLVIEW("VIEW")="S",GMPREBLD=1
GMPL EDIT SP action This action allows editing the special exposures associated with the current problem; if exposures related to this problem were previously unknown, it may be entered here. Data will only be asked for if the patient is indicated for Agent Orange, Ionizing Radiation, or Persian Gulf exposures in the Patient file. MCCR will be using this data for billing. D SP^GMPLEDT1 I 'GMPAGTOR,'GMPION,'GMPGULF W !!,"This patient has no special exposures on file.",! H 2 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL OE PROBLEM LIST action This action will allow entry to the Problem List application from the OE/RR Clinician and Nurse menus. The variable ORVP is checked for the current patient, and then control is passed to the PL. S DFN=+$G(ORVP) D:DFN DEM^VADPT S:DFN GMPDFN=DFN_U_VADM(1)_U_$E(VADM(1))_VA("BID") D EN^GMPL
GMPL OE DATA ENTRY action This action will allow entry to the Problem List application from the OE/RR Ward Clerk menu. The variable ORVP is checked for the current patient, and then control is passed to the PL. S DFN=+$G(ORVP) D:DFN DEM^VADPT S:DFN GMPDFN=DFN_U_VADM(1)_U_$E(VADM(1))_VA("BID") D DE^GMPL
GMPL EDIT VERIFY action If the parameter "Verify Transcribed Problems" is turned on in the Problem List Site Parameters file (#125.99), this action will allow a clinician to mark the current problem as verified. A "$" will appear immediately in front of the problem text if the current problem was transcribed in by a clerk and the above described parameter is on; entering a "$" at the "Select Item" prompt will invoke this action. D VERIFY^GMPLEDT2 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL MENU ADD GROUP action This action allows adding one or more problem categories to a selection list. D ADD^GMPLBLD
GMPL MENU EDIT GROUP DISPLAY action This action allows the user to change the text that appears as the subheader of a category of problems, and whether or not to display the problems in the category automatically on entry to the list. D EDIT^GMPLBLD1
GMPL MENU REMOVE GROUP action This action allows the user to remove a problem category from the current list; it remains in the Problem Selection Category file for future use. D REMOVE^GMPLBLD
GMPL MENU NEW LIST action This action allows the user to switch to editing a new problem selection list. D NEWLST^GMPLBLD2
GMPL MENU VIEW LIST action This action allows the user to toggle between displaying the sequence numbers assigned to each category for ordering, or the display numbers only. S GMPLMODE=$S(GMPLMODE="E":"I",1:"E"),VALMBCK="R",VALMSG=$$MSG^GMPLX W !,"Rebuilding selection list display to"_$S(GMPLMODE="E":" not",1:"")_" show sequence numbers ..." D BUILD^GMPLBLD("^TMP(""GMPLIST"",$J)",GMPLMODE)
GMPL MENU RESEQUENCE GROUPS action This action allows the user to place the problem caetgories on the current list in a different order; problems will be automatically renumbered. D RESEQ^GMPLBLD1 I $D(GMPREBLD) D BUILD^GMPLBLD("^TMP(""GMPLIST"",$J)",GMPLMODE) K GMPREBLD
GMPL MENU SAVE LIST action This action allows the user to save any changes that have been made to the current list and exit the utility. D SAVE^GMPLBLD2 S ^GMPL(125,+GMPLSLST,0)=$P(GMPLSLST,U,2)_U_DT_U_$P(GMPLSLST,U,4)_U_$P(GMPLSLST,U,5) D HDR^GMPLBLD
GMPL LIST SELECT ITEM action This action will allow selection of a problem listed in the displayed menu, to be added to the current patient's problem list. The same prompts will be stepped through for each problem selected as if it had been entered through the regular 'Add' action. If the item selected is a category heading, the list will be expanded to include all the problems included in that category for selection. D ITEM^GMPLMENU D CK^GMPLMENU
GMPL LIST CLU action This action will allow selection of a problem not listed in the displayed menu, to be added to the current patient's problem list. The code invoked here is the same as for the regular 'Add' action, possibly allowing a look-up into the Clinical Lexicon Utility. D CLU^GMPLMENU D CK^GMPLMENU
GMPL MENU DELETE GROUP action This action allows the user to delete a problem category; it will be completely removed from the Problem Selection Category file, if no list currently contains it. D DELETE^GMPLBLD2
GMPL MENU CREATE GROUP action This action transfers control to the List Manager utility, to bring up a new screen allowing the entry/editing of any problem category. The user will be asked for the category s/he wishes to review and edit, and a screen similar to the 'Build List' menu will be shown allowing similar actions to edit the contents of the selected category. A new category may be entered here, which will be available to add to the current list upon return to the 'Build List' screen when finished. D EDIT^GMPLBLD I $D(GMPSAVED) D BUILD^GMPLBLD("^TMP(""GMPLIST"",$J)",GMPLMODE),HDR^GMPLBLD K GMPSAVED
GMPL MENU SAVE GROUP action This action allows the user to save any changes that have been made to the current category and exit the utility. D SAVE^GMPLBLD2 S ^GMPL(125.11,+GMPLGRP,0)=$P(GMPLGRP,U,2)_U_DT_U_$P(GMPLGRP,U,4) D HDR^GMPLBLDC
GMPL MENU NEW GROUP action This action allows the user to switch to editing a new problem category. D NEWGRP^GMPLBLD2
GMPL MENU ADD PROBLEM action This action allows adding one or more problems to a problem category. D ADD^GMPLBLDC
GMPL MENU REMOVE PROBLEM action This action allows the user to remove a problem from the current category. D REMOVE^GMPLBLDC
GMPL MENU RESEQUENCE PROBLEMS action This action allows the user to place the problems in the current category in a different order; problems will be automatically renumbered for display and selection purposes. D RESEQ^GMPLBLD1 I $D(GMPREBLD) D BUILD^GMPLBLDC("^TMP(""GMPLIST"",$J)",GMPLMODE) K GMPREBLD
GMPL MENU EDIT PROBLEM action This action allows the user to edit the problem and its associated code; if no code is currently assigned to the problem, one may be entered. D EDIT^GMPLBLDC
GMPL MENU VIEW GROUP action This action allows the user to toggle between displaying the sequence numbers assigned to each problem for ordering, or the display numbers only. S GMPLMODE=$S(GMPLMODE="E":"I",1:"E"),VALMBCK="R",VALMSG=$$MSG^GMPLX W !,"Rebuilding problem category display to"_$S(GMPLMODE="E":" not",1:"")_" show sequence numbers ..." D BUILD^GMPLBLDC("^TMP(""GMPLIST"",$J)",GMPLMODE)
GMPL CODE ICD SEARCH action This option allows the user to search the ICD Diagnosis file for the selected problem's text; for this option it is recommended that the Multi-Term Lookup utility be setup to operate on this file (#80). D EDIT^GMPLCODE
GMPL EDIT ICD action This action allows a user with the GMPL ICD CODE key to assign a [new] ICD Code to a problem. D ICD^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL VIEW OUTPAT menu This menu contains actions allowing the user to change his/her current view of the patient's problem list. The problems displayed onscreen may be changed by selecting the status, clinic, and/or provider from which the user wishes to see problems listed. The number of problems listed and the total number of problems will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
GMPL VIEW RESTORE action This action will replace the currently specified view with the user's pre-defined preferred view. S X=$$VIEW^GMPLX1(DUZ) W:'$L(X) !,"You have no preferred view defined.",! Q:'$L(X) S:X'=GMPLVIEW("VIEW") GMPREBLD=1,GMPLVIEW("VIEW")=X K X S:GMPLVIEW("PROV") GMPLVIEW("PROV")=0,GMPREBLD=1 S:GMPLVIEW("ACT")'="A" GMPLVIEW("ACT")="A",GMPREBLD=1
GMPL UP ADD ITEM action This action allows the user to include additional service(s) in his/her preferred view of patient problem lists. D ADD^GMPLPRF1
GMPL UP REMOVE ITEM action This action allows the user to remove service(s) from his/her preferred view of patient problem lists. D REMOVE^GMPLPRF1
GMPL UP SAVE VIEW action This action allows the user to save any changes made to his/her preferred view of patient problem lists; control is passed back to the User Preferences menu. S GMPSAVED=1,VALMBCK="Q" D SAVE^GMPLPRF1
GMPL MENU ASSIGN LIST action This action allows the user to assign this list to a clinic or to user(s). Linking a list to a clinic will invoke the list whenever a user selects that clinic as the location where the patient was seen, when adding new problems. If a list is linked to a user, this is the list that will always be invoked when that user is adding new problems, regardless of the clinic specified that the patient was seen in. D ASSIGN^GMPLBLD2
GMPL VIEW INCLUDE INACTIVE action This action will include problems that are both active and inactive on the list of problems displayed; active problems will appear first, followed by the inactive problems. D INACTIVE^GMPLMGR1
GMPL VIEW ALL CLIN action This action will remove any current screen on clinics associated with problems, and include problems being followed by all clinics. S:"C"'[GMPLVIEW("VIEW") GMPLVIEW("VIEW")="C",GMPREBLD=1
GMPL VIEW CLINIC action This action will screen the problems from the current patient's list for only those associated with the selected clinic(s) for care. D NEWCLIN^GMPLMGR1
GMPL VIEW INPAT menu This menu contains actions allowing the user to change his/her current view of the patient's problem list. The problems displayed onscreen may be changed by selecting the status, service, and/or provider from which the user wishes to see problems listed. The number of problems listed and the total number of problems will be shown in the upper right-hand corner of the screen.
GMPL VIEW action This allows the user to change the problems displayed onscreen in the patient's list, on-the-fly. Various attributes are presented for selection such as status, provider, and clinic (or service if the patient is currently admitted). D ENVIEW^GMPLMGR2 D EXVIEW^GMPLMGR2
GMPL UP SWITCH action This action allows the user to switch to a different preferred view. If one is currently editing a service view of problem lists, this action will clear the current view and bring up a list of clinics from which to select a view, and vice-versa from clinic to service list. NOTE: Each user may have only ONE preferred view at a time! D SWITCH^GMPLPRF1
GMPL EDIT RECORDED action This action allows editing of the date the problem was originally recorded; date will default to NOW when entering a new problem, but may be changed to an earlier date to reflect entry in the paper chart. D RECORDED^GMPLEDT1 D CK^GMPLEDT3
GMPL UP DELETE VIEW action This action allows the user to delete his/her preferred view and exit the utility. The user will again see all active problems, when initially displaying a patient's problem list. D DELETE^GMPLPRF1
GMPL VIEW SWITCH action This action will allow the user to switch from displaying the problems in an outpatient mode to an inpatient mode, or vice-versa. If clinic information is currently being displayed, service and provider will now be displayed after selecting this action; likewise, if service and provider information are currently displayed, clinic will now be shown. S X=$E(GMPLVIEW("VIEW")),GMPLVIEW("VIEW")=$S(X="S":"C",1:"S"),GMPREBLD=1,Y=$S(X="S":"Clinic",1:"Service/Provider") D CHGCAP^VALM("CLINIC",Y) K X,Y
SCDX MENU FOR RETRAN REJECTS FROM NPCDB menu
SCDX SELECT PATIENT FOR RETRAN REJECTS FROM NPCDB action D MARKPT^SCDXRT02(0)
SCDX SELECT ALL FOR RETRAN REJECTS FROM NPCDB action D MARKALL^SCDXRT02(0)
SCDX DESELECT PATIENT FOR RETRAN REJECTS FROM NPCDB action D MARKPT^SCDXRT02(1)
SCDX DESELECT ALL FOR RETRAN REJECTS FROM NPCDB action D MARKALL^SCDXRT02(1)
SCDX DESELECT RETRANS BY NUMBER action D MARK^SCDXRT02(1)
SCDX SELECT RETRANS BY NUMBER action D MARK^SCDXRT02(0)
PRCO EDI GENERATOR action D REPORTS^PRCOER1
PRCO EDI REPORTS menu K ^TMP("PRCOER")
PRCO EDI STATS SUMMARY action This protocol is called from the PRCO EDI list manager template. It generates a summary review of all data stored in file 443.75. D ^PRCOER2
PRCO EDI EXCEPTION action This report includes exceptions in PRJ and POA transactions, for a date range. D ^PRCOER4
LREPI event driver This event driver protocol defines the associated parameters needed to build the HL7 Message used to send the EPI data to Austin.
LREPI CLIENT subscriber This subscriber protocol defines the parameter needed by the HL7 package to determine were to send the HL7 formatted message containing the EPI information.
RA EXAMINED event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam has reached a status where GENERATE EXAMINED HL7 MSG is Y at that (or at a lower) status. This message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. Q
RA SEND ORM subscriber This protocol receives the HL7 message. Q Q
RA SEND ORU subscriber This protocol receives the HL7 message. Q Q
PSD PAT ADT action D ^PSDADT1
PSD A01 SERVER event driver Triggered by the DGPM MOVEMENT DRIVER, this protocol serves admissions.
PSD A01 CLIENT subscriber Delivers admit (A01) messages to narcotic dispensing equipment systems.
PSD A02 SERVER event driver Triggered by the DGPM MOVEMENT DRIVER, it serves admissions.
PSD A02 CLIENT subscriber Delivers transfers (A02) to narcotic dispensing equipment systems.
PSD A03 SERVER event driver Triggered by the DGPM MOVEMENT DRIVER, it serves discharges.
PSD A03 CLIENT subscriber Delivers discharges to narcotic dispensing equipment systems
PSD DFT SERVER event driver These messages record dispensing activity as it occurs at narcotic dispensing equipment systems.
PSD DFT CLIENT subscriber Records dispensing activity when it occurs at narcotic dispensing equipment systems.
IBDF EF TASK INTERRUPT action S IBDFSTOP=1 D STAT^IBDFPE1 K IBDFSTOP
IBDF FORM COMPONENT MENU menu
IBDF FORM COMPONENT ACTION action D INIT^IBDFCMP
IBDF COMPONENT EXP PROTO menu
IBDF COMP EXP action D ^IBDFCMP1
IBDF QUICK GROUP RESEQUENCE action D GRPRESEQ^IBDFQEA
IBDF FT RELEASE action This option should be used to free a Forms Tracking entry when not all pages of the form have been received, but the remaining pages have been lost. This option will take the data that has been stored temporarily in Forms Tracking (from the pages that were scanned), and will pass it across to PCE. D FREEFT^IBDFFRFT
DGPRE RG MENU menu Menu for Preregistration List Manager Call List
DGPRE RG CP action D EDIT^DGPREP1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPRE RG EDIT action D EDIT^DGPREP0 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPRE RG XH action D STAT^DGPREP1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPRE RG EH action D EH^DGPREP1
DGPRE HIST SC action Displays comments associated with the call attempt in the Call Log. D EXPND^DGPREP2 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPRE HIST MENU menu
DGPRE EXPAND PATIENT action Displays the patient inquiry screens for Load/Edit for selected patient D PTINQ^DGPREP2 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRVORMENU protocol menu
GMRVORTPR limited protocol D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORTPR B/P limited protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORADMIT V/M limited protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORPULSE protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORB/P protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORWT protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORTEMP protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORRESP protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORHT protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORP SF511 action This is the option that will create the protocol for the SF511 Patient Profile in OERR. Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) S DFN=+ORVP D EN4^GMRVSR0 K DFN
GMRVORP CUM REPORT action This option will create the protocol for the Cumulative Vitals report. Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) S DFN=+ORVP D EN2^GMRVSC0 K DFN
GMRVORP DISP VITALS action This option will create the protocol for the latest vitals display. Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) S DFN=+ORVP D EN3^GMRVDS0 K DFN
GMRVOR DGPM extended action This option will become the GMRVOR DGPM protocol, and should be linked to the DGOERR TRANSFER EVENTS protocol. This protocol will perform events that are appropriate for the GMRV package. Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN4^GMRVORDG
GMRVORCG protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORPO protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORCVP protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
PXCE VIEW ONLY menu This is the list of protocols that are the actions on the PCE Encounter List display.
PXCE SDAM VIEW ONLY menu This is the list of protocols that are the actions on the PCE Appointment List screen.
IBCR CHARGE SET SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLC
IBCE ADD LOCAL FORM action D ADDL^IBCEFG4
IBCE EDIT LOCAL FORM action D EDIT^IBCEFG4
IBCE EXIT action Allows the user to exit the system without quitting through the hierarchy of screens, or the user can exit to the previous screen. D FASTEXIT^IBCEFG4
IBCE LOCAL FORM MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE LOCAL FORM DETAIL MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE LOCAL FORM VIEW/EDIT action D SELX^IBCEFG3 D:$G(IBCEXDA) EN^VALM("IBCE LOCAL FORM DETAIL"),BLD^IBCEFG3
IBCE DELETE LOCAL FORM action D DELETE^IBCEFG41
IBCE LOCAL FORM FIELD EDIT action D FFLDS^IBCEFG4
IBCE SWITCH FORM action D CHGFORM^IBCEFG4
IBCE FORM FIELDS LIST MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE ADD FORM FIELD action D ADD^IBCEFG6
IBCE DELETE FORM FIELD action D DELETE^IBCEFG60
IBCE EDIT FORM FIELD action D EDIT^IBCEFG6
IBCE DEFINE FIELD CONTENT action D CONTENT^IBCEFG6()
IBCE ADD/EDIT LOCAL ELEMENT action D ELEMENT^IBCEFG41
IBCE VIEW ELEMENT action D VIEWEL^IBCEFG6()
IBCE TEST FORM action D TEST^IBCEFG8
IBCE VIEW FORM FIELD action D VIEWF^IBCEFG6()
IBCR RATE SCHEDULE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR CHARGE ITEM SCREEN action D ENCI^IBCRLA1
IBCR BILLING RATE SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLR
IBCR RATE TYPE SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLT
IBCR CHARGE SET MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR RATE SCHEDULE EDIT action D EDRS^IBCRLA1
IBCR RATE TYPE EDIT action D EDRT^IBCRLA1
IBCR RATE TYPE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR BILLING RATE EDIT action D EDBR^IBCRLA1
IBCR BILLING RATE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR CHARGE SET EDIT action D EDCS^IBCRLA1
IBCR CHARGE ITEM EDIT action D EDCI^IBCRLA1
IBCR CHARGE ITEM MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR CHARGE ITEM CHANGE action D CICITM^IBCRLA1
IBCR CHARGE ITEM DATES action D CICDTS^IBCRLA1
IBCR EXIT action D FASTEXIT^IBCRLA1
IBCR BILLING REGION SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLG
IBCR BILLING REGION EDIT action D EDRG^IBCRLA1
IBCR BILLING REGION MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR RATE SCHEDULE SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLS
IBCR INTRODUCTION MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>4 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR MAIN SCREEN action D MAINSCR^IBCRLA1
IBCR BILLING ITEM EDIT action D EDBI^IBCRLA1
LR7O CH EVSEND OR extended action
LR7O ORDERABLE OR extended action
LR7O BB EVSEND OR extended action
LR7O AP EVSEND OR extended action
LR7O CH RECEIVE action D EN^LR7OF0(.XQORMSG)
LR7O AP RECEIVE action D EN^LR7OF0(.XQORMSG,"LRAP")
LR7O BB RECEIVE action D EN^LR7OF0(.XQORMSG)
LR7O TEST STATUS action D OERR^LROS($G(ORVP))
LR7O ALL EVSEND RESULTS extended action
DGEN PATIENT ENROLLMENT MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for patient enrollment.
DGEN ENROLL PATIENT action This protocol action permits the user to enroll a patient who is a veteran that is eligible for care, who is not already enrolled. D EP^DGEN1
DGEN CEASE ENROLLMENT action This protocol action permits the user to cease the enrollment of a patient who is enrolled. Cease Enrollment functionality was disabled by DG*5.3*232. Code, options, and protocols will not be deleted until it is determined they will not be used in future releases. D CE^DGEN1
DGENPT PREFERRED FACILITY action This protocol action permits the user to enter/edit the patient's preferred facility. D PF^DGENPT
DGEN MT AUTOMATIC ENROLLMENT UPDATE extended action This event is called each time a means test is added, edited, or deleted. If there has been change in the Means Test the patient's current enrollment will be updated. D MTUPD^DGENA2
DGENCD CATASTROPHIC DISABILITY MENU menu Contains the protocols for adding, editing, and deleting patient catastrophic disability data.
DGENCD ADD/EDIT CATASTROPHIC DISABILITY action DGENCD ADD/EDIT This action will allow the catastrophic disability information for a patient to be added or edited, but not deleted. If catastrophic disability information is added, the Catastrophically Disabled eligibility code is added. D ADDCD^DGENCD1
DGENCD DELETE CATASTROPHIC DISABILITY action CD DELETE This action will allow the catastrophic disability information for a patient to be deleted. If catastrophic disability information is deleted, the Catastrophically Disabled eligibility code is also deleted. D DELETECD^DGENCD1
DGENCD CATASTROPHIC DISABILITY action Displays the DGEN CATASTROPHIC DISABILITY List Template. D EN^DGENCD1($G(DFN))
DGEN EXPAND HISTORY action This protocol action permits the user to expand an enrollment history record. D EH^DGEN1
DGEN SELECT PATIENT action This protocol action permits the user to select a different patient. D SP^DGEN1
USR CLASS STATUS SELECT menu Select the resolution status for the filing errors which you would like to see displayed.
USR CLASS STATUS ALL action Show all filing errors, regardless of their resolution status.
USR CLASS STATUS ACTIVE action Show all filing errors, regardless of their resolution status.
USR CLASS STATUS INACTIVE action Show only those errors which have NOT yet been resolved.
USR CLASS ACTION MENU menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
USR CLASS ACTION CHANGE VIEW action Allows users to modify the list of reports by signature status, review screen and dictation date range without exiting the review screen. D MAKELIST^USRCLST S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
USR CLASS ACTION EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit selected reports online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D EDIT^USRCLASS
USR CLASS ACTION EXPAND SUBCLASSES action D EXPAND^USRCLASS S VALMBCK="R"
USR CLASS ACTION CREATE action D CREATE^USRCLASS S VALMBCK="R"
USR CLASS ACTION LIST MEMBERS action D MEMBERS^USRCLASS
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP MENU menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)+1
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit selected reports online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D EDIT^USRMEMBR
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP ADD action D ADD^USRMEMBR S VALMBCK="R"
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP DELETE action D DELETE^USRMEMBR
USR CLASS MEMBER USER ADD action D ADD^USRUMMBR S VALMBCK="R"
USR CLASS MEMBER USER DELETE action D DELETE^USRUMMBR
USR CLASS MEMBER USER EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit selected reports online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D EDIT^USRUMMBR
USR CLASS MEMBER USER MENU menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP CHANGE VIEW action D FULL^VALM1,MAIN^USRMLST S VALMBCK="Q"
USR CLASS MEMBER USER CHANGE VIEW action D FULL^VALM1,BUILD^USRULST(+$$GETUSER^USRULST) D KILL^VALM10() S VALMBCK=$S($D(^TMP("USRUSER",$J)):"R",1:"Q")
USR CLASS MEMBERSHIP SCHEDULE action D SCHEDULE^USRMEMBR
USR CLASS ACTION QUIT action Allows user to quit current menu level. Q
USR BUSINESS RULE ADD action Allows creation of new Business Rules. D ADD^USRRULA S VALMBCK="R"
USR BUSINESS RULE EDIT action Allows modification of existing Business Rules. D EDIT^USRRULA
USR BUSINESS RULE DELETE action Allows Deletion of selected Business Rules. D DELETE^USRRULA
USR BUSINESS RULE CHANGE VIEW action Allows you to revise the search criteria and rebuild the list of Business Rules. D FULL^VALM1,EN^USRRUL S VALMBCK="Q"
USR BUSINESS RULE MENU menu Menu of actions useful in the management of Business Rules. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)+1
USR ACTION SELECT LIST ELEMENT action D PICK^USRRUL1($P($G(XQORNOD(0)),"=",2)) S VALMBCK=""
USR ACTION SEARCH LIST action Allows users to search list of USER CLASSES, MEMBERS, or BUSINESS RULES for a text string (word or partial word) from current position to the end of the list. Upon reaching the end of the last page of the list, the user will be asked whether to continue the search from the beginning of the list through the origin of the search. D FIND^VALM40
USR ACTION QUIT action Allows user to quit the current menu level. Q
USR ACTION NEXT SCREEN action If multiple screens of information are available, this will page to the next screen. D NEXT^VALM4
USR ACTION PREVIOUS SCREEN action If multiple screens of information are available, and the user is not on the first screen, this will allow paging back to the previous screens, one at a time. D PREV^VALM4
USR ACTION TOP action If multiple screens are available, this will page to the first screen. D FIRST^VALM4
USR ACTION BOTTOM action If multiple screens of information are available, this will page to the last screen. D LAST^VALM4
USR HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This menu includes the secondary or "hidden actions" which are provided by the List Manager (e.g., scroll right, scroll left, up one line, etc.) and which may be used in the review screens, but which are not visible in the top level action menu.
TIU HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This menu includes the secondary or "hidden actions" which are provided by the List Manager (e.g., scroll right, scroll left, up one line, etc.) and which may be used in the review screens, but which are not visible in the top level action menu.
TIU HIDDEN ACTIONS BROWSE menu This menu includes the secondary or "hidden actions" which are provided by the List Manager (e.g., up one line, down one line, go to page #, etc.) and which may be used in the browse screens, but which are not visible in the top level action menu.
TIU ACTION MENU MGR menu Menu of actions which may be executed by MIS Managers. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIU ACTION MENU READ-ONLY menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
TIU BROWSE MENU MGR menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU BROWSE MENU READ ONLY menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU REVIEW SCREEN MENU menu This menu type option is used for selecting the Review Screen for documents.
TIU REVIEW BY AUTHOR action This action type option is used for specifying review by author
TIU REVIEW BY PATIENT action This action type option is used for specifying Review by patient.
TIU REVIEW BY RESP PROVIDER action This action type option is used for specifying review by Attending Physician.
TIU REVIEW BY TRANSCRIPTIONIST action Select transcriptionist as a second-level search criterion for building the clinician's review screen list.
TIU REVIEW BY ALL CATEGORIES action Allows user to show all categories of documents, without concern for the second level search criterion (i.e., Author, Attending Physician, Treating Specialty, or Transcriptionist).
TIU REVIEW BY TREATING SPECIALTY action Select treating specialty as a second-level search criterion for building the clinician's review screen list.
TIU ACTION MENU CLINICIAN menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIU ACTION EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit selected documents online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D EDIT^TIURA
TIU ACTION PRINT action Allows authorized users to print copies of selected documents to a specified device. D PRINT^TIURA
TIU ACTION SIGN/COSIGN action Allows clinicians to electronically sign selected documents or addenda. NOTE: Electronic signature carries the same legal ramifications that wet signature of a hard-copy document carries. You are advised to carefully review each document for content and accuracy before exercising this option. D ELSIG^TIURS1
TIU ACTION DETAILED DISPLAY action Displays the all of the details concerning the selected document's history, including audit trail and reassignment history, in addition to the narrative body of the document. D DISPLAY^TIURA2
TIU ACTION NEXT SCREEN action If multiple screens of information are available, this will page to the next screen. D NEXT^VALM4
TIU ACTION PREVIOUS SCREEN action If multiple screens of information are available, and the user is not on the first screen, this will allow paging back to the previous screens, one at a time. D PREV^VALM4
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR CLINICIAN action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D:$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR READ ONLY") D:'$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR CLINICIAN")
TIU ACTION QUIT action Allows user to quit the current menu level. Q
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW CLINICIAN action Allows users to modify the list of reports by signature status, review screen and dictation date range without exiting the review screen. K TIUQUIK,VALMY D FIXLSTNW^TIULM,FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIUR($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1:38),1) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION TOP action If multiple screens are available, this will page to the first screen. D FIRST^VALM4
TIU ACTION BOTTOM action If multiple screens of information are available, this will page to the last screen. D LAST^VALM4
TIU BROWSE MENU CLINICIAN menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION AMEND action Allows authorized users to AMEND documents at the patient's request, per the Privacy Act. D AMEND^TIURB
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW ERROR SCREEN action Allows modification of the current list of filing errors to include either UNRESOLVED, RESOLVED, or ALL errors for a specified time range. D FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIUELST S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW OTHER action Allows MIS users to modify the list of documents by STATUS, DOCUMENT TYPE, SEARCH CATEGORY (e.g., AUTHOR, EXPECTED COSIGNER, SERVICE, HOSPITAL LOCATION, etc.) and REFERENCE DATE range without exiting the review screen. K VALMY D FIXLSTNW^TIULM,FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIUR($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1:38)) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION DELETE action Allows authorized users (as defined by your local business rules in ASU) to delete a document at the patient's request, per the Privacy Act. D DELETE^TIURB2
TIU ACTION MENU UPLOAD EVENTS menu Menu of actions which may be executed to resolve error generated by the upload filer/router. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
TIU ACTION MENU MRT menu Menu of actions which may be executed by Medical Records Technicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIU ACTION PRINT UPLOAD EVENT action Allows users to print a detailed view of the filing event. D PRINT^TIURE
TIU ACTION REASSIGN action Allows authorized users to reassign Documents which have been inappropriately assigned to a given patient or the wrong admission/visit. Authorized users can also reassign a signed Original or Addendum, promote an Addendum as an Original, or "swap" the Addendum and the Original. Interdisciplinary entries must be detached before they can be reassigned. D REASSIGN^TIURD S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION SEND BACK action Allows Medical Record Technicians or MIS Managers to send a Document back to transcription for editing, provided that it has not yet been signed. The status of the Document is changed to "unreleased" and clinicians and MAS personnel are prevented from viewing it until the modifications have been made, and the Document has been re-released. Interdiciplinary entries must be detached before they can be sent back. D SENDBACK^TIURB
TIU ACTION SIGN ON CHART action Allows MIS clerks to mark documents as "signed on chart." NOTE: This step is NECESSARY when the provider elects to sign the chart copy of the document, rather than entering his/her electronic signature on-line. D SIGNCHRT^TIURT
TIU ACTION VERIFY action Allows MIS personnel to review, edit, and verify/unverify Documents. Interdisciplinary entries must be detached before they can be verified/unverified. NOTE: This action may only be applied to Documents which are specified as requiring MAS verification. D VERIFY^TIURC
TIU BROWSE ACTION AMEND action Allows authorized users to amend current document at the patient's request, per the Privacy Act. D AMEND1^TIURB,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
TIU BROWSE ACTION DELETE action Allows authorized users (as defined by your local business rules in ASU) to delete a document at the patient's request, per the Privacy Act. D DEL^TIURB2(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="Q"
TIU BROWSE ACTION EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit current document online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. S TIUCHNG=0 D CLEAR^VALM1,EDIT1^TIURA,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK=$S($D(^TIU(8925,TIUDA)):"R",1:"Q")
TIU BROWSE ACTION PRINT action Allows users to print copies of selected documents on their corresponding VA Standard Forms to a specified device. D CLEAR^VALM1,PRINT1^TIURA S VALMBCK="R"
TIU BROWSE ACTION REASSIGN action Allows authorized users (as defined by your local business rules in ASU) to re-link the current document which has been inappropriately linked to the wrong patient or the wrong visit/admission. D REASSIG1^TIURD
TIU BROWSE ACTION SEARCH action Allows users to search for a text string (word or partial word) from the current position in the summary through its end. Upon reaching the end of the document, the user will be asked whether to continue the search from the beginning of the document through the origin of the search. D FIND^VALM40
TIU BROWSE ACTION SEND BACK action Allows Medical Record Technicians or MIS Managers to send the current document back to transcription to be edited, if it hasn't been signed yet. The status of the document is changed to "unreleased" and clinicians and MAS personnel are prevented from viewing it until the modifications have been made, and the document has been re-released. D SENDBACK^TIUT(TIUDA) S VALMBCK=$S(+$P(^TIU(8925,+TIUDA,13),U,4):"R",1:"Q")
TIU BROWSE ACTION SIGN ON CHART action Allows MIS clerks to mark current document as "signed on chart." D SIGCHRT1^TIURT($G(TIUDA))
TIU BROWSE ACTION SIGN/COSIGN action Allows clinicians to electronically sign the current document. NOTE: Electronic signature carries the same legal ramifications that wet signature of a hard-copy document carries. You are advised to carefully review each document for content and accuracy before exercising this option. D EDSIG^TIURS(TIUDA,$G(TIUDATA),1) S VALMBCK="Q"
TIU BROWSE ACTION VERIFY action Allows MIS personnel to review, edit, and verify/unverify the current document. NOTE: This action may only be selected when the site parameter to require MAS verification is set. D VERIFY1^TIURC S VALMBCK="Q"
TIU BROWSE MENU MRT menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ENTER/EDIT action This option allows transcriptionists to enter/edit dictated discharge summaries or addenda directly on-line. D MAIN^TIUEDIT
TIU ERROR STATUS ALL action Show all filing errors, regardless of their resolution status.
TIU ERROR STATUS RESOLVED action Show only those filing errors which have already been resolved.
TIU ERROR STATUS SELECT menu Select the resolution status for the filing errors which you would like to see displayed.
TIU ERROR STATUS UNRESOLVED action Show only those errors which have NOT yet been resolved.
TIU DS OE/RR INTERFACE action Allows access to the Browse Discharge Summary utility. NOTE: This action is designed to be added to ANY OE/RR menu (e.g., OR USER MENU, OR ADD MENU CLINICIAN, etc.). D MAIN^TIUBRWS($$WHATMPL^TIULC1(DUZ),244) K TIUPRM0,TIUPRM1,TIUPRM3
TIU STATUS UNDICTATED action Status undictated (not implemented).
TIU STATUS UNTRANSCRIBED action Status Untranscribed (not implemented).
TIU STATUS UNRELEASED action Documents not yet released from transcription (i.e., DRAFT documents).
TIU STATUS UNVERIFIED action Documents not yet verified by MAS. When verification is required, these won't be available for view outside of MAS.
TIU STATUS UNSIGNED action Documents which have not yet been signed by the author.
TIU STATUS UNCOSIGNED action Documents which have not yet been overread and cosigned by the author's supervisor, or the expected cosigner of the document.
TIU STATUS COMPLETED action Documents which have been signed (and if necessary, cosigned), and are ostensibly "authenticated."
TIU STATUS AMENDED action Documents which have been amended following signature, per the Privacy Act.
TIU STATUS PURGED action Documents which have been purged from the system, and are only available through archival means.
TIU STATUS MENU menu Menu of allowable statuses.
TIU REVIEW BY SUBJECT action This action type option is used for specifying Review by patient.
TIU REVIEW BY SERVICE Search Category by Service.
TIUFH ACTION MENU CLIN menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFH EDIT DDEFS CLIN
TIUFH ACTION EXPAND/COLLAPSE ENTRY action Expands/collapses selected entry to display entry items or to collapse entry hierarchy. Entries preceded by + have items and can be expanded. D EXPCOLL^TIUFH1
TIU ACTION REFRESH action Refresh the display (useful when the List Manager display becomes "corrupt" on return from an action or jump). S VALMBCK="R" D RE^VALM4
TIU ACTION MENU SEND BACK menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION MENU VERIFY menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION MENU SIGN/COSIGN menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S TIUSIGN=0,VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" K TIUSIGN S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU BROWSE ACTION APPROVE action Allows authorized users to approve the current document for electronic signature. D ACCEPT^TIURS(.TIUSLST,TIUI)
TIUFH EDIT ITEMS action ITEMS actions differ from top screen actions such as Delete in that Items items of National entries, but only take limited actions on them. Items of Shared Components can be edited only via the Sort Option. Enter ??? to see Shared. MANAGER OPTIONS Managers (persons with Manager menu) can edit items whether or not they own the parent entry. CLINICIAN OPTIONS Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) can view but not edit items of looks at items solely as items under the parent, NOT as file entries in entries they don't own. their own right. Action displays item information (Sequence, Mnemonic, Menu Text) for items of selected entry. User may add/edit/delete appropriate items. A Title or Component must be Inactive before its items can be edited. An entry must have an Owner before its items can be edited. User can view D EDITEMS^TIUFD3
TIU ACTION ADD DOCUMENT action Enter a new Document. D ADD^TIURC S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION LINK TO VISIT action Allows authorized users to re-link the current document which has been inappropriately linked to the wrong patient or the wrong visit/admission. Interdisciplinary entries must be detached before they can be re-linked. D REASSIGN^TIURD S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION LINK TO PROBLEMS action Allows authorized users to link documents to problems from the patient's active Problem List in a many-to-many fashion. D LINK^TIURB
TIU ACTION MENU LINK menu Allows authorized users to (re)-link documents to either problems, patients/visits, or records in other applications (e.g., Consult Results to Consult Requests, Patient Record Flag Documents to Flags, etc.). Such associations permit a variety of clinically useful "views" of the on-line record. S XQORM(0)="AD",XQORM("??")="D LINKHELP^TIUHELP",VALMBCK=""
TIU ACTION BLANK1 action Blank space for menu formatting.
TIU ACTION BLANK2 action Blank space for menu formatting.
TIU ACTION MENU LINK TO PROBLEM menu Menu of actions for use by the List Template for Linking Documents to problems. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=$S(+$G(VALMCNT):+$G(VALMCNT),1:10)
TIU ACTION SELECT PROBLEM action Select one or more problems with which the current document is to be associated. D PROBLEM^TIURB1 S VALMBCK="Q"
TIUF SORT BY OWNER menu S XQORM(0)="1A\",TIUFATTR="O^OWNER",XQORM("??")="D OWNER^TIUFXHL1"
TIUF SORT BY STATUS menu S XQORM(0)="1A\",XQORM("??")="D STATUS^TIUFXHLX",TIUFATTR="S^STATUS",TIUFSLST="AITN"
TIUF SORT BY TYPE action N TYPE S TIUFATTR="T^TYPE" S TYPE=$$SELTYPE^TIUFLF8 S:TYPE'="" TIUFAVAL=TYPE_U_^TMP("TIUF",$J,"TYPE"_TYPE)
TIU ACTION SELECT LIST ELEMENT action Select one or more items from the current list of documents. D PICK^TIULM($P($G(XQORNOD(0)),"=",2)) S VALMBCK="R"
TIUFHA ACTION DELETE action Deletes the entry as an entry in TIU Document Definition file 8925.1. responsibility to delete the entry which points to it (for example, the Business Rule) before deleting the entry. OBJECT DELETE Objects can be deleted only from the Detailed Display of the object. Action deletes the object from the file. Objects can be deleted only by the owner and only after being inactivated. Objects cannot be deleted if they are embedded in boilerplate text of any entries. Entry will first be deleted as an item wherever it is used as an item. Entries In Use by documents cannot be deleted. An entry must have Status Inactive before it can be deleted to ensure that it is not used during the delete process. Only the owner can delete an entry. National entries and Shared Components cannot be deleted. If the entry is pointed to by by an entry in another file (for example if an entry has a Business Rule which references it), it is the user's D DELETE^TIUFHA1:$G(TIUFSTMP)="",DELOBJ^TIUFD4:$G(TIUFSTMP)="D"
TIU ACTION BLANK3 action Blank space for menu formatting.
TIUF SORT BY ALL action Gets ALL Document Definitions regardless of Type, Owner, etc. User can still choose where in the alphabet to start the list. S TIUFATTR="A^ALL",TIUFAVAL="ALL^ALL"
TIU STATUS DELETED action Identifies those documents which have been deleted in accordance with the Privacy Act.
TIU ACTION MENU SIGN ON CHART menu Menu of actions which may be executed by MIS Personnel. S VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU BROWSE MENU PRINT menu Allows a user to print either a chartable copy of the VA Standard Form associated with the current document, or the contents of the browse screen itself. S XQORM(0)="AD",VALMBCK=""
TIU BROWSE ACTION PRINT TEXT action This action allws the user to print the entire list of entries currently being displayed. D PRTL^VALM1
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR MGR action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D:$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR READ ONLY") D:'$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR MGR")
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR MRT action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D:$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR READ ONLY") D:'$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR MRT")
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR READ ONLY action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR READ ONLY")
TIUFA ACTION ADD ENTRY action MANAGER OPTIONS Definitions Option does this automatically.) File 8925.1 cannot have two entries of the same type with the same name. This action can be used to create either Objects or nonobject Document Definitions in TIU Document Definition file 8925.1. An Object entry must have an uppercase name which differs from all other object names, abbreviations, and print names. After it is created, a nonobject entry must be explicitly added as an Item to a parent in the hierarchy before it can be used. (The Create Document D ADD^TIUFA1
TIUFA ACTION CHANGE VIEW action Changes what Document Definitions appear on list. If you are not in the Create Objects Option, and wish to see only Objects, change Attribute to Type, then select Type Object. D CHANGE^TIUFA1
TIUFA ACTION MENU CLIN menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFA SORT DDEFS CLIN
TIU ACTION MENU REASSIGN menu Menu of actions which may be executed during record reassignment. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION MENU COPY menu Menu of actions which may be executed during record reassignment. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU BROWSE ACTION COPY action Allows authorized users to duplicate the current document. This is especially useful when composing a note for a group of patients (e.g., therapy group, etc.), and rapid duplication to all members of the group is appropriate. D COPY1^TIURC1
TIU ACTION COPY action Allows authorized users to copy one or more documents to other patients and encounters...This is particularly useful when documenting group sessions, etc. D COPY^TIURC1 S VALMBCK="R"
TIUF ACTION TRY action TRY examines selected entry for basic problems. are deleted immediately after the trial. During the trial, objects will function even if inactive in order to permit testing of objects. (Ordinarily, object data are not retrieved unless the object is active, so be sure to activate when ready for use.) Since the trial document does show up on Unsigned lists during the time it is being edited, users should select TEST PATIENTS ONLY. If TRY is selected from the Boilerplate Text Screen, TRY shows which objects are badly embedded and why. Checks include whether the object as written exists in the file, whether it is active, whether it is split between lines, and whether the object as written is ambiguous as to which object is intended. If entry is OK, user can enter a trial document. For objects, TRY checks object Name, Abbreviation and Print Name to make sure they are not ambiguous. That is, it makes sure the utility can decide which object to invoke when given the Name, Abbreviation, or Print Name and that it does not get the wrong object. TRY checks that the object has an Object Method, but does NOT check that the Object Method functions correctly. For titles and components with boilerplate text, this includes checking For classes, document classes and components, TRY just checks for general completeness and correctness. For action Try, enter TR any embedded objects to make sure the object is embedded correctly. If the entry is a title and checks out OK, (or if its only problem is an inactive object) the user can test the boilerplate text by choosing a patient and entering a document using the entry. TRY does NOT require any particular Status for the title, since documents entered during the trial D CHECKDEF^TIUFHA6
TIUFA ACTION MENU MGR menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFA SORT DDEFS MGR
TIUF SORT menu Menu allows user to select attribute (e.g. Type) and attribute value (e.g. Component) by which to sort Document Definitions. User may also choose to display ALL Document Definitions. S XQORM(0)="1A\",XQORM("??")="D ATTRIB^TIUFXHL1" D:$D(TIUFAVAL) SELSTART^TIUFLA
TIUF OWNER PERSONAL action Enter Personal Owner to get Document Definitions which are personally owned by a particular person. N DIC,X,Y D FULL^VALM1 S TIUFFULL=1,DIC=200,DIC(0)="AEQ",DIC("A")="Select Personal Owner: " S DIC("B")=$$PERSNAME^TIULC1(DUZ) D ^DIC S:Y>1 TIUFAVAL=Y_U_"P"
TIUF OWNER CLASS action Enter Class Owner to get Document Definitions owned by a particular User Class. N DIC,X,Y D FULL^VALM1 S TIUFFULL=1,DIC=8930,DIC(0)="AEMQ" D ^DIC S:Y>0 TIUFAVAL=Y_U_"C"
TIUF OWNER INDIVIDUAL action Enter Individual Owner to get Document Definitions owned by given individual as a person OR as a class member of an owning User Class. N DIC,X,Y D FULL^VALM1 S TIUFFULL=1,DIC=200,DIC(0)="AEQ",DIC("A")="Select Individual Owner: " S DIC("B")=$$PERSNAME^TIULC1(DUZ) D ^DIC S:Y>0 TIUFAVAL=Y_U_"I"
TIUF CHANGE START WITH/GO TO action S TIUFATTR=TIUFTMPA,TIUFAVAL=TIUFTMPV
TIUF CHANGE SORT ATTRIBUTE menu S XQORM(0)="1A\",XQORM("??")="D ATTRIB^TIUFXHL1"
TIUF CHANGE SORT ATTR VALUE action S TIUFATTR=TIUFTMPA S X=$P(TIUFATTR,U),X=$G(^TMP("TIUF",$J,"SORT"_X)),X=X_";ORD(101," W:'X !," ?? Viewing ALL: No Attribute Value" H:'X 2 D:X EN^XQOR
TIUFHA ACTION COPY action MANAGER OPTIONS The check should include Document Definition attributes of the entry (including Upload characteristics), TIU Document Parameters, and Business Rules. Consider inherited as well as explicit values. Any other implicit behavior, local or national, that applies to the entry must also be checked. Although there is no harm in coping a Title to ANY document class in the hierarchy as long as the copy is not activated (since the copy has no documents), there is no reason to expect that such copies will function at all, much less function properly. The user should either ensure that Under the action Copy/Move, users may choose MT to MOVE TITLE, MD to MOVE they function properly in every way, or delete such copies from the Document Definition file. Copy COMPONENTS which have been given a new parent should also be checked by thoroughly testing the parent title as above. The copy action leaves the parent title of the copy component inactive. It is the user's responsibility to test the new parent title and then reactivate it so it is available to users for entering documents. Note: Although Action Copy COULD be used to change the behavior of an DOCUMENTS, C to COPY, or U to UPDATE DOCUMENTS: entry (i.e. change the copy and inactivate the original), it is better to use Action Edit or Move and not clutter up the file with inactive entries. Most behavior can be edited even when the entry is In Use by documents. Titles can be moved even when they are In Use by documents. Copying Objects: OBJECTS are copied from the Sort Option or the Create Objects Option. Object Abbreviation and Print Name are not copied, since they must be different from those of the original. If the user does not have programmer access, the Object Method is not copied since it is an M field. Since even inactive objects affect the Document Definition action TRY for titles whose boilerplate text contains the object, objects should not be copied/created without good reason. They should be thoroughly tested before being activated. Action MT Move Title: MT: A Title may be moved to a different Document Class, for example, The action Move Title is accessed from the Edit option only, since it involves only entries in the Document Definition hierarchy. Action Move Title PERMITS: Moving TITLES Moving between DOCUMENT CLASSES WITHIN THE SAME CLASS Action Move Title DOES NOT PERMIT: when hospital services are reorganized. Documents defined by the Moving CLASSES or DOCUMENT CLASSES Moving COMPONENTS (The same effect can be achieved by deleting the component as an item from its parent, and adding it as an item to the new parent. This can be done even if the component is In Use.) Moving NATIONAL STANDARD titles Moving titles which are not in the DOCUMENT DEFINITION HIERARCHY Moving titles between CLASSES Moving FAULTY titles (known as faulty to the computer) Moving titles to FAULTY DOCUMENT CLASSES title are then updated with the new PARENT DOCUMENT TYPE (field # .04). Moves which RESULT in FAULTY titles (For example, suppose Title NURSE NOTE inherits its Print Method from its document class NIGHT NURSE DOCUMENT CLASS. Suppose DAY NURSE DOCUMENT CLASS has no Print Method. (This is not a fault since the titles under it could all have their own Print Methods.) If a user moves NURSE NOTE from NIGHT NURSE DOCUMENT CLASS to DAY NURSE DOCUMENT CLASS, then the title lacks a Print Method and becomes faulty. Documents using the title don't print. In this case, the title must first be given its own Print Method, and THEN moved.) The above restrictions are intended to prevent moves between Document Classes with very different behavior. However, hierarchies vary, and some structures will still permit risky moves. For example, if Consults are under Progress Notes, the user can move a nonconsult Title to Document Class CONSULTS. This sort of move is NOT advised. Anyone contemplating such a move should carefully read the paragraphs below on the Consequences of Moves between Very Different Document Classes. Moving a title automatically inactivates it. Therefore, managers should move titles only during off-peak hours. After the title is inactivated and MD: ALL documents defined by a given title may be moved to another moved under a new Document Class, the MT action attempts to update the PARENT DOCUMENT TYPE field (#.04) for existing documents of the title. This may take awhile if there are many documents to update. (If certain documents were not updated, the user must update them later, using action Update Documents.) When the action is finished, the title is LEFT INACTIVE. Checking the Title: Since the title has changed position within the hierarchy, its behavior title, for example, when a little-used title is eliminated in favor of may have changed. It is the user's responsibility to thoroughly check its new behavior, and then to reactivate it so it is available for entering new documents. The check should include Document Definition attributes of the entry (including Basic, Technical, and Upload fields), TIU Document Parameters, and Business Rules. Consider inherited as well as explicit values. Any other implicit behavior, local or national, that applies to the entry must also be checked. a broader title. It is possible that the Document Definition action TRY might state that an entry looks OK when it still does not function. For example, the action TRY may quit without continuing on to let the user enter a trial document. In such a case, check the title's Document Definition Fields against a different title that DOES work. (The TRY action checks that fields EXIST, but does not check whether or not they function properly.) Possible Consequences of Moves between Very Different Document Classes: Some behaviors are explicit, being determined by parameters, Business Rules, etc.. Others are implicit. For example, a Consult document is linked to a request when it is created, while a Progress Note document is not. These differences mean, for example, that one document may belong to a given cross reference or have a certain field, while another lacks the field and is not in the cross reference. Furthermore, the entry may have Business Rules, parameters, etc., which are not appropriate in its new position. It may also be lacking necessary ones. C: Titles, components, and objects may be copied, for example, when Except for updating the PARENT DOCUMENT TYPE field (#.04) for documents of a title, the COPY/MOVE actions simply move the entry AS IS, making no attempt to ensure that it functions correctly in its new position. It is the user's responsibility to determine whether or not a move is reasonable, and to make all necessary changes to documents, Document Definitions, and rules/parameters. This does NOT mean that all moves are dangerous. The more the difference in behavior and the greater the number of documents a title has, the greater the risk. jump-starting a new Document Definition by copying and then editing the Moves may take awhile if a title has many documents. In the meantime, existing documents may not function properly, and users may not be able to enter given Titles. On the other hand there should be little risk in moving, say, a Cardiology/Medicine Service Progress Note title from Document Class MEDICINE SERVICE to Document Class CARDIOLOGY. Action MD Move Documents: copy. Title and component copies may be placed under the same parent as Under this action, users select an old title and a new title. The action then attempts to move ALL the documents of the old title to the new title. After a document is moved, its Parent Document Type is updated if necessary. If some documents are not available for move/update, they can be moved later using the same action. The old title is then no longer In Use and can be deleted if desired. The old title is inactivated while documents are moved, and LEFT INACTIVE. If the user wants it available for entering documents, the user must the original, placed under a new parent, or left as orphans. reactivate it. Action Move Documents DOES NOT PERMIT: Moving documents from or to titles that have components Moving documents to a faulty title Moving documents between CLASSES Moving SELECTED documents (To move a particular document from one Title to another, use Hidden Action CT Change Title for that particular document.) The behavior of documents is determined by their title. Therefore, moving documents from one title to another can affect their behavior. Users are responsible to make sure the behavior of the target title is appropriate BEFORE moving documents to it. Anyone contemplating a move between very different titles should carefully read the warnings under action Move Title, above. Action U Update Documents: U: Documents defined by a particular title are updated with the correct This action is intended as a possible follow-up to action Move Title. It will usually not be necessary since action Move Title itself attempts to update documents defined by the moved title, giving them the correct new Parent Document Type. However, if a document is not available, then action Move Title finishes, leaving that document with the old Parent Document Type. This may affect document behavior. It will cause CWADs to fail to generate alerts, and conversely will cause nonCWADs to generate CWAD alerts. It may have other consequences in the future. PARENT DOCUMENT TYPE (field # .04). Action U Update Documents is intended for this situation. It updates every document defined by a certain title to the correct Parent Document Type. It can be run multiple times if necessary and entails no risk. OVERVIEW When Moving or Copying a title, users must be aware that changing positions in the hierarchy gives an entry NEW INHERITED behavior. Accordingly, some moves may not be appropriate. It is the user's responsibility to determine whether or not a given action is appropriate. DETAILED DESCRIPTION Action C COPY: The Copy action prompts for an entry to copy and a new entry name to copy into. This name must be different from the name of the entry being copied. The action then creates a new entry with the chosen name and copies the fields in the Document Definition File 8925.1 into the new entry. Certain fields require more information on exactly how they are copied: EMPTY FIELDS - If the original has empty fields, they are copied empty, NOT as inherited. Copy/Move is a very powerful action and should be used with great care. STATUS FIELD - If the original has a Status of Active or Test, the entry may be copied, but the copy has a Status of Inactive. NATIONAL STANDARD FIELD - If the original is National Standard, the entry may be copied, but the copy is not National Standard. SHARED FIELD - If a component is Shared, it may be copied but the copy is not Shared. If the component has subcomponents, new nonshared subcomponents are created and added to the It is accessible only through the Document Definitions (Manager) copy. ITEMS FIELD - If the original entry has items, the action prompts for item names to copy into, creates NEW entries for the items, and adds the NEW items to the copy. SHARED ITEMS - If a Nonshared entry has a Shared item, the action does NOT copy the Shared item but merely adds the Shared item to the copy. menu [TIUF DOCUMENT DEFINITION MGR]. Like other actions on the TITLES and COMPONENTS can be copied from the Edit Option or the Sort Option. If an entry is copied under the Edit option, the user is asked which parent to add the copy to, and the copy is added as an item to this parent. If no parent is selected, the copy is left as an orphan. Copying an Entry to a New Parent: If the user is copying a title, then the parent to which the copy is Manager menu, it disregards ownership. Users are expected to move only added must be in the hierarchy and must be a document class. If the user is copying a component, then the parent to which the copy is added must be in the hierarchy and must be a title or a component. The parent must be inactive and may not be National Standard or Shared. If an entry is copied under the Sort option (not the Edit option), then the title or component copies are left as orphans. Although orphan titles or components will not appear in the Document titles or documents for which they are responsible. Definition hierarchy, they can be still be added to a parent through both the Sort AND THE EDIT options by selecting action ITEMS for the parent, then action Add/Create, and then the orphan item. Checking Copies: Copy titles which have been given a new parent should be thoroughly checked before they are activated since their inherited behavior may have changed. D COPYMOVE^TIUFHA2
TIUFH ACTION JUMP TO DDEF action User selects any Document Definition in the Clinical Document Hierarchy and action expands the display to include the selected entry. Users cannot jump to Orphans or Objects since they do not belong to the hierarchy. Users cannot jump to Shared Components since they may occur more than once in the hierarchy. This is a quick way to get several layers deep into the hierarchy in one step. D EXPDEF^TIUFH1(1)
TIUFH ACTION MENU MGR menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFH EDIT DDEFS MGR
TIUF CHANGE SORT MENU menu Changes what Document Definitions appear on list. S XQORM(0)="1A\",XQORM("??")="D MENU^TIUFXHL1" D:(Y'=-1)&$D(TIUFAVAL) SELSTART^TIUFLA
TIUF OWNER NONE action S TIUFAVAL="0^NONE"
TIUFD ACTION MENU CLIN menu Menu of Clinician Edit Actions.
TIUFD ACTION MENU MGR menu Menu of Manager Edit Actions. value of inherited fields. If an inherited field does not have its own explicit value, its effective value is its inherited value. If it does not have an inherited value, its effective value is the default value for the field. If the field does not have a default value, it does not have an effective value and the field display is blank. Values marked with * have been inherited. For EDITING heritable fields, see Technical field Edit Template. NOTE ON DISPLAY OF HERITABLE FIELDS: (Technical fields are heritable, and Basic field Suppress Visit Selection is heritable. Upload fields are heritable as a group. The display does not show inheritance for Upload fields.) The Document Definition Detailed Display action displays the EFFECTIVE
TIUFD ACTION MENU VIEW menu Menu of View Actions
TIU ACTION RESOLVE FILING ERRORS action Allows editing of the buffered text to resolve upload errors. D EDIT^TIURE
TIU ERROR RESOLUTION MENU menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ERROR ACTION PRINT action This action allws the user to print the entire list of entries currently being displayed. D PRTL^VALM1
TIU ERROR ACTION RESOLVE action Resolve the selected filing errors. S BUFDA=$P(TIUDATA,U,3) D EDIT1^TIURE
TIUFT ACTION MENU ADD/EDIT/VIEW ITEMS menu Menu allows user to display items and item information for a given Document Definition. Document Definition owner may add, delete, or edit items. Added items may be new OR existing entries in the Document Definition File.
TIUFT ACTION ADD ITEMS action MANAGER OPTIONS items to National Titles or Components. Entries cannot have 2 items with the same name. File 8925.1 cannot have 2 entries of the same type with the same name. Allows user to add items to parent entry. Items may be new file entries OR preexisting file entries. Preexisting file entries can be added ONLY if they have the appropriate type for the parent, if the user owns them, AND if they are not already used as an item under (the current or) another entry. Exception: Shared Components can be added as items to Titles or to Components regardless of owner and regardless of use elsewhere. User need not own an entry in order to add items to it. User cannot add D ADD^TIUFT
TIUFT ACTION DELETE ITEMS action MANAGER OPTIONS parents. Action lets user delete multiple appropriate items from the parent entry. Deleted items are deleted from the parent only, not from file 8925.1. Item must be Inactive before it can be deleted. Noncomponent Items cannot be deleted if they are In Use. National items cannot be deleted from National parents. Items cannot be deleted from National Titles or Components. Shared Components are the only National entries permitted as items under nonNational parents, and CAN be deleted from NONNATIONAL D EDDEL^TIUFT1
TIUFT ACTION ITEMS EDIT ALL action User can edit Sequence, Mnemonic and Menu Text for selected Items. D EDDEL^TIUFT1
TIUFT ACTION EDIT MNEMONIC action Applies to Classes, Document Classes. Mnemonic is a convenient handle for selecting Menu Text from a 3-column menu. Mnemonic is usually a number with the same value as the Sequence. Alpha mnemonics are also permitted. 1-4 characters. D EDDEL^TIUFT1
TIUFT ACTION EDIT SEQUENCE action Sequence, if entered, determines item order. Order is alphabetic by Menu Text if item has no sequence. Entry owner may edit sequence for selected items. Sequence is a number between .01 and 999, 2 decimal places allowed. D EDDEL^TIUFT1
ORS AD HOC HEALTH SUMMARY action This protocol allows generation of Ad Hoc Health Summaries for multiple patients from the Results Reporting menu. S X="GMTS HS ADHOC",DIC=142,DIC(0)="ZF" D ^DIC K DIC Q:+Y'>0 S GMTSTYP=+Y,GMTSTITL="AD HOC" D BUILD^GMTSADOR
TIUFT ACTION MENU EDIT/VIEW ITEMS menu Menu allows user to display items and item information for a given Document Definition. The owner of a Document Definition can edit item Sequence, Mnemonic, and Menu Text. The owner of a Title may add Shared Components as items to the Title. Likewise, an owner can delete Shared Components from a Title.
TIUFT ACTION MENU VIEW ITEMS menu Menu allows user to display items and item information for a given Document Definition.
TIU ACTION MAKE ADDENDUM action Allows authorized users to add addenda to selected documents online... When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D ADDEND^TIURA1
TIU BROWSE ACTION MAKE ADDENDUM action Allows authorized users to add an addendum to the current document online... When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D CLEAR^VALM1,ADDEND1^TIURA1,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION MENU EDIT ADDENDUM menu Menu of actions which may be executed by MIS Personnel. S VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU BROWSE ACTION EDIT ADDENDUM action Allows authorized users to edit current addendum online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D CLEAR^VALM1,EDADD^TIUADD,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION MENU ERRORS menu Menu of actions which may be executed to resolve error generated by the upload filer/router.
TIU ACTION PRINT ERROR action Allows users to print the contents of the buffer record associated with an UNRESOLVED filing error. This may facilitate resolution, if the hardcopy is used to identify the source of the error (missing or erroneous values in the header field(s) of a record, etc.), and "pencil-in" the corrected values. D PRINT^TIURE
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW TITLE action Allows users to modify the list of reports by signature status, review screen and dictation date range without exiting the review screen. K TIUQUIK,VALMY D FIXLSTNW^TIULM,FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIURTITL($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1:38)) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION MENU TITLE REVIEW menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIUFD EDIT BASICS action User can edit basic information for the Document Definition entry. Status MANAGER OPTIONS: Managers (persons with Manager menu) need not own an entry in order to edit it. They can edit Name, Abbreviation, Print Name, Type (if not In Use), Owner, Shared (for Components), Suppress Visit Selection, and Status. must be Inactive in order to edit most basic attributes. Enter ??? to see Status. CLINICIAN OPTIONS: Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) must own an entry in order to edit it. They can edit Abbreviation, Print Name, Owner, and Status of entries they own. D EDBASICS^TIUFD2
TIUFT ACTION EDIT MENU TEXT action Menu Text is the short name users will see for Classes and Document permits up to 20 characters. Classes when selecting them from a 3-column menu. Such menus occur when viewing documents across many patients or when viewing many types of documents together (e.g. Progress Notes at the same time as Discharge Summaries). User can edit Menu Text for selected items. Menu Text may affect item order since order is alphabetic by Menu Text if item has no sequence. To edit NAME (rather than Menu Text), go back to previous screen. Menu Text D EDDEL^TIUFT1
TIUF SORT BY USED BY DOCMTS menu S XQORM(0)="1A\",TIUFATTR="U^WAY USED",XQORM("??")="D USED^TIUFXHL1"
TIUF USED BY DOCMTS YES action S TIUFAVAL="YES"
TIUF USED BY DOCMTS NO action S TIUFAVAL="NO"
TIUFD EDIT BOILERPLATE TEXT action Boilerplate Text is the optional text a Document Definition may be given. Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) must own the entry in order to edit its boilerplate text. Clinicians cannot edit boilerplate text for National entries. MANAGER OPTIONS Managers (persons with Manager menu) can edit the boilerplate text of entries, including National entries, regardless of Ownership. Exception: only the Owner can edit a Shared Component. It is displayed as the default, editable text of a TIU document when a TIU document is entered. Only Document Definitions of Type Title or Component may have Boilerplate Text. Only Inactive entries can be edited. Enter '???' for more information on Boilerplate Text. CLINICIAN OPTIONS D EDBOILTX^TIUFD3
TIUFD EDIT TECHNICAL FIELDS action MANAGER OPTIONS Technical fields are mainly M code (which requires Programmer access), although some are just very technical, requiring detailed knowledge of the utility. Many Technical Fields can be inherited from ancestor entries. There is one technical field for Objects: Object Method. For nonObjects, Technical fields include: Entry Action, Exit Action, Edit Template, Print Method, Print Form Header, Print Form Number, Print Group, Visit Linkage Method, Validation Method, and Allow Custom Form Headers. D EDTECH^TIUFD4
TIUFD EDIT UPLOAD MGR action MANAGER OPTIONS than lower entries. Do NOT set partial information at a lower level; if information is set at all at a lower level, it must be complete at that level. Upload information includes basic characteristics such as the file/field which will store the text of the document, as well as header information for each fixed-field to be uploaded. TIU permits documents to be dictated and then uploaded into TIU or into other files. Upload information can be set by this action for Document Definition Classes, Document Classes, or Titles, and is heritable. Although upload information is heritable, it is NOT displayed by the Document Definition Utility when it is inherited rather than belonging to the entry itself. To edit/view existing upload information, select action Detailed Display for the entry where such information is set rather D EDUPLOAD^TIUFD4
TIUFHA ACTION EDIT/VIEW action DETAILED DISPLAY differs from ITEMS in the following way: Detailed Display CLINICIAN OPTIONS Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) can VIEW any entry but must own the entry in order to edit it. Edit includes Basics, Items, and Boilerplate Text. MANAGER OPTIONS Managers (persons with Manager menu) need not own the entry in order to edit it. Edit includes Basics, Items, Boilerplate Text, Technical Fields and Upload Fields. looks at the entry as a FILE entry and permits edit of all aspects of the entry, including Items. Items, in contrast, looks at the entry ONLY as an Item under its parent and permits edit of Item characteristics ONLY. Detailed Display displays selected entry. Permits edit if appropriate. Edit is limited if entry is National. Shared Components can be VIEWED via the Edit Document Definitions Option but can be EDITED only via the Sort Option. D EDVIEW^TIUFHA
TIUF SORT BY PARENTAGE menu S XQORM(0)="1A\",TIUFATTR="P^PARENTAGE",XQORM("??")="D PARENT^TIUFXHL1"
TIUF PARENTAGE ORPHAN action S TIUFAVAL="O^ORPHAN"
TIUF PARENTAGE NONORPHAN action S TIUFAVAL="N^NONORPHAN"
TIUFHA ACTION EDIT STATUS action For Options Edit/Sort/Create Document Definitions. If entry is of Type Title, entry Status is changed to selected Status, and Component Statuses are automatically changed to same Status. Exception: Shared Components do not have a Status and are not changed. If Status is Inactive or Test, user may select another entry when finished. For Option Sort Document Definitions, user can select multiple entries for ANY Status. The display is recreated from scratch rather than updated, making it a bit slower. Action Status does not function for entries of Type Object. Instead, the user is asked to edit Status of Objects by using Action Basics under Detailed Display for the Object since Detailed Display shows Titles with the object embedded. User selects Status Inactive, Test, or Active. User then selects an entry. (If selected Status is Active, user can select multiple entries.) If entry is of Type Class or Document Class, entry Status is changed to selected Status. If selected Status is Inactive, descendants are also Inactivated. D EDSTAT^TIUFHA3
TIUFC ACTION MENU menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFC CREATE DDEFS MGR create your items under the bolded entry. To go down a level, select action NEXT LEVEL and then select an entry. To create an entry, select action Class/DocumentClass, Title or Component. Only one of these actions is selectable at a given time. (Actions enclosed in parentheses are not selectable.) The Create Option shows the Hierarchy, with CLINICAL DOCUMENTS at the top. When the option begins, Clinical Documents is bolded with its current items indented below it. You can create additional items under Clinical Documents if you so choose. If you wish to create items under a LOWER entry, you must go down the hierarchy successive levels until the proper entry is bolded and THEN
TIUFC ACTION NEXT LEVEL action The user's current position in the Hierarchy is marked by the bolded entry. Action permits user to navigate down the Hierarchy by selecting an item under the highlighted entry. The selected item becomes the new current position. Note that Next Level differs from Expand/Collapse. Although both actions do expand the selected entry, Next Level also changes the user's current position in the hierarchy and limits future expansion to items of that entry. D NEXT^TIUFC
TIUF HIDDEN ACTIONS menu Items call RMSG^TIUFL to reset regular message when any Hidden Action is taken.
TIUF FIND action Finds text in list of entries/information displayed. Action searches all pages of list/information, but cannot 'see' the expansion for unexpanded entries in the Edit Document Definitions Option. Can be a quick way to get to the right page. Enter F D FIND^VALM40
TIUF NEXT SCREEN action This action moves down to the next screen of entries/information. Enter + D NEXT^VALM4
TIUF PREVIOUS SCREEN action Moves up to the previous screen of entries/information. Enter - D PREV^VALM4
TIUF UP ONE LINE action Moves up a line. Enter UP D UP^VALM40
TIUF DOWN A LINE action Moves down a line. Enter DN D DOWN^VALM40
TIUF PRINT SCREEN action NOTE ON PRINTING: ALL printing of document definitions is done using objects. To print a list, select action PS or PL at this point. To print information on a single given entry, first locate the entry in one of the above lists, then select Action Detailed Display, action Boilerplate Text, or action Items. Action Detailed Display shows all available information for a given entry. Action Items shows the items of a given entry. THEN select action PS or PL. PRINT SCREEN allows the user to print the current display screen. Action prints ONLY what is currently visible on the screen, ignoring information built-in hidden actions PS Print Screen and PL Print List. User first that can be moved to horizontally or vertically (pages), so user should move left/right and up/down to desired information before printing. To print more than one visible screen of information use action PL Print List. For Print Screen enter PS. locates the data to be printed so that it shows on the screen and then user selects action PS or PL. To locate the appropriate data use the Edit, Sort, or Create option to list appropriate entries. Option Edit Document Definitions shows the hierarchy. Option Sort Document Definitions shows sorted document definitions including Orphans, Objects, and Shared Components. Option Create Document Definitions shows a particular line of descent of the hierarchy. Option Create Objects shows S VALMSG=$$VMSG^TIUFL D PRT^VALM1
TIUF PRINT LIST action For general printing information see action PS Print Screen. PRINT LIST prints the entire vertical list of entries/information including entries/information not currently visible but which can be moved up or down to. If action is selected from the leftmost position of the screen, user is asked whether to print ALL columns or only those columns visible on the current leftmost position of the screen. If action is selected after user has scrolled to the right, only the currently visible left/right columns are printed. Enter PL D PRTL^TIUFPR
TIUF RIGHT action Lets the user scroll to the right one column when >> shows on the message bar. Most screens display essential information which can only be seen by scrolling to the right. User can also enter >=5 for example, to scroll 5 characters to the right, or >=> to scroll to the rightmost position. Enter > D RIGHT^TIUFL1(XQORNOD(0))
TIUF LEFT action Lets user scroll left when << shows on the message bar. Enter < to scroll left to the next column or enter <=5 to scroll 5 characters to the left, or enter <=< to scroll to the leftmost column. Enter < D LEFT^TIUFL1(XQORNOD(0))
TIUF QUIT action Quits the option. Enter Q Q
TIUF LAST SCREEN action The action displays the last screen of entries/information. Enter LS D LAST^VALM4
TIUF FIRST SCREEN action This action displays the first screen of entries/information. Enter FS D FIRST^VALM4
TIUF GOTO PAGE action Lets user choose a page to go to. User can also enter GO=3, for example to go to page 3 in a single step. Enter GO D GOTO^VALM40
TIUFC ACTION BEGIN AGAIN action MANAGER OPTIONS Takes user back to original Display with Clinical Documents bolded as the current position in the hierarchy. S VALMBCK="R" S VALMSG=$$VMSG^TIUFL D INIT^TIUFC
TIUFC ACTION CREATE CLASS/DOCUMENT CLASS action MANAGER OPTIONS This action is selectable only when the bolded entry is of Type Class. (An action is not selectable when it is enclosed in parentheses). It permits the user to create a new Class or Document Class and hang it under the bolded entry. Option Create Document Definitions does not allow the creation of Objects: Use Option Create Objects or Option Sort Document Definitions. D CREATE^TIUFC1
TIUFC ACTION CREATE TL action MANAGER OPTIONS Create Title is selectable only when the bolded entry has Type Document Class. (Actions are not selectable when they are enclosed in parentheses). This action permits the user to Create a new Title and hang it under the bolded entry. Option Create Document Definitions does not allow the creation of Objects: Use Option Create Objects or Option Sort Document Definitions. D CREATE^TIUFC1
TIUFC ACTION CREATE COMPONENT action MANAGER OPTIONS Option Create Document Definitions does not allow the creation of Objects: Use Option Create Objects or Option Sort Document Definitions. This action is selectable only when the bolded entry is of Type Title. (An action is not selectable when it is enclosed in parentheses). It permits the user to create a new Component and hang it under the bolded entry. Title must be Inactive before Components can be created under it. If SubComponents are desired, they can be created by selecting Detailed Display for the parent Component, and editing its Items. D CREATE^TIUFC1
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW MIS action Allows MIS users to modify the list of documents by STATUS, DOCUMENT TYPE, and ENTRY DATE range without exiting the review screen. K VALMY D FIXLSTNW^TIULM,FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIURM($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1:38)) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION MENU MRT REVIEW menu Menu of actions which may be executed by Medical Records Technicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIU ACTION MENU MGR REVIEW menu Menu of actions which may be executed by MIS Managers. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIUFHA ACTION EDIT NAME/OWNER/PNAME menu User chooses to edit Name, Owner, or Print Name, and then selects multiple entries to be edited. S VALMBCK="",XQORM(0)="1A\",XQORM("??")="D NOP^TIUFXHL1"
TIUFHA ATTRIBUTE EDIT NAME action User selects multiple entries and edits Name. D EDATTR^TIUFHA4
TIUFHA ATTRIBUTE EDIT OWNER action User selects multiple entries and edits Owner, Personal and/or Class. To change from Personal to Class Owner or vice versa, user must delete the unwanted entry to be prompted for the other. D EDATTR^TIUFHA4
TIUFHA ATTRIBUTE EDIT PRINT NAME action User selects multiple entries and edits Print Name. D EDATTR^TIUFHA4
TIU BROWSE ACTION REJECT action If the current document is NOT ready for signature, indicate as much by typing "N", or "NO". S TIURJCT=$G(TIURJCT)_$S($G(TIURJCT)]"":",",1:"")_TIUI
TIU ACTION DESIGNATE SIGNERS action Allows authorized users to identify additional signers for a given document. D NAME^TIURA1
TIU PN OE/RR INTERFACE action Allows access to the Review Progress Note utility. NOTE: This action is designed to be added to ANY OE/RR menu (e.g., OR USER MENU, OR ADD MENU CLINICIAN, etc.). D EN^VALM("TIU REVIEW PN CLINICIAN") K TIUPRM0,TIUPRM1,TIUPRM3
TIU PN ENTER NOTE action This action allows the user to enter a new progress note. It is designed to be attached to any Order Entry menu, or to be ^^-jumped to from any Select Action prompt in OE/RR. D MAIN^TIUEDIT(3) K TIUPRM0,TIUPRM1
TIU BROWSE ACTION DESIGNATE SIGNERS action Allows authorized users to identify additional users who are to be alerted for concurrence signature. These signers may enter an addendum if they do not concur with the content of the document, but they may not edit the document itself. D CLEAR^VALM1,SIGNER^TIURA1,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
TIUF CHANGE STATUS TO ACTIVE action D EDSTAT^TIUFHA3
TIUF CHANGE STATUS TO INACTIVE action D EDSTAT^TIUFHA3
TIUF CHANGE STATUS TO TEST action D EDSTAT^TIUFHA3
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW PT/TTL action Allows users to modify the list of reports by signature status, review screen and dictation date range without exiting the review screen. K TIUQUIK,VALMY D FIXLSTNW^TIULM,FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIURPTTL($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1:38)) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION MENU PT/TTL REVIEW menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIUF QUIT1 action Quits the option. Enter Q Q
TIU ACTION SEARCH LIST action Allows users to search list of Documents for a text string (word, phrase, or partial word) from current position to the end of the list. Upon reaching the end of the last page of the list, the user will be asked whether to continue the search from the beginning of the list through the origin of the search. D FIND^VALM40
TIUF STATUS ACTIVE action S TIUFAVAL=^TMP("TIUF",$J,"STATA")
TIUF STATUS INACTIVE action S TIUFAVAL=^TMP("TIUF",$J,"STATI")
TIUF STATUS TEST action S TIUFAVAL=^TMP("TIUF",$J,"STATT")
TIUF STATUS NONE action S TIUFAVAL="0^NONE"
TIUFJ ACTION MENU CLIN menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFA SORT DDEFS CLIN
TIUFJ ACTION MENU MGR menu Protocol Menu for List Manager Template TIUFA SORT DDEFS MGR
TIUFJ ACTION CHANGE VIEW action Changes what Document Definitions appear on list. D CHANGE^TIUFA1
TIU INTEGRATED OE/RR INTERFACE action Allows access to the Review Documents function of TIU. NOTE: This action is designed to be added to ANY OE/RR menu (e.g., OR USER MENU, OR ADD MENU CLINICIAN, etc.). D EN^VALM("TIU REVIEW SCREEN CLINICIAN") K TIUPRM0,TIUPRM1,TIUPRM3
TIU PT/TITLE OE/RR INTERFACE action Allows users to query for Progress Notes by Patient and Title. NOTE: This action is designed to be added to ANY OE/RR menu (e.g., OR USER MENU, OR ADD MENU CLINICIAN, etc.). D EN^VALM("TIU REVIEW BY PATIENT & TITLE") K TIUPRM0,TIUPRM1,TIUPRM3
TIUFHA ACTION BOILERPLATE TEXT action Applies to Titles and Components only. Displays boilerplate text of Managers (persons with Manager menu) need not own the entry in order to edit its boilerplate text. entry. If entry is a Title, also displays boilerplate text of any Components. Permits user to edit boilerplate text. CLINICIAN OPTIONS Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) can VIEW boilerplate text of any entry but must own the entry in order to edit the boilerplate text. MANAGER OPTIONS D EDVIEW^TIUFHA
TIUFX ACTION MENU MGR menu Menu of Manager Boilerplate Text Actions. CLINICIAN OPTIONS Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) can VIEW the boilerplate text of any entry and can TRY it. If the clinician owns the entry, s/he can also edit its status and its boilerplate text. MANAGER OPTIONS Managers (persons with Manager menu) can edit status, edit boilerplate text, and TRY entry.
TIUFX EDIT STATUS action User can edit Status. Status must be Inactive in order to edit MANAGER OPTIONS: Managers (persons with Manager menu) can edit status of entry regardless of ownership. boilerplate text. Status must be Active for Document Definition to be used by general users to enter documents. If status is Test, only the owner can enter a document on the entry. User can TRY entry of ANY status since trial document is deleted following trial. CLINICIAN OPTIONS: Clinicians (persons with Clinician menu) must own an entry in order to edit its status. D STATUS^TIUFX
TIUFX ACTION MENU VIEW menu Menu of View Boilerplate Text Actions. For National Standard entries, entries not owned by Clinician user (person with Clinician menu), Shared Components not owned by user, whether Clinician or Manager (person with Manager menu). User can VIEW the boilerplate text of any entry and can TRY it.
TIU ACTION MENU OE/RR menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
TIU ACTION SIGNED/UNSIGNED action Allows users to modify the list of reports by signature status, etc. without exiting the review screen. D KILL^VALM10() K VALMY D FULL^VALM1,INIT^TIUROR($S(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")):+$G(^("CLASS")),1:3),9999,+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"DFN"))) S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION SELECT NEW PATIENT action Select a new patient. K ^TMP("TIURSAVE",$J),^TMP("TIURSIDX",$J),^TMP("VALM VIDEO",$J),VALMY D FULL^VALM1,INIT^TIUROR(+$G(^TMP("TIUR",$J,"CLASS")),1) D:$D(^TMP("TIUR",$J)) HDR^TIUROR S VALMBCK=$S($D(^TMP("TIUR",$J,0)):"R",1:"Q"),VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION RESET ALL SIGNED action Reset the list to ALL SIGNED documents. D KILL^VALM10() K VALMY D RESTORE^TIUROR1 D HDR^TIUROR
TIU ACTION CWAD DISPLAY action Detailed display of the CWAD patient warnings; setup for "^^"-jumping to within XQOR*. Requires Health Summary. D CWAD^TIULX
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR OE/RR action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D:$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR READ ONLY") D:'$G(TIUGLINK) BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR CLINICIAN")
TIU ACTION COMPLETE DOCUMENTS action Allows clinicians to electronically sign selected documents or addenda. NOTE: Electronic signature carries the same legal ramifications that wet signature of a hard-copy document carries. You are advised to carefully review each document for content and accuracy before exercising this option. D FULL^VALM1,ELSIG^TIURS1
TIU LM REVIEW PN action Allows users to access Progress Notes in a manner analogous to that available through Progress Notes v2.5. K DUOUT,DTOUT,DIROUT,DIRUT D EN^TIUROR
TIU COMPLETE NOTES MENU menu This menu is used by the List template for the completion of notes. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION COMPLETE NOTES action Allows users to browse Progress Notes from the Review Screen, and to Sign, Edit, or Delete individual records, either singly, or in groups. D BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU COMPLETE NOTES")
TIU HIDDEN ACTIONS OE/RR menu This menu includes the secondary or "hidden actions" which are provided by the List Manager (e.g., scroll right, scroll left, up one line, etc.) and which may be used in the review screens, but which are not visible in the top level action menu.
TIU BROWSE ACTION CHANGE TITLE action Allows authorized users to change the title of a TIU Document as necessary. D CNVPOST1^TIURS1 S VALMBCK="Q"
TIU ACTION MENU CHANGE TITLE menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU HIDDEN ACTIONS ADVANCED menu This menu includes the secondary or "hidden actions" which are provided by the List Manager (e.g., scroll right, scroll left, up one line, etc.) and which may be used in the review screens, but which are not visible in the top level action menu.
TIU ACTION CHANGE TITLE action Allows authorized users to modify the title of a document (and thereby convert a patient posting), as appropriate. Interdisciplinary entries must be detached before having their titles changed. Q:$G(TIUGLINK) D CNVPOST^TIURS1
TIUFJ ACTION EDIT OWNER action User selects multiple entries and edits Owner, Personal and/or Class. To change from Personal to Class Owner or vice versa, user must delete the unwanted entry to be prompted for the other. D EDATTR^TIUFHA4
TIUFDJ ACTION MENU MGR menu Menu of Manager Edit Actions for Objects.
TIU BROWSE ACTION LINK TO PROBLEM action Link the selected document to one or more Problems from the patient's active Problem List. D LINK1^TIURB1
TIU BROWSE MENU LINK menu Allows authorized users to (re)-link single documents to either problems, a different patient/visit if current patient/visit is incorrect, or a record in another VistA application (for example, a Consult Result may be linked to a Consult Request, a Patient Record Flag Document to a Flag, and so on). Such associations permit a variety of clinically useful "views" of the on-line record. S XQORM(0)="AD",XQORM("??")="D LINKHELP^TIUHELP",VALMBCK="" K TIUCHNG
TIUF ACTION TRY1 action Permits Mnemonic TRY. Otherwise, same as protocol TIUF ACTION TRY. D CHECKDEF^TIUFHA6
EC MUL PROCS MENU menu S XQORM("B")="MP"
EC MUL ADD PROCDT action D PRDTADD^ECMLMP
EC MUL PROC ADD action D PRADD^ECMLMP
EC MUL DEL PROCDT action D PRDTDEL^ECMLMP
EC MUL PROC DEL action D PRDEL^ECMLMP
EC MUL PAT SCREEN action S ECNFLG=1 Q
EC MUL PATIENTS MENU menu
EC MUL ADD PAT action D ADDPAT^ECMLMN
EC MUL DEL PAT action D PATDEL^ECMLMN
EC MUL FILE SCREEN action S ECFFLG=1 Q
GMTS HS BY PATIENT & DATE action Generates Health Summaries of a specified pre-defined Health Summary Type for multiple patients. After patients are selected. The user can pick a date range. Data for summaries is based on the date range. This date range overrides time limits for componenets which allow this option S GMRANGE=1 D ^GMTS K GMRANGE
GMTS HS BY PATIENT & VISIT action Generates Health Summaries of a specified pre-defined Health Summary type for multiple patients. After a patient is selected, the user can pick an outpatient visit (based on the VISIT file) or an inpatient hospital admission (based on the patient movement file). If the Patient Care Encounter (PCE) package isn't installed then the user can only choose an inpatient visit. Data for summaries is based on a date range from the outpatient visit or inpatient admission. This Date Range overrides Time Limits for components which allow this option. S GMTSPXGO=1 D ^GMTS K GMTSPXGO
PS MFSEND OR extended action Send new and updated master file entries from Pharmacy to OE/RR. Q
PS RECEIVE OR action This protocol is used to receive Pharmacy orders from CPRS. D EN^PSJHL4(.XQORMSG)
PS EVSEND OR extended action This protocol is for sending Inpatient and Outpatient Pharmacy orders to CPRS. K ^TMP("HLS",$J,"PS"),PSOC,MSG
GMRC RECEIVE action D EN^GMRCHL7A(.XQORMSG)
GMRC EVSEND OR extended action
GMRC ORDERABLE ITEM UPDATE extended action
VAFC ADT-A04 SERVER event driver This server protocol fires when a patient is registered. It generates a Health Level Seven (HL7) register a patient (event code A04) message.
VAFC ADT-A08 SERVER event driver This server protocol fires when a patient record is updated. It generates a Health Level Seven (HL7) update a patient (event code A08) message.
VAFH HL7 INPATIENT CAPTURE extended action This protocol hangs off of the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS Protocol. It generates HL7 ADT messages based on what action has fired the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS Protocol, such as: Admissions; Discharges, or Transfers. D ^VAFHADT1
VAFH HL7 OUTPATIENT CAPTURE action This protocol will send HL7 messages for check-in, check-out, and stand-alone stop codes "event" at the time they occur. It hangs off the SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS protocol. D CAP^VAFHCCAP
VAFH A01 event driver
VAFH CLIENT A01 subscriber
VAFH A02 event driver
VAFH A11 event driver
VAFH A12 event driver
VAFH A13 event driver
VAFH A03 event driver
VAFH A04 event driver
VAFH A08 event driver
VAFH A34 event driver
VAFH CLIENT A02 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A03 subscriber
DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS extended action At the completion of a patient movement the following events 3. When a patient is admitted, dietetics creates a dietetic patient file entry and creates an admission diet order. When a patient is discharged, all active diet orders are discontinued. If a patient is absent or on pass, the diet orders are suspended. 4. Inpatient Pharmacy cancels all active orders when a patient is admitted, discharged or on unauthorized absence. A patient can not be given Unit Dose meds unless s/he is take place through this option: admitted to a ward. The patient can receive IV meds; however. When a patient is transferred, an inpatient system parameter is used to determine whether or not the orders should be cancelled. When a patient goes on authorized absence, the inpatient system parameter is used to determine whether the orders should be cancelled, placed on hold or no action taken. When a patient returns from authorized absence any orders placed on hold will no longer be on hold. 5. With ORDER ENTRY/RESULTS REPORTING v2.2, MAS OE/RR NOTIFICATIONS may be displayed to USERS defined in an OE/RR LIST for the patient. These notifications are displayed for admissions and death discharges. 1. The PTF record is updated when a patient is admitted, discharged or transfered. 2. The appointment status for a patient is updated to 'inpatient' for admissions and 'outpatient' for discharges. Admissions to the domicilliary have an 'outpatient' appointment status.
VAFH CLIENT A04 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A08 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A11 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A12 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A13 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A34 subscriber
VAFH CLIENT A19 subscriber
VAFH A19 event driver
VAFC ADT-A01 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A02 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A03 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A11 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A12 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A13 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A19 SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A01 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A02 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A03 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A08 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A11 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A12 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A13 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A19 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC HL7 INPATIENT CAPTURE extended action D ^VAFCADT1
VAFC HL7 OUTPATIENT CAPTURE action D CAP^VAFCCCAP
VAFC ADT-A08-TSP SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A08-TSP CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A08-SDAM SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A08-SDAM CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADT-A08-SCHED SERVER event driver
VAFC ADT-A08-SCHED CLIENT subscriber
IVMLE TRANSMISSION ERROR MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for IVM transmission error processing.
IVMLE CHANGE LIST action This protocol action permits the user to change the error list being viewed. The error list includes errors with an error processing status of New or Checked, or both. D CL^IVMLERR2
IVMLE CHANGE DATE RANGE action This protocol action permits the user to change the date range of errors being viewed. D CD^IVMLERR2
IVMLE SORT LIST action This protocol action permits the user to sort the error list by patient name or date/time ack received within the selected date range. D SL^IVMLERR2
IVMLE CHECK ERROR OFF LIST action This protocol action permits the user to check an error with a status of New off the list. D CE^IVMLERR2
IVMLE RETRANSMIT PATIENT action This protocol action permits the user to retransmit a patient. D RP^IVMLERR2
SCENI CHANGE DIVISION action Changes the active division for the Incomplete Encounter Management module D CDIV^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI CHANGE CLINIC action Change the active clinic for the list D CCLN^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI CHANGE PATIENT action Changes the active patient for the list. D CPAT^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI CHANGE DATE RANGE action Changes the active date range for the list. D CDT^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI INCOMPLETE ENC MGMT MENU menu Menu for the Incomplete Encounter Managment List manager
SCENI DISPLAY ERRORS action Display all associated errors for the selected encounter D DSPLYER^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI VIEW EXPANDED action Display the corrective action description for the error selected. D VE^SCENIA1 D EXIT^SCENIA1
SCENI EXPAND ENCOUNTER action Displays pertinent fields for the selected encounter D EXP^SCENI01 D EXIT^SCENI01
SCENI CORRECT ERROR action This item provides a menas to correct the selected errors through the appropriate means. D CE^SCENIA1 D EXIT^SCENIA1
SCENI CHANGE ERROR CODE action This item changes the currently active error code being displayed in the IEMM List Manager display D CER^SCENI01
SCENI DISPLAY ERRORS MENU menu This displays the menu options for correcting/viewing displayed errors for the Incomplete Encounter Management.
SCENI CALL LOAD EDIT action This calls the DG Load Patient Data option. D LE^SCENIA1
SCENI PATIENT DEMOGRAPHICS action This calls the SDAM Patient Demographics update D DEM^SCENIA1
SCENI ENCOUNTER INFORMATION action This calls the Edit Encounter Information option for IEMM error correction D EI^SCENIA2
SCENI CHECKOUT INTERVIEW action This calls the SDAM checkout, allowing editing Provider, Diagnosis, and procedure errors. D CO^SCENIA1
SCENI REFLAG ERROR action Reflags entry in Transmitted Outpatient Encounter File for transmission and clears the error. D FLG^SCENIA1
DGPM PROVIDER UPDATE EVENT action This protocol is placed on the OR EVSEND DGPM event. It will update the provider in the Patient Movement file (405). D EN^DGPMVPU
FH EVSEND OR extended action This protocol is used to send HL7 message to Order Entry 3 or higher from Dietetics.
FH RECEIVE action This protocol is used to receive HL7 message from Order Entry 3 or higher. D EN^FHWOR(.XQORMSG)
FH ORDERABLE ITEM UPDATE extended action This protocol is used to send orderable item updates HL7 messages to Order Entry 3 or higher from Dietetics.
TIU ACTION LINK WITH CLIENT RECORD action Allows authorized users to (re)-link TIU Documents to records in Other Applications. For example, Consult Results may be linked to Consult Requests, Patient Record Flag Documents may be linked to Flags, and so on. D CLAPPLNK^TIURD S VALMBCK="R"
TIU BROWSE ACTION LINK WITH CLIENT APP action Allows authorized users (as defined by your local business rules in ASU) to link or re-link the current document to a record in another application. For example, Consult Results may be linked to Consult Requests, Patient Record Flag Documents to Flags, etc.. D FULL^VALM1,CLAPPLN1^TIURD(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC VIEW BILL LIST MENU menu This menu contains the actions for reviewing and referring TP Bills.
RCRC VIEW VALIDATION CHECK action This protocol allows users to validate TP bills before they are referred to RC. D EN^RCRCVCK
RCRC VIEW CHECK LIST action This protocol allows users to view a list of criteria items they should have reviewed prior to referring a bill to RC. D EN^RCRCVC K RCOUT
RCRC VIEW REFERRAL TO RC action This protocol allows user to refer TP bills to Regional Counsel. Bills in the Reimbursable Health Category will be electronically referred. D EN^RCRCVXM
RCRC VIEW TPJI action This protocol allows user to access the Third Party Joint Inquiry List Manager screens. D IB^RCRCVL
RCRC VIEW SELECT ITEM action This option is to select or unselect listed bills to take actions on the bills. D SEL^RCRCVLE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC VIEW EDIT LIST action This option allows the users to change their current list of bills. D MOD^RCRCVLE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC ACTION BILL LIST menu This menu contains actions and adjustments that can be made to bills that are referred to Regional Counsel. These bills must be Third Party bills.
RCRC ACTION CODE LIST action This protocol list Transaction Codes that can be sent to RC as requests. D EN^RCRCAC K RCOUT
RCRC ACTION EDIT LIST action This protocol allows users to change their current list. They can add or subtract bills from it. D MOD^RCRCALE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC ACTION SELECT ITEM action This protocol allows users to select a bill(s) on the screen before selecting an action to be posted against them. D SEL^RCRCALE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC ACTION TPJI action This protocol allows users to enter the Third Party Joint Inquiry List Manager screens. D IB^RCRCAL
RCRC ACTION EOB PROC action This protocol allows user to process EOB Codes for partial payments. D EOB^RCRCACP
RCRC ACTION CODE REQ action This protocol will send a request via E-mail to RC for the selected action to be posted against the bill. D REQ^RCRCACP
RCRC ACTION CODE MENU menu This menu contains the actions to process requests and send information to the Regional Counsel Office.
RCRC ACTION TRANSACTION SEND action This protocol will allow the user to select an existing AR Tranasaction and send it to Regional Counsel. D EN^RCRCAT
RCRC ACTION INCREASE action This protocol allows referred TP Bills to be increased. This should be used if payments received for a bill is greater than the Outstanding Balance. D INC^RCRCRT
RCRC TRANSMISSION LOG menu This protocol allows the user to select,append comments to, delete, veiw and forward message of a regional counsel transmission.
RCRC TRANSMISSION VIEW action This protocol allows viewing of a transmission to Regional Counsel, D EN^RCRCXMS("VEW") S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC TRANSMISSION DELETE action This protocol allow the user to delete a transmission from the transmission log. D EN^RCRCXMS("DEL") S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC TRANSMISSION FORWARD action This protocol allows a user to forward a transmission message to another recepient. D EN^RCRCXMS("FRW") S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC TRANSMISSION COMMENT action This protocol allows a user to append comments to a Regional Counsel transmission. D EN^RCRCXMS("COM") S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC TRANSMISSION SELECT action This protocol allows a user to select a transmission. D SEL^RCRCELE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC EOB LIST menu This protocol allows user to process EOB Codes for partial payments.
RCRC EOB SELECT ITEM action This protocol allows users to select a transaction(s) on the screen in order to perform EOB processing action. D SEL^RCRCBLE S VALMBCK="R"
RCRC TRANSMISSION RESEQ action This option is used to Resequence the Transmission Log to remove items that were deleted and display added comments. D REQ^RCRCELE S VALMBCK="R"
USR SHOW USER MEMBERSHIP MENU menu Menu of action to show user class memberships. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
USR SHOW CLASS MEMBERSHIP MENU menu Menu for showing members of User Classes. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)+1
SR Notification of Appointment Booking event driver This protocol is used within the Surgery HL7 interface to transmit new appointment bookings. This is a S12 trigger event code which includes all new requested, scheduled or emergent surgery cases entered through the proper Surgery package options.
SR Notification of Appointment Rescheduling event driver This protocol is used within the Surgery HL7 interface to transmit appointment reschedulings. This is a S13 trigger event code which includes changes in existing case's requested or scheduled through the proper Surgery package options.
SR Notification of Appointment Modification event driver This protocol is used within the Surgery HL7 interface to transmit appointment modifications. This is an S14 trigger event code which includes modifications to an existing case entered through the proper Surgery package options.
SR Notification of Appointment Cancellation event driver This protocol is used within the Surgery HL7 interface to transmit appointment cancellations. This is an S15 trigger event code which includes modifications to an existing case entered through the proper Surgery package options.
SR Notification of Appointment Deletion event driver This protocol is used within the Surgery HL7 interface to transmit appointment deletions. This is an S17 trigger event code which includes modifications to an existing case entered through the proper Surgery package options.
SR Unsolicited transmission of VistA Requested Observation event driver This protocol is used from within the Surgery Interface to transmit unsolicited observations. This is an R01 trigger event code which includes all cases with the Surgical package status of either not complete or complete.
SR Receiver of Observation Unsolicited subscriber This is the protocol built for the client application to receive unsolicited ORU messages.
SR Receiver of New Appointment Booking subscriber This protocol is setup for the client application to receive the Surgery New Appointment bookings, event type S12.
SR Receiver of Appointment Rescheduling subscriber This protocol is setup for the client application to receive the surgery appointment rescheduling messages, event type S13.
SR Receiver of Appointment Modification subscriber This protocol is setup for the client application to receive the surgery appointment modification messages, event type S14.
SR Receiver of Appointment Cancellation subscriber This protocol is setup for the client application to receive the surgery appointment cancellation messages, event type S15.
SR Receiver of Appointment Deletion subscriber This protocol is setup for the client application to receive the surgery appointment deletion messages, event type S17.
SR Unsolicited transmission of AAIS Requested Observation event driver This protocol is setup for the placer application to send unsolicited observation, ORU, messages to the filler surgery application to process.
SR Receiver of Unsolicited Requested Observation subscriber This protocol is setup for the filler surgery application to receive usolicited observation, ORU, messages from the placer application for processing.
SR Query for Scheduling Information event driver This protocol is setup to identify the S25, Query for Scheduling information, event code.
SR Receiver of Scheduling Query subscriber This protocol is setup to identify the S25, Query for Scheduling information, event code. This protocol identifies the processing routine for the incoming query message.
SR Staff Master File Notification event driver This protocol is used to initialize surgery staff information on the placers system. This message only sends staff that is current entered into the surgery case file.
SR Other Master File Notification event driver This protocol is used to update all of the master file, except the staff master file, used by the Surgery Interface. Some of these master files include; CPT-4, ICD9, Medication, Replacement Fluid, Monitor as well as some of the set of codes.
SR Receiver of Staff Master File Notification subscriber This protocol is used to initialize the staff for the placer, Automated Anesthesia Information System.
SR Receiver of Master File Notification subscriber This protocol is used to deliver master file notifications to the Automated Anesthesia Information System.
LRNCH event driver LRNCH is the server that is used for sending HL7 messages to Austin Automation Center. S HL("EID")=$G(LRPROT),HLQUIT="",HLNEXT="D HLNEXT^HLCSUTL" S LR772IEN=HLMTIEN D:$G(HLHDR)["ACK" LOOK^LREPIAK Q:$G(HLHDR)["ACK" S HLMTIEN=LR772IEN D PROCESS^LREPIRP
SCMC MU MASS TEAM UNASSIGNMENT menu
SCMC MU SELECT ALL action D ALL^SCMCMU1("SELECT")
SCMC MU DESELECT ALL action D ALL^SCMCMU1("DE-SELECT")
SCMC MU SELECT SOME action D SOME^SCMCMU1("SELECT")
SCMC MU DESELECT SOME action D SOME^SCMCMU1("DE-SELECT")
SCMC MU VIEW ALL action D VIEW^SCMCMU1("ALL")
SCMC MU VIEW SELECTED action D VIEW^SCMCMU1("SELECT")
SCMC MU VIEW DESELECTED action D VIEW^SCMCMU1("DE-SELECT")
SCMC MU UNASSIGN PATIENTS action D UNASSIGN^SCMCMU11
SCMC MU QUIT action DO QUIT^SCMCMU11
SC PC PATIENT ASSIGN/UNASSIGN action SC PCMM ROLL Used to assign/unassign patient to primary care team and/or primary care practitioner position. D FULL^VALM1 D:$G(DFN) PAT^SCMCQK D:'$G(DFN) EN^SCMCQK S VALMBCK="R" D HOME^%ZIS
GMRVORPR B/P protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
GMRVORPB/P protocol Q:$S('$D(^ORD(100.99)):1,'$D(^PS(59.7,1,20)):1,1:^(20)<2.8) D EN1^GMRVORE0
DG PTF ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A01 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A02 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A03 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A08 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A11 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A12 CLIENT subscriber
DG PTF ADT-A13 CLIENT subscriber
VAFC ADMIT XMIT DATE RANGE action D DATE^VAFCMS01
VAFC ADMIT XMIT MENU menu
VAFC ADMIT XMIT TRANSMIT action D XMIT^VAFCMS01
VAFC ADMIT XMIT PATIENT action D NEWDFN^VAFCMS01
DG PTF ADT-A08-TSP CLIENT subscriber
PRSA OT WARNINGS LIST menu This menu protocol has the actions used by the Overtime Warnings List. The actions on this protocol help payroll manage the Overtime Warnings that appear on the Pay Period Exceptions Report.
PRSA CLEAR OT WARN action Selecting CL (Clear OT Warn) allows payroll to select any of the Overtime warnings in the current display area of the OT warnings list. Any active warnings that the user selects will be cleared, changing the warning's staus to cleared. Cleared warnings will not appear on the Pay Period Exceptions Report. D CLEAR^PRSAOTTW
PRSA VIEW OT REQ action This action protocol allows users to view overtime requests that are associated with a particular overtime warning. The overtime warnings, which appear on the Overtime Warnings List are specific to one employee and one week of a pay period. The warnings occur when the employee has more overtime calculated in their TT8B string than approved overtime, in any particular week. D OTRQVW^PRSAOTTR
SDCO GAF action This action permits the user to enter/edit GAF information. D GAF^SDCO7
PXCE GAF action Used to enter/edit GAF data. D GAF^PXCE
PRCO VENDOR EDIT AR menu
PRCO AR EDIT action D EDIT^PRCOVL
PRCO AR REVIEW RECORD action D REV^PRCOVL
PRCO AR PRINT ENTRY action D PRINT^PRCOVL1
PRCO AR SEND VRQ action D VRQ^PRCOVL1
PRCO AR DELETE action D OUT^PRCOVL1
IBCNB LIST SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $D(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNB LIST SORT action D SELSORT^IBCNBLA
IBCNB LIST ENTRY SCREEN action D LNXTSCRN^IBCNBLA("IBCNB INSURANCE BUFFER ENTRY","IBCNBLLX",AVIEW)
IBCNB LIST REJECT action D LREJECT^IBCNBLA("IBCNBLLX")
IBCNB LIST PROCESS SCREEN action D LNXTSCRN^IBCNBLA("IBCNB INSURANCE BUFFER PROCESS","IBCNBLLX",AVIEW)
IBCNB PROCESS SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $D(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNB PROCESS TOGGLE action D TGLSCRN^IBCNBLA(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB ENTRY SCREEN MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $D(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNB ENTRY EDIT INSURANCE action D INSEDIT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB ENTRY EDIT GROUP action D GRPEDIT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB ENTRY EDIT POLICY action D POLEDIT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB ENTRY EDIT ALL action D ALLEDIT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB PROCESS COMPARE/EDIT action D CMPEDIT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB PROCESS ENTRY SCREEN action D PNXTSCRN^IBCNBLA("IBCNB INSURANCE BUFFER ENTRY",$G(IBBUFDA))
IBCNB FAST EXIT action D FASTEXIT^IBCNBLA
IBCNB PROCESS REJECT action D REJECT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB PROCESS ACCEPT action D ACCEPT^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
IBCNB LIST ADD action D ADDBUF^IBCNBLA1
DGEN SEND ENROLLMENT QUERY action This action allows the user to send an enrollment/eligibility query for a patient. It is not available if there is an outstanding query for the patient. D QUERY^DGEN1
DGEN CHECK QUERY STATUS action This action is used to check the status of the last enrollment/eligibility that was sent. D CHECK^DGEN1
DGENUP VIEW ELIGIBILTY UPLOAD AUDIT action Allows the user to view the audit trail for the eligibilty upload. D EN^DGENUPA2($G(DFN))
DGEN SD ENROLL PATIENT action Upon check-out, this will create an enrollment record with an UNVERIFIED enrollment status for veterans that have no enrollment unverified enrollment status for veterans that have no enrollment D ENROLL^DGENA2
TIU ACTION EDIT ENCOUNTER action Allows authorized users to Edit Encounter information on demand. D ENCNTR^TIURA1
TIU BROWSE ACTION EDIT ENCOUNTER action Allows authorized users to edit the encounter data for the visit associated with the selected TIU Document(s). D EDTENC^TIUPXAP2(TIUDA,.TIUCHNG)
YS GAF A08 CLIENT subscriber HL7 A08 Client protocol for sending dynamic messages by the Mental Health. These messages will contain AO8 message type as required and used by the National Patient Care Database.
YS GAF event driver This server protocol will be used for sending A08 message types to NPCD.
RA TCP ORM subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA REG, RA EXAMINED, and RA CANCEL event protocols. It is used by the VISTA HL7 package to send ORM messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the ITEM multiple field of those event point protocols if this type of messaging scenerio is used at a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable HL7 message flow when exams are registered, cancelled, and when they reach the status flagged as 'examined' by the site. Q Q
RA TCP ORU subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA RPT event point protocol. The HL7 package uses this protocol to send rad/nuc med report (ORU) messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the ITEM multiple field of the RA RPT protocol if this messaging scenerio is used in a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable message flow when a rad/nuc med report is verified. Q Q
RA VOICE TCP REPORT subscriber Subscriber protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process messages sent to VISTA from a COTS voice recognition unit using TCP/IP for message flow. This protocol should be entered in the ITEM multiple of the RA VOICE TCP SERVER RPT protocol. Q Q
RA VOICE TCP SERVER RPT event driver Driver protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process radiology/nuclear med reports coming into VISTA from commercial voice recognition units using TCP/IP for message flow.
OR RECEIVE action D EN^ORM(.XQORMSG)
OR EVSEND RA extended action
OR EVSEND LRCH extended action
OR ITEM RECEIVE extended action D EN^ORMFN(.XQORMSG) K ^TMP($J,"OR OI BEFORE"),^TMP($J,"OR OI AFTER"),TMP($J,"OR OI NEW")
OR EVSEND LRBB extended action
OR EVSEND LRAP extended action
OR EVSEND DGPM extended action Protocol used by OE/RR to send a message to MAS regarding a patient movement or patient information update (such as a change in primary provider or attending physician aka. provider-patient linkage.)
OR EVSEND FH extended action
OR EVSEND ORG extended action
OR EVSEND PS extended action
OR EVSEND GMRC extended action
ORCM MENU menu
ORCM ADD ITEMS action D ADDITM^ORCMEDT2
ORCM REMOVE ITEMS action D REMOVE^ORCMEDT2
ORCM EDIT ITEMS action D EDIT^ORCMEDT2
ORCM EDIT POSITION action D MOVE^ORCMEDT2
ORCM NEW MENU action D NEW^ORCMEDIT
ORCM ORDERABLES action D FULL^VALM1,OI^ORCMEDT1 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM QUICK ORDERS action D FULL^VALM1,QUICK^ORCMEDT1 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM DIALOGS menu S VALMBCK="",XQORM(0)="1AD\"
ORCM ORDER SETS action D FULL^VALM1,SET^ORCMEDT1 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM VIEW INT/EXT action D VIEW^ORCMEDIT
ORCM ADD menu S VALMBCK=""
ORCM REMOVE menu S VALMBCK=""
ORCM EDIT menu S VALMBCK=""
ORCM ADD TEXT action D ADDTXT^ORCMEDT2
ORCM EDIT MENU action D EDIT^ORCMEDIT
ORCM ADD ROW action D ADDROW^ORCMEDT2
ORCM REMOVE ROW action D REMROW^ORCMEDT2
ORCM PROTOCOLS action D FULL^VALM1,PROTOCOL^ORCMEDT1 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM PROMPTS action D FULL^VALM1,EN^ORCMEDT4 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM ORDERS action D FULL^VALM1,EN^ORCMEDT3 S VALMBCK="R"
ORCM ACTIONS action D FULL^VALM1,ACTION^ORCMEDT3 S VALMBCK="R"
ORC ORES ORDER ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD)
ORCHART COVER action D:ORTAB'="COVER" TAB^ORCHART("COVER")
ORCHART PROBLEMS action D:ORTAB'="PROBLEMS" TAB^ORCHART("PROBLEMS")
ORCHART MEDS action D:ORTAB'="MEDS" TAB^ORCHART("MEDS")
ORCHART ORDERS action D:ORTAB'="ORDERS" TAB^ORCHART("ORDERS")
ORCHART NOTES action D:ORTAB'="NOTES" TAB^ORCHART("NOTES")
ORCHART CONSULTS action D:ORTAB'="CONSULTS" TAB^ORCHART("CONSULTS")
ORCHART LABS action D:ORTAB'="LABS" TAB^ORCHART("LABS")
ORCHART REPORTS action D:ORTAB'="REPORTS" TAB^ORCHART("REPORTS")
ORCHART SUMMARIES action D:ORTAB'="SUMMRIES" TAB^ORCHART("SUMMRIES")
ORC PATIENT action D NEWPAT^ORCHART S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORCHART ORDERS MENU menu
ORCHART PROBLEMS MENU menu
ORCHART XRAYS action D:ORTAB'="XRAYS" TAB^ORCHART("XRAYS")
ORC ADD ORDERS action D EN^ORCMENU S VALMBCK="R" S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,"MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC CHANGE ORDERS action D EDIT^ORCACT D EX^ORCACT
ORC SIGN ORDERS action D EN^ORCSIGN D EX^ORCACT
ORC RENEW ORDERS action D RENEW^ORCACT D EX^ORCACT
ORC WARD COMMENTS action D COMMENT^ORCACT1
ORC DETAILED DISPLAY action D EN^ORCXPND I $G(ORTAB)'="NEW",$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) S XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC DISPLAY ACTIONS menu
ORC ADD ORDERS MENU menu
ORC ADD ITEM action D ITEM^ORCMENU
ORCHART TABS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",VALMBCK="" S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC DISCONTINUE ORDERS action D DC^ORCACT2 D EX^ORCACT
ORC VERIFY ORDERS action N ORV S ORV=$S($D(^XUSEC("ORELSE",DUZ)):"N",$D(^XUSEC("OREMAS",DUZ)):"C",1:"^") D VERIFY^ORCACT1(ORV) D EX^ORCACT
ORC HOLD ORDERS action D HOLD^ORCACT D EX^ORCACT
ORC FLAG ORDERS action D FLAG^ORCACT1 D EX^ORCACT
ORC EDIT PROBLEM action D EDIT^ORCPROB D EX^ORCPROB
ORC COMMENT PROBLEM action D CMMT^ORCPROB D EX^ORCPROB
ORC INACTIVATE PROBLEM action D INACT^ORCPROB D EX^ORCPROB
ORC REMOVE PROBLEM action D REMOVE^ORCPROB D EX^ORCPROB
ORC PROBLEM ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC SIGN NOTE action D SIGN^ORCNOTE
ORC AMEND NOTE action D AMEND^ORCNOTE
ORC EDIT NOTE action D EDIT^ORCNOTE
ORCHART XRAYS MENU menu
ORC ADD XRAY action S ORDIALOG="RA OERR EXAM" D ADD^ORCACT S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC XRAY ACTIONS extended action S ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
OCX ORDER CHECK HL7 RECIEVE action Q:$G(A7RNDBI) S:'$D(OCXDUCT) OCXDUCT="" D SILENT^OCXOHL7(.XQORMSG,.OCXDUCT) K OCXDUCT
ORC TIU ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC COVER ACTIONS extended action S ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC NOTIFICATIONS FOLLOW UP action W !!,"Not available yet.",! H 1 S VALMBCK=""
ORC LAB ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORCHANGE LRC action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"LABS",0)),U,3) S $P(X,";",3)="C",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,"LABS",0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORCHANGE LRRR action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"LABS",0)),U,3) S $P(X,";",3)="R",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,"LABS",0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORCHANGE GOTO HEADER action D LRSUB^ORCHANGE
ORS RX ACTION PROFILE action This protocol allows the user to print action profiles for selected patients.
ORCHANGE DATE RANGE action D RANGE^ORCHANGE
ORCHANGE LAB CUM menu
ORCHANGE LIST action D EN^ORCHANGE S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORCHANGE LAB LIST menu
ORCHANGE PROBLEMS menu
ORCHANGE NOTES menu
ORCHANGE ORDERS SHORT menu
ORCHANGE MEDS INPT menu
ORCHANGE XRAYS menu
ORCHANGE MAX ITEMS action D MAX^ORCHANGE
ORS REPORT MENU menu This is a menu of OE/RR reports that can be given to ward users to produce various patient reports. S ORANSI=0,XQORFLG("SH")=1 D EXIT^ORPRS07
ORCHANGE DISPLAY GROUP action D DGROUP^ORCHANGE
ORCHANGE PROBLEM STATUS action D PLIST^ORCHANG2
ORCHANGE ORDER STATUS action D ORDERS^ORCHANG2
ORQPT CLINIC LIST action D CLINIC^ORQPT1
ORQPT WARD LIST action D WARD^ORQPT1
ORQPT PROVIDER LIST action D PROV^ORQPT1
ORQPT TEAM LIST action D TEAM^ORQPT1
ORQPT SPECIALTY LIST action D SPEC^ORQPT1
ORQPT SORT ORDER action D SORT^ORQPT1
ORQPT CHANGE LIST menu S VALMBCK="",ORY=$$CONTEXT^ORQPT1,XQORM(0)="1AD\" D:ORY'=$$CONTEXT^ORQPT1 REBUILD^ORQPT1 K ORY
ORQPT SAVE PREFERENCE action D SAVE^ORQPT1
ORQPT PATIENT SELECTION menu S XQORM(0)=$TR(XQORM(0),"\")
ORQPT SELECT PATIENT action D SELECT^ORQPT
ORQPT FIND PATIENT action D FIND^ORQPT
ORC ADD PROBLEM action D ADD^ORCPROB S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC NEXT SCREEN extended action
ORC PREVIOUS SCREEN extended action
ORC UP ONE LINE extended action
ORC DOWN A LINE extended action
ORC RIGHT extended action
ORC LEFT extended action
ORC FIRST SCREEN extended action
ORC LAST SCREEN extended action
ORC GOTO PAGE extended action
ORC REFRESH extended action
ORC PRINT SCREEN extended action
ORC PRINT LIST extended action
ORC SEARCH LIST extended action
ORC TURN ON/OFF MENUS extended action
ORC HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
ORCHART COVER MENU menu
ORCHART NOTES MENU menu
ORCHART SUMMARIES MENU menu
ORCHART MEDS MENU menu
ORCHART LABS MENU menu
ORCHART REPORTS MENU menu
ORCHART CONSULTS MENU menu
ORC ADD LAB action S ORDIALOG="LR OTHER LAB TESTS" D ADD^ORCACT S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC ADD MED menu S VALMBCK="" S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC ADD CONSULT action S ORDIALOG="GMRCOR CONSULT" D ADD^ORCACT
ORC ADD PROCEDURE action S ORDIALOG="GMRCOR REQUEST" D ADD^ORCACT
ORC ADD ALLERGY action N DFN,GMRAUSER,GMRAOUT S DFN=+$G(ORVP) D:DFN>0 FULL^VALM1,EN2^GMRAPEM0 S VALMBCK="R" S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC ADD NOTE action D FULL^VALM1,MAIN^TIUEDIT(3,.OREBUILD) S VALMBCK="R" S OREBUILD=1 S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU") I +$G(OREBUILD) D TAB^ORCHART(ORTAB,1)
ORC ADD SUMMARY action Add a new discharge summary. D FULL^VALM1,MAIN^TIUEDIT(244,.OREBUILD) S VALMBCK="R" S OREBUILD=1 S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU") I +$G(OREBUILD) D TAB^ORCHART(ORTAB,1)
ORC CONSULT ACTIONS action D EN^ORCONSLT S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORCB NOTIFICATIONS menu
ORCB ACTIONS action D SELECT^ORCB
ORCB EXPIRING MENU menu
ORCB UNSIGNED MENU menu
ORCB FLAGGED MENU menu
ORCB NEW MENU menu
ORCHANGE MEDS OUTPT menu
ORCHANGE PSJ action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"MEDS",0)),U,3) S $P(X,";",3)=1,$P(^TMP("OR",$J,"MEDS",0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORCHANGE PSO action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"MEDS",0)),U,3) S $P(X,";",3)=0,$P(^TMP("OR",$J,"MEDS",0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORC INPT MED ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC TRANSFER MEDS action D XFER^ORCMED D EX^ORCACT
ORC PRINT LABELS action D LBL^ORPR01
ORC PRINT CHART COPIES action D CHT^ORPR01
ORC PRINT SERVICE COPIES action D SRV^ORPR01
ORC PRINT REQUISITION action D REQ^ORPR01
ORC PRINT ORDERS menu S XQORM(0)="AD",VALMBCK="",ORRACT=1 K ORRACT
ORS PRINT MENU menu D FULL^VALM1 S VALMBCK="R" D EXIT^ORPRS07 S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC UNHOLD ORDERS action D UNHOLD^ORCACT D EX^ORCACT
ORC UNFLAG ORDERS action D UNFLAG^ORCACT1 D EX^ORCACT
ORC EVENT ADMISSION action N X S X=$$SPEC^ORCMENU1("A"),VALMBCK="R" I X S OREVENT="A",OREVENT("TS")=+X
ORC EVENT DISCHARGE action S OREVENT="D",OREVENT("TS")=""
ORC EVENT TRANSFER action N X S X=$$SPEC^ORCMENU1("T"),VALMBCK="R" I X S OREVENT="T",OREVENT("TS")=+X
ORC EVENT CURRENT action S OREVENT="",OREVENT("TS")=""
ORC EVENT MENU menu S VALMBCK="",XQORM(0)="1AD\" S:$L($G(OREVENT)) XQORM("B")=$S(OREVENT="A":"Admission",OREVENT="D":"Discharge",OREVENT="T":"Transfer",1:"No Delay") I $G(OREVENT)'=$P(^TMP("ORMENU",$J,ORMENU,0),U,5) D INIT^ORCMENU S VALMBCK="R"
ORC NEW ORDERS action D EN^ORCMENU2 D EX^ORCMENU2
OCX ORDER CHECK PATIENT MOVE. action S:'$D(OCXDUCT) OCXDUCT="" D SILENT^OCXODGPM(.OCXDUCT)
ORCB RENEW ORDER action D RENEW^ORCB
ORCB REPLACE ORDER action D EDIT^ORCB
ORC REPORT ACTIONS extended action S ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
OR GUA EVENT PROCESSOR action This protocol will process patient orders as appropriate based on the action, and all generic orders will be discontinued. This processing is tasked, to reduce the wait for the user. patient movement; it should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. If the patient has been admitted, it will release all pre-admission orders to the ancillary services for action. If the patient has been transferred, it will release all orders that were pending the transfer to this location, and DC all generic orders; if the parameter DC OF GENERIC ORDERS is set to 1, then generic orders are discontinued only if the treating specialty changes. If the patient has been discharged, then all discharge orders will be released to the ancillary services for D EN1^ORMEVNT
OR GUA EVENT PROCESSOR NOTASK action This protocol will process patient orders as appropriate based on the action, and all generic orders will be discontinued. This processing is done interactively, which may sometimes result in a wait. patient movement; it should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. If the patient has been admitted, it will release all pre-admission orders to the ancillary services for action. If the patient has been transferred, it will release all orders that were pending the transfer to this location, and DC all generic orders; if the parameter DC OF GENERIC ORDERS is set to 1, then generic orders are discontinued only if the treating specialty changes. If the patient has been discharged, then all discharge orders will be released to the ancillary services for D EN^ORMEVNT
ORC TIU MAKE ADDENDUM action D ADDENDUM^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU COPY action Allows authorized users to duplicate the current document. This is especially useful when composing a note for a group of patients (e.g., therapy group, etc.), and rapid duplication to all members of the group is appropriate. D COPY^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU SIGN DOCUMENTS action D ELSIG^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU EDIT DOCUMENT action D EDIT^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU DELETE DOCUMENT action D DELETE^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU DESIGNATE SIGNERS action D SIGNERS^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU PRINT DOCUMENT action D PRINT^ORCNOTE S VALMBCK="R" D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU BROWSE DOCUMENT action D BROWSE^ORCNOTE D EX^ORCNOTE
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION MENU menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S ORSIGN=0,VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" K ORSIGN S:$D(DIROUT) ORQUIT=1
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION PRINT action Allows users to print copies of selected documents on their corresponding VA Standard Forms to a specified device. D CLEAR^VALM1,PRINT1^TIURA S VALMBCK="R"
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION REJECT action W !,"Removed from signature list." Q
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION SEARCH action Allows users to search for a text string (word or partial word) from the current position in the summary through its end. Upon reaching the end of the document, the user will be asked whether to continue the search from the beginning of the document through the origin of the search. D FIND^VALM40
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION APPROVE action Allows authorized users to approve the current document for electronic signature. D ACCEPT^ORCNOTE(.ORPICK,NMBR)
ORC TIU SIGN ACTION EDIT action Allows authorized users to edit current document online...When electronic signature is enabled, physicians will be prompted for their signatures upon exit, thereby allowing doctors to review, edit and sign as a one-step process. D CLEAR^VALM1,EDIT1^TIURA,BLDTMP^TIUBR(TIUDA) S VALMBCK="R"
ORC ADD IV MED action N X,OREVENT S ORDIALOG="PSJI OR PAT FLUID OE",X=$$DELAY^ORCACT Q:X="^" S OREVENT=$S(X:$$PTEVENT^OREVNT(+ORVP),1:"") Q:OREVENT="^" D NW^ORCMED
ORC RESULTS DISPLAY action D RESULTS^ORCXPND S VALMBCK="R"
ORCB NEW ORDER action D NEW^ORCB
ORC RESET MENU action S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORRP UNVERIFIED NURSE action Display nurse unverified orders S ORPRES="9;NURSE UNVERIFIED ORDERS"
ORRP UNVERIFIED CLERK action Display orders unverified by clerk. S ORPRES="10;UNVERIFIED BY CLERK"
ORRP FLAGGED action Display flagged orders. S ORPRES="12;FLAGGED ORDERS"
ORU AUTOLIST CLINIC action This protocol is used to automatically update OE/RR team lists with clinic autolinks. It is triggered by the protocol SC CLINIC ENROLL/DISCHARGE EVENT DRIVER and must be an item in that protocol. D EN^ORLP3AUC
ORC PRINT WORK COPIES action D WRK^ORPR01
ORCHANGE LONG FORMAT action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"ORDERS",0)),U,3),$P(X,";",5)="L",$P(^(0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORCHANGE SHORT FORMAT action N X S X=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,"ORDERS",0)),U,3),$P(X,";",5)="S",$P(^(0),U,3,4)=X_U
ORCHANGE ORDERS LONG menu
ORC OUTPT MED ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC ORELSE ORDER ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD)
ORC OREMAS ORDER ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD)
ORC ORDER ACTIONS menu S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD)
ORC NEW ORDERS MENU menu
ORC NEW ACTIONS menu S VALMBCK="",XQORM(0)="1AD",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD)&(VALMBCK'="Q") K ORNMBR
ORRP NEW SINCE action Display active orders for this patient S ORPRES="6;NEW SINCE LAST REVIEW"
ORRP ADMISSION action Display active orders for this patient S ORPRES="15;DELAYED TILL ADMISSION"
ORRP DISCHARGE action Display active orders for this patient S ORPRES="16;DELAYED TILL DISCHARGE"
ORRP TRANSFER action Display active orders for this patient S ORPRES="17;DELAYED TILL TRANSFER"
ORC COMPLETE ORDERS action D COMPLETE^ORCACT1 D EX^ORCACT
ORC ALERT RESULTS action D ALERT^ORCACT1
ORCHANGE NOTES SIGNED action N CTXT S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),$P(CTXT,";",1,5)=";;1;;",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
ORCHANGE NOTES UNSIGNED action N CTXT S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),$P(CTXT,";",1,5)=";;2;;",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
ORCHANGE NOTES UNCOSIGNED action N CTXT S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),$P(CTXT,";",1,5)=";;3;;",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
ORCHANGE NOTES AUTHOR action N X,CTXT S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),X=$P(CTXT,";",4),X=$$AUTHOR^ORCHANGE(X) S:X $P(CTXT,";",1,5)=";;4;"_X_";",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
ORCHANGE NOTES DATES action N OK,CTXT S OK=1 D RANGE^ORCHANGE S:OK CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),$P(CTXT,";",3,5)="5;;",$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
ORCM ASSIGN MENU action D ASSIGN^ORCMEDT5
ORC CWAD DISPLAY extended action
ORC PATIENT INQUIRY action Patient profile for use as a hidden action within CPRS. N ORTAB S ORNMBR=1,ORTAB="PTINQ" D EN^VALM("OR DETAILED DISPLAY") S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC DELAY ACTIONS menu S VALMBCK="",XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR):'$G(OREBUILD) K ORNMBR,OREBUILD
ORC DELAY ORDERS MENU menu
ORC REWRITE ORDERS action D REWRITE^ORCACT D EX^ORCACT
ORCHANGE REPORTS menu
ORC CONSULT USER MENU menu
ORC PRINT CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("PRNT")
ORC CONSULT SERVICE MENU menu
ORC RECEIVE CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("REC")
ORC DISCONTINUE CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("DC")
ORC DENY CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("DENY")
ORC REROUTE CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("RR")
ORC COMPLETE CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("COMP")
ORC FORWARD CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("FWD")
ORC COMMENT CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("CMMT")
ORCHANGE CONSULTS menu
ORCHANGE CONSULTS SERVICE action D CS^ORCHANGE
ORCHANGE STATUS action D STS^ORCHANG2
ORC NEW SIGN ALL action D SIGNALL^ORCMENU2
ORC EXIT action S VALMBCK="Q",OREXIT=1
ORC CONSULT MAKE ADDENDUM action D EN1^ORCONSLT("ADDEND")
ORC CLOSE CHART action S VALMBCK="Q"
ORC ADD GMRC menu S (XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D NWHELP^ORCDGMRC",VALMBCK="" S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC ADD INPT MED action N X,OREVENT S ORDIALOG="PSJ OR PAT OE",X=$$DELAY^ORCACT Q:X="^" S OREVENT=$S(X:$$PTEVENT^OREVNT(+ORVP),1:"") Q:OREVENT="^" D NW^ORCMED
ORC ADD OUTPT MED action N X,OREVENT S ORDIALOG="PSO OERR",X=$S($G(ORWARD):$$DELAY^ORCACT,1:"") Q:X="^" S OREVENT=$S(X:$$PTEVENT^OREVNT(+ORVP),1:"") Q:OREVENT="^" D NW^ORCMED
ORCHANGE SAVE VIEW action D SAVE^ORCHANGE
ORC ADD ALL ITEMS action D ALL^ORCMENU
ORC VERIFY PROBLEM action D VERIFY^ORCPROB D EX^ORCPROB
ORC REFILL MEDS action D REFILLS^ORCMED S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORCHANGE REMOVE VIEW action D REMOVE^ORCHANGE
PSO LM PAT INFO MENU menu
PSO DETAILED ALLERGY/ADR LIST action D EN^PSOLMDA D EXIT^PSOLMDA
PSO PATIENT RECORD UPDATE action S DFN=PSODFN D EN^PSOLMPAT W ""
PSO SHOW PROFILE action D EN^PSOLMPF D EXIT^PSOLMPF
PSO LM DISCONTINUE action S (PSOCANRA,PSOCANRP)=1 D DC^PSOORFI2 D KCAN^PSOCAN3 W ""
PSO HOLD action S PSOHD=1,(DA,PPL,PSDA)=$P(PSOLST($P(PSLST,",",ORD)),"^",2) D HLD^PSOHLD K PSONOOR,PSOHD,COM,DA,PPL,PSDA W ""
PSO UNHOLD action S (DA,PPL,PSDA)=$P(PSOLST($P(PSLST,",",ORD)),"^",2) D UHLD^PSOHLD K COM,DA,PPL,PSDA W ""
PSO PARTIAL action D ^PSORXPA1 W ""
PSO REFILL action S PSOFROM="REFILL" D OERR^PSOREF W ""
PSO RENEW action N VALMCNT S PSOFROM="NEW" D OERR^PSORENW W ""
PSO REPRINT action S POERR=1 D BCK^PSORXRPT K POERR
PSO VERIFY action N PSODFN D OERR^PSOVER W ""
PSO NEW ORDER action N VALMCNT S PSOFROM="NEW" D OERR^PSONEW W ""
PSO LM BACKDOOR SELECT ORDER action D SEL^PSOORNE2 D BLD^PSOORUT1,RV^PSOORFL
PSO PATIENT INFORMATION action D EN^PSOLMPI W ""
PSO LM BYPASS action S VALMBCK="" D BYPASS^PSOLMUTL
PSO LM FINISH action D ACP^PSOORNEW W ""
PSO LM EDIT action D EDT^PSOORNEW
PSO EDIT ALLERGY/ADR DATA action D NEWALL^PSOLMUTL(PSODFN) W ""
PSO PROFILE MENU menu
PSO ALLERGY/ADR LIST MENU menu
PSO PENDING ORDER MENU menu
PSO ACTIVE ORDER MENU menu
PSO LM BACKDOOR COPY action D ^PSOORCPY
PSO ACTIVITY LOGS action D ^PSOORAL1
PSO LM ACCEPT menu
PSO LM ACCEPT ORDER action G ACP^PSOORNEW
PSO LM CONTINUE action S Y=1
PSO LM MEDICATION PROFILE menu D PENTRY^PSOLMAO
PSO LM BACKDOOR MENU menu
PSO LM BACKDOOR EDIT action D EDT^PSOORNE1
PSO LM BACKDOOR ACCEPT action D ACP^PSOORNE1
PSO LM SELECT MENU menu
PSO EDIT ORDERS action D SEL^PSOOREDT
PSO RELEASE action D OERR^PSODISPS
PSO LM RENEW EDIT action D EDT^PSOORNE4
PSO LM RENEW ACCEPT action D ACP^PSOORNE4 S VALMBCK="Q"
PSO LM RENEW MENU menu S PSOLM=1 K PSOLM
PSO ACTIVITY LOG MENU menu
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This hidden menu is attached to the the active order list.
PSO SELECT ALLERGY action D SEL^PSOORDA
PSO LM NEW SELECT ORDER action D NEWSEL^PSOLMUTL D BLD^PSOORUT1,RV^PSOORFL
PSO LM EDIT SELECT ORDER action D EDTSEL^PSOLMUTL
PSO LM NEW EDIT action D EDTNEW^PSOLMUTL
PSO LM RNEW EDIT action D EDTRNEW^PSOLMUTL
PSO LM PENDING EDIT action G EDTPEN^PSOLMUTL
PSO SPEED RENEW action D ^PSORENW4
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS #2 menu This hidden menu is attached to the OP medication profile.
PSO SPEED CANCEL action D ^PSOCAN4
PSO SPEED RELEASE action D ^PSODISP3
PSO SPEED REPRINT action D ^PSORXRP1
PSO HLSERV event driver This protocol is necessary for transmission of orders to the automatic dispensing machine using HL7 formatted messages.
PSO PENDING RENEW ORDER MENU menu
PSO SPEED REFILL action D SPEED^PSOREF
PSO LM EXIT action S PSOQUIT=1
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS #3 menu This hidden action is attached to the finish orders from CPRS screen.
PSO SPEED PULL SUSPENSE action D ^PSOSUPOE
PSO PULL ONE RX FROM SUSPENSE action D SELONE^PSOSUPOE
PSO HLSERVER1 event driver This protocol is necessary for transmission of orders to the automatic dispensing machine using HL7 formatted messages.
PSO HLCLIENT1 subscriber This protocol facilitates the transfer of HL7 formatted messages between Outpatient Pharmacy and any automatic dispensing machine.
PSO LM EXIT2 action S PSOQUIT=1
PSO LM INPATIENT MEDICATION PROFILE action I $T(ENOR^PSJPR)]"" D FULL^VALM1,ENOR^PSJPR(PSODFN):'$G(PSOBEDT) S VALMBCK="R"
PSO LM SELECT ALLERGY action D SELAL^PSOLMUTL
PSO ENTER PROGRESS NOTES action D PRONTE^PSOORUT3
PSO LM PRINT MED INFO action D PRMI^PSOHELP Q
PSO LM HIDDEN OTHER menu S VALMBCK="R"
PSO LM PROFILE PRINT MED INFO action D PRMID^PSOHELP S VALMBCK="R"
PSO LM HIDDEN OTHER #2 menu S VALMBCK="R"
PSO LM DISPLAY ORDER STATUS action D DPLYOR^PSOORUT3
PSO LM ACTION PROFILE action D FULL^VALM1 S DFN=PSODFN D LM^PSOSD1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM DC action Allows the user to discontinue IV, UD, or pending orders for a patient. D DC^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD)
PSJ LM PENDING ACTION menu
PSJU LM ACTIONS MENU menu
PSJ LM PATIENT INFO action D BRFALL^PSJLMUTL(DFN) W ""
PSJ LM PATIENT DATA action Allows the user to add/edit INPATIENT NARRATIVE and UD DEFAULT STOP DATE/TIME. D UPR^PSJLMUTL(DFN) S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM SELECT ORDER action K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) D SELECT^PSJOE D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
PSJ LM NEW ORDER action Allows the user to enter a new order for the selected patient without seeing a medication profile. K PSJSTARI,^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) D HOLDHDR^PSJOE K PSJLK S X=DFN_";DPT(" D LK^ORX2 S PSJLK=Y I Y D LMNEW^PSJOE0(DFN,PSJPROT) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) I PSJLK S X=DFN_";DPT(" D ULK^ORX2 S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ LM FINISH action Allows a user to finish IV, UD, or pending orders for a patient. S PSJINFIN=1 K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D CWARN^PSJBCMA6($G(DFN),$G(PSGORD)),OVRDISF^PSGSICH2($G(DFN),$G(PSGORD),3) D FINISH^PSGOEF K PSJINFIN,^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
PSJU LM ACCEPT action S PSJACEPT=1,VALMBCK="Q" I $G(PSJLMFIN) D:$D(^TMP("PSJINTER",$J)) STOREINT^PSGSICH1 S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ LM FINISH MENU menu S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJU LM EDIT action D EDIT^PSJOE(PSGP,PSJORD,1)
PSJ LM BYPASS action Allows the user to bypass the order and take no action. D BYPASS^PSGOEF S PSJLMQT=1
PSJ LM BRIEF PATIENT INFO MENU menu Displays a brief version of the patient's allergy information and allows the user access to update patient information, enter new orders, enter a pharmacy intervention, show a profile or display a detailed view of allergy information.
PSJ LM DETAILED ALLERGY action Allows the user to view a detailed allergy display for the selected patient. D EN^PSJLMDA D EXIT^PSJLMDA S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM SHOW PROFILE action Allows the user to choose to display a short, long, or no medication profile for the selected patient. K ^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),5),^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),6) D ENL^PSJO3 I "LSN"[PSJOL S PSJLMCON=1 S VALMBCK="Q" K ^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),5),^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),6)
PSJU LM RENEW action D:$$ASKDISP^PSGSICH1 OVRDISP^PSGSICH2($G(DFN),$G(PSJORD),3) D RENEW^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD) K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J)
PSJ LM HOLD action Allows a user to place an order on hold or take an order already on hold off of hold. D HOLD^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD)
PSJU LM ACTIVITY LOG action D ^PSJHVARS,LOG^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD) D RESTORE^PSJHVARS
PSJU LM COPY action Q:$$ACTCLIN^PSJAC(DFN,PSJORD) D COPY^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD) S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM ACCEPT MENU menu ;D:$D(PSGP)&($D(PSGORD)) INIT^PSJLMUDE(PSGP,PSGORD)
PSJI LM PENDING ACTION menu This menu allows user a set of actions to take on an IV pending order.
PSJI LM FINISH action This action allows the user to complete an IV pending order. S PSJINFIN=1 K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D OVRDISF^PSGSICH2($G(DFN),$G(PSJORD),2) D FINISH^PSJLIFN D SETIVINT^PSGSICH1 K PSJINFIN,^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
PSJI LM DISCONTINUE action This action allows the user to discontinue an IV order. D DC^PSJLIACT
PSJI LM EDIT action This action allows the user to make changes to an IV order. D ASKOVR^PSGOEE($G(Y(1)),$G(PSJORD),.PSJSTARI) D EDIT^PSJLIACT
PSJU LM ACCEPT EDIT action D EDIT^PSJOE1(1) S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM ACTIVE MENU menu This menu allows the user a set of actions to take on an active IV order.
PSJU LM VERIFY action D EN^PSGOEV(PSJORD) S VALMBCK="Q" D SETUDINT^PSGSICH1($G(PSJORD)) K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
PSJI PC RENEWAL action This action allows the user to renew an IV order. D:$$ASKDISP^PSGSICH1 OVRDISP^PSGSICH2($G(DFN),$G(PSJORD),3) D R^PSJLIACT D STOREINT^PSGSICH1 K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J)
PSJ PC IV LOG action This option allows the user to view the history, activity, label logs for an IV order. D L^PSJLIACT
PSJI PC HOLD action This option allows the user to put an IV order on/off hold if it has not been put on hold by CPRS. D H^PSJLIACT
PSJI PC ONCALL action This action allows the user to change the IV order's status to ONCALL. D O^PSJLIACT
PSJ SELECT ALLERGY action D SEL^PSJORDA
PSJ LM EDIT ALLERGY/ADR DATA action Allows the user to edit Allergy/ADR data for the selected patient. D NEWALL^PSJLMUTL(DFN) S VALMBCK="R" D INIT^PSJLMDA
PSJ LM DETAILED ALLERGY MENU menu
PSJI LM ACTIVITY LOG action This option allows the user to view the activity log on an IV order. S PSIVLOG=1 D ENPR^PSIVVW1 K PSIVLOG
PSJI LM LABEL LOG action This option allows the user to view the Label log for an IV order. S PSIVLAB=1 D ENPR^PSIVVW1 K PSIVLAB
PSJI LM LOG MENU menu This is the View Activity Log and View Label Log Menu when the IV Profile option is selected.
PSJ LM NEW SELECT ORDER action Allows the user to select the order from the profile by number. K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J),PSJSTARI D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) D NEWSEL^PSJOE D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
PSJ LM MAR MENU menu This menu allows the user a choice of different Medication Administration Reports. D ^PSJHVARS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM PROFILE MENU menu This menu gives access to the Inpatient Medications Profile, the IV Medications Profile, and the Unit Dose Medications Profile. D ^PSJHVARS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM RETURNS action This option allows the entry of returned, recycled, canceled, or destroyed items per day in IV room or satellite. N PSJLMPRO D FULL^VALM1,^PSIVRD S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM RET action This option allows a user to enter the units of returned medication (as when a patient is discharged) into the medication order record. Data entered is used in the cost reports. N VAIN,VADM K PSGEFN D FULL^VALM1,^PSGRET S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM RETURNS/DESTROYED MENU menu This menu allows the user access to the Report Returns (UD) option and the Returns/Destroyed Entry (IV) option. S PSJHIDFG=1 S VALMBCK="R" K PSJHIDFG
PSJU LM PLDP action Allows the user to enter the units actually dispensed into the cart for which the respective pick list was run. This option allows the user to select only those pick lists which have not already been filed away. From here, the user may then file the pick list away, a process that makes the data usable for the cost reports. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSGPLDP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM PLEUD action Allows a pharmacist to enter the number of any extra units dispensed for a Unit Dose order. Any data entered here is used by the cost reports. N VAIN,VADM K PSGEFN D FULL^VALM1,^PSGEUD S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM PL action The Pick List is used by pharmacy when filling medication carts. The list is sorted by administering team, ward, room-bed, and then patient. The site may define ward groups and generate the pick list by these groups to match site-specific filling practices. The pick list will calculate the units needed to be dispensed for selected patients' orders over a selected date range. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSGPL S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM PL MENU menu Contains various functions related to the Unit Dose pick list, mainly removing pick lists from the system. D ^PSJHVARS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM LABEL action Allows the user to print new unprinted labels and/or reprint the latest label for any order containing a label record. N VAIN,VADM K PSGEFN D FULL^VALM1,^PSGL S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM AL action Allows the user to align the label stock on a printer so that Unit Dose order information will print within the physical boundaries of the label. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,ENAL^PSGLBA S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM ALIGNMENT action This option allows the user to align the labels on whatever printer he/she is preparing to print. Three test labels will always print. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSIVXU Q:$D(XQUIT) D ^PSIVALN,ENIVKV^PSGSETU K I,Z,ZISI S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM LBLI action This option allows the printing of labels for a patient's order. The user may choose whether or not the labels are to be counted as daily usage. This is often used for on-call orders or those not automatically delivered without a written request. S PSJHIDFG=1 N PSJLMPRO D ^PSIVXU Q:$D(XQUIT) S PSIVAC="PROL",PSIVBR="D ENLBLI^PSIVLBL1" D FULL^VALM1,ENCHS^PSIV,ENIVKV^PSGSETU K J,N,J2,P17,PS,PSIVAC,PSIVBR,PSIVCT,PSIVNOL,PSIVNOW,TN,ZQ7 S VALMBCK="R" K PSJHIDFG
PSJI LM LBLS action This option prints labels for a particular scheduled manufacturing time. Usually a manufacturing list has been run prior to the printing of the labels. If this has been done, the labels will print immediately and in the same order as on the manufacturing list. The use of this option also causes workload counts in the IV STATS file. N VAIN,VADM D ^PSIVXU Q:$D(XQUIT) D FULL^VALM1,^PSIVLBL1,ENIVKV^PSGSETU K I1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM LBLR action This option allows the user to reprint IV labels which failed to print during the running of the Scheduled Labels (IV) option (PSJI LBLS). This option may not be used to reprint labels for dates and IV type which printing has not been attempted through the Scheduled Labels (IV) option. Labels prepared with this option will only be counted as usage if they were not added during the running of Scheduled Labels. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSIVRP K I1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM LABEL PRINT/REPRINT MENU menu Allows the user access to label options to print or reprint unit dose and IV labels, as well as the alignment options for each label type. D ^PSJHVARS N DRG S VALMBCK="R" D RESTORE^PSJHVARS
PSJ LM 24H MAR action This allows the user to print a selected patient's medication orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a 24 hour period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGMAR S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM 7D MAR action This allows the user to print a selected patient's medication orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a 7 day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. N VAIN,VADM S PSGMARDF=7 D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGMMAR S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM 14D MAR action This allows the user to print a selected patient's medication orders on a Medication Administration Record (MAR) for the charting of the administration of the orders over a 14 day period. It is designed to replace the manual Continuing Medication Record (CMR). This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. N VADM,VAIN S PSGMARDF=14 D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGMMAR S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM PAT PR action This allows the user to print Inpatient Medications orders for a selected patient. This protocol assumes that the patient has already been selected. N VAIN,VADM,PSJLM D FULL^VALM1,ENOR^PSJPR(PSGP) S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM PAT PR action This will allow a patient's IV profile to be sent to a printer. With each profile printed, a view of each order within the profile can also be printed. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. N VAIN,VADM,PSJLM D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSIVPR S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM PAT PR action This allows the user to print to any device a profile (list) of a patient's Unit Dose orders for the patient's current or last (if patient has been discharged) admission. If the user's terminal is selected as the printing device, this option will allow the user to select any of the printed orders to be shown in complete detail, including activity logs, if any. This protocol assumes that a patient has already been selected. N VADM,VAIN,PSJLM D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGPR S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM PNV JUMP action Used to allow user to skip to a specific patient in the list of pending/non- verified orders selected in PSJU VBW D FULL^VALM1,GOTOP^PSGVBWU
PSJ LM NEW ORDER FROM PROFILE action This is used to create new Inpatient Medication orders from the profile list. K PSJSTARI,^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) K PSJLK S X=DFN_";DPT(" D LK^ORX2 S PSJLK=Y I Y D LMNEW^PSJOE0(DFN,PSJPROT) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP)) I PSJLK S X=DFN_";DPT(" D ULK^ORX2 D INIT^PSJLMHED(PSJPROT) S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ LM OTHER PHARMACY OPTIONS menu D ^PSJHVARS N DRG D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This menu adds the ability of adding new orders and viewing brief patient information to the order view screen. S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM SPEED FINISH action This protocol will allow a user to finish multiple orders for a patient which are in a pending renewal status without all the usual prompts. D ^PSJHVARS D EN^PSGOESF D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJU LM SPEED RENEW action This protocol will allow a user to renew multiple orders for a patient. D ^PSJHVARS D EN^PSGOERS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJU LM SPEED DISCONTINUE action This protocol will allow a user to discontinue multiple medication orders for a patient. D ^PSJHVARS D:'$G(PSJHIDFG) EN^PSGOECS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ PC IV ACCEPT action This option will accept and save the changes in the IV file. D STOREINT^PSGSICH1 D ACCEPT^PSJLIACT D SETIVINT^PSGSICH1 D SETIVINT^PSGSICH1 K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J),PSJSTARI
PSJ PC IV AC/EDIT ACTION menu This menu offers the user a choice of accepting or editing an IV order that is currently being worked on. Q:('$G(ON55)!($G(ON55)["P")) N X S X=$G(^PS(55,DFN,"IV",+ON55,0)) I $P(X,U,2)="",($P(X,U,3)="") D DEL55^PSIVORE2
PSJ LM OE MENU menu K PSGEFN W ""
PSJU LM HIDDEN UD ACTIONS menu S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM PHARMACY INTERVENTION MENU menu PSJ RPHARM This is the main menu for the Pharmacy Intervention options. S VALMBCK="R"
ORB BLANK LINE5 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
PSJ LM INTERVENTION NEW ENTRY action This option is used to enter an entry into the APSP INTERVENTION file (#32.4). D FULL^VALM1 F I=0:0 S DIC(0)="QEAML",DLAYGO=9009032.4,DIC="^APSPQA(32.4,",DIADD="" D ^DIC K DA,DR,DIADD K:Y=-1 X,DIC,DIADD,DA,DIE Q:Y=-1 S DA=+Y,DIE=DIC,DR="[PSO INTERVENTION NEW]" K DIC D ^DIE S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM INTERVENTION EDIT action This option is used to edit an already existing entry in the APSP INTERVENTION file (#32.4). D FULL^VALM1 F I=0:0 S DIC(0)="QEAM",DIC="^APSPQA(32.4,",DIC("A")="Select INTERVENTION:" D ^DIC K:Y=-1 X,DIC,DA,DIE Q:Y=-1 S DA=+Y,DIE=DIC,DR="[PSO INTERVENTION EDIT]" D ^DIE S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM INTERVENTION PRINTOUT action This option is used to obtain a captioned printout of Pharmacy Interventions for a certain date range. It will print out on normal width paper and can be queued to print at a later time. D FULL^VALM1 S L=0,DIC="^APSPQA(32.4,",FLDS="[PSO INTERVENTIONS]",BY="[PSO INTERVENTIONS]" D EN1^DIP K L,DIC,FLDS,BY,Y S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM INTERVENTION DELETE action This option is used to delete an intervention from the APSP INTERVENTION file (#32.4). You may only delete an intervention that was entered on the same day. D FULL^VALM1,^PSODELI S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM INTERVENTION VIEW action This option is used to display Pharmacy Interventions in a captioned format. You may view more than one intervention at a time. D FULL^VALM1 S PSOVWI("DIC")="^APSPQA(32.4," D ^PSOVWI S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM AP1 action Allows the user to print a profile of patients' active orders for review by the physician. Includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is included for new orders. N VADM,VAIN D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGAP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM AP2 action Allows the user to print a profile of patients' active orders for review by the physician. Includes places for the physician to mark each order and sign the profile. When possible, space is included for new orders. The user may choose to print all active orders or expiring orders only. N VADM,VAIN D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSGCAP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM EXTP action This report allows viewing all of the orders on file for a patient (not just since last discharge). All orders that have not been purged can be viewed, or a date entered to start searching forward from. N VAIN,VADM,P,PSJLM S PSJEXTP=1 D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSJPR K PSJEXTP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM PLRP action Allows the user to PRINT or REPRINT any PICK LIST previously run. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSGPLRP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU PLATCS action Allows the user to have the appropriate meds from a selected Pick List dispensed through the ATC machine. PLEASE NOTE that only those meds on the pick list that have the appropriate ATC data (canister # and mnemonic) will dispense through the ATC. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSGTAP S VALMBCK="R"
ORB BLANK LINE6 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
PSJU LM PLUP action Allows the pharmacy personnel to update a pick list that has already been run but not yet started, picking up the new orders, renewed orders, and orders that were being edited when the pick list was first run. This option allows the pharmacist to print only th updated orders, or the entire pick list, including the updated orders. N VAIN,VADM D FULL^VALM1,^PSGPLUP S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM MDWS action Allows the user to print the Medications Due Worksheet. The worksheet shows the patient's orders that are to be administered within a 24 hour period. N VAIN,VADM S PSGWD=PSJPWD D FULL^VALM1,ENLM^PSJMDWS S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM NEW SELECT ALLERGY action Allows the user to select allergy item by number. D NEWSEL^PSJORDA
PSJ LM IV SELECT ORDER action This option allows the user to select an IV order from the profile. K PSJSTARI D SELSO^PSIV S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ LM IV OE MENU menu This menu allows the user to take action on the IV order entry process. K PSGEFN
PSJ LM IV NEW SELECT ORDER action Allows a user to select an IV order for action by number. K PSJSTARI D SELNUM^PSIV
PSJ LM EDIT NEW action Allows a user to edit an order by selecting field numbers. The user does not have to select edit first. D EDIT^PSJOE(PSGP,PSJORD,0)
PSJU LM ACCEPT EDIT NEW action D EDIT^PSJOE1(0) S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM BPI HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This is the Hidden Menu that will be attached to the Patient Information list template. It includes the standard hidden menu item and some extra Inpatient Pharmacy Items felt to be beneficial to the user. S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM PROFILE HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This is the Hidden Menu that will be attached to the List Templates that show pharmacy order profiles. It includes most of the standard hidden items and some other items Inpatient Pharmacy felt would be beneficial to the user. S VALMBCK="R"
ORB BLANK LINE7 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
PSJ LM ORDER VIEW HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This is the Hidden Menu that will be attached to the Order View list templates. It includes most of the standard hidden menu items and some extra items Inpatient Pharmacy felt would be beneficial tothe user. S VALMBCK="R"
PSJU LM SPEED VERIFY action This protocol will allow a user to verify multiple orders for a patient. It will only speed verify orders that were created because of a renew. D ^PSJHVARS D EN^PSGOEVS D RESTORE^PSJHVARS S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ LM PRINT OUTPATIENT PROFILE action This protocol will call INPAT^PSOBUILD(DFN) to allow a patient's outpatient profile to be viewed while in the Inpatient Meds software. D INPAT^PSOBUILD(PSGP) S VALMBCK="R" H 1
PSJU LM MARK NOT GIVE action Protocol to mark a discontinued order as "Not to be given". D ^PSGOENG
PSJU LM MARK INCOMPLETE action This protocol will allow the user to mark a non-verified order as incomplete. D ^PSGOEI
GMRCACT ADD NEW ORDERS action Add a new order via CPRS. Note: An order entered with this action will not be seen by the service until the order is signed and released by CPRS. D SLCT1^ORQPT,EN^ORCMENU,AD^GMRCSLM1,HDR^GMRCSLM,INIT^GMRCSLM S VALMBCK="R" S:$D(^TMP("GMRC",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU") D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCACT DETAILED DISPLAY action Display consult details for order, audit log, and results D EN^GMRCSLDT,ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("H") D EXIT^GMRCSLDT,EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACT FORWARD action Forward order to another service D FR^GMRCAFRD("") S:$D(GMRCSS) GMRCDG=GMRCSS D:$D(GMRCDG) SERV1^GMRCASV D ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("HL") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACT PHARMACY PKG MENU protocol menu This is the menu of actions provided for Pharmacy package users which allows adding, discontinuing and completing of a Pharmacy consult order.
GMRC TRK MAIN PROTOCOL menu Consult Tracking List Manager Protocol. Top level protocol to list protocols for review by patient and service. K GMRCOER D ^GMRCMENU
ORB BLANK LINE8 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCACT TRK SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Used to select a new service to view consults/ requests. D SS^GMRCSLM S:$D(GMRCQUT) VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D AD^GMRCSLM1,INIT^GMRCSLM,HDR^GMRCSLM S VALMBCK="R" D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCACT TRK DATE CHANGE action Select a new date range for displaying consults. D ^GMRCSPD,SELEXIT^GMRCSLMA D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRC QC OUTSTANDING CONSULTS menu List Manager Protocol to print outstanding consults by service for QC purposes. In this option, ALL SERVICES is not allowed to be entered at the SERVICE: prompt.
GMRC OUTSTD CONSLTS SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Select a new service for displaying consults still pending resolution (all consults not discontinued or complete.) D FULL^VALM1,EN^GMRCSTLM Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="CP" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),INIT^GMRCPC,HDR^GMRCPC S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC QC CONSULTS/REQUESTS PENDING RESOLUTION menu List Manager Protocol: Gather QC data on number of consults still pending resolution. Gives statistics by status and service. D KILL^VALM10()
GMRC QC SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Select a new service to view QC results on how many consults/requests are pending resolution. D FULL^VALM1,EN^GMRCQCST Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D INIT^GMRCQC,HDR^GMRCQC S VALMCNT=$S(GMRCCT>30:GMRCCT,1:30),VALMBCK="R" S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC PRINT CONSULTS PROTOCOLS action List Manager Protocol: Used to collect protocol information from file 101 and print it out in a List Manager screen format. Part of the utilities provided with the Consults/Requests package. D EXIT^GMRCPP
GMRC PRINT ABBREVIATED CONSULT PROTOCOLS action List Manager Protocol: Prints abbreviated information about protocols found in File 101. Gives Protocol Name and Item Text only.
GMRC TRK PHARMACY TPN CONSULTS menu List Manager Protocol: Main Pharmacy protocol for listing consults/requests in list manager.
GMRCACT TRK PHARMACY SELECT PATIENT action List Manager Protocol: GMRC Consult/Request Tracking Protocol to select a new patient to list in the Pharmacy TPN Consults protocol. D EN^GMRCPX S VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D INIT^GMRCPX,HDR^GMRCPX S VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
ORB BLANK LINE9 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCACT TRK SELECT PATIENT action List Manager Protocol: Select a New Patient to view consult requests in List Manager. D SP^GMRCSLM S VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D CLEAN^VALM10,AD^GMRCSLM1,HDR^GMRCSLM,INIT^GMRCSLM Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCACT PRINT PHARMACY CONSULT FORM action List Manager Protocol: Prints Form 513 to a Printer. D PS^GMRCA1("") S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC TRK MEDICINE CONSULTS menu List Manager Protocol used by Consults/Request tracking to list and display all uncompleted protocols for Medicine Service. Q:$D(GMRCQUT)
GMRCACT TRK MEDICINE SELECT PATIENT action List Manager Protocol used by Consults/Request Tracking to select a new patient when viewing Medicine Patient consults. D SPEN^GMRCMCP S VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D INIT^GMRCMP,HDR^GMRCMP S VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCACT TRK MEDICINE SELECT PROCEDURE action List Manager Protocol for the Medicine Display for consults/request tracking. This protocol allows the user to select a new procedure when using the Medicine Option. No patient data is asked. Dates are asked D ENP^GMRCMCP,HDR^GMRCSLM,INIT^GMRCSLM S VALMBCK="R" D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCACTM ALERT SERVICE ACTIONS menu This protocol is used with the GMRC ALERT ACTIONS List manager template and is called when an alert is received by a service user who wishes to process the protocol from the alert menu. The consult displayed in the alert is shown, along with all of the actions necessary to process the protocol. D INIT^GMRCALRT S:$D(^TMP("GMRC",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
GMRCACT VIEW BY STATUS action Allows a user to specify the status of the Consults to be displayed. D EN^GMRCSTAT,ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("HL") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACT ADD PHARMACY CONSULT REQUEST action D SLCT1^ORQPT,EN^ORCMENU,AD^GMRCSLM1,INIT^GMRCSLM S VALMBCK="R" D:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) RESET^GMRCSLMV(GMRC("NMBR")) K:$D(GMRC("NMBR")) GMRC("NMBR")
GMRCPLACE - EKG LAB protocol This is one of the protocols for tracking where a consult is to be conducted. It is used in the 'Place of Consultation: ' prompt when a consult is ordered.
GMRC COMPLETE STATISTICS menu List Manager Protocol. Uses List Template 'GMRC COMPLETE STATS' List Manager template. This protocol is used to display Statistics pertaining to how long a service takes to complete a consult/request, from the time that the consult/request is accepted by the service to the time it is completed. Also gives Mean and Standard Deviation statistics. I broken out by Total Consults completed, Inpatient Consults Completed, and Outpatient Consults Completed. Q:$D(GMRCQUT)
ORB BLANK LINE10 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRC QC STATISTICS PRINT action List Manager protocol. Used to allow printing of the Completion Statistics to a printer. Is an item of the GMRC COMPLETE STATISICS protocol. D PRNT^GMRCSTU
GMRCACT EDIT CONSULT/REQUEST menu When a consult has been entered and submitted to a service, and that service has denied the request (for whatever reason), then this option allows the clinician to edit the consult to correct/add information needed by the requested service to evaluate and accept the consult. When the consult is edited, it may then be resubmitted to the consult service.
GMRCACT EDIT FIELD action This protocol calls the routine that will allow specific fields of a consult to be edited. The call will ask for the field to be edited, and then allow editing of that field. When editing is complete, the display is updated to show the edited fields and the user is returned to the main menu. D FULL^VALM1,EDITFLD^GMRCEDT4(GMRCDA) S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCACT RESUBMIT DENIED CONSULT action This protocol will allow a consult/request to be resubmitted as a pending consult/request after it has been denied by the service. D EN^GMRCEDT2(GMRCDA) S VALMBCK="Q" S:'$D(GMRCDA) GMRCDA=GMRCDAP
GMRC SELECT ITEM action This protocol is used when a user of the consults package or interface selects a consult record. When the record is entered (by number), it is highlighted in inverse video. The user can then choose an action for the item (i.e., DC a consult, Receive a consult, etc.). D SET^GMRCSLMV(+$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2)) S:$D(^TMP("GMRC",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU") Q
GMRC MGR ACTIONS menu This protocol contains specialized actions that an ADPAC or manager of the consult/request package can take to remedy various situations that arise in day-to-day usage of the consults package. The menu for these actions should only be given to the consults ADPAC or similar manager since these actions can cause trouble for the consults package if anyone is allowed to use them. D EXIT^GMRCMGR
GMRCACT MAKE ADDENDUM action Make an addendum to the Result of the Consult in TIU. D ADDEND^GMRCTIU(""),ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("LH") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACTM ALERT BASIC ACTIONS menu This protocol is used with the GMRC ALERT ACTIONS List Manager template and is called as the default protocol menu, unless the user has service update capabilities. Then this protocol menu will be replaced (hijacked) by the GMRCACTM ALERT SERVICE ACTIONS protocol menu.
GMRCACTM CHANGE VIEW menu This is the menu of selection criteria for consults (date range, service, or status). D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCB BLANK LINE action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCB BLANK LINE 1 action Displays a blank line. (3 spaces in Item Text) Used for white space.
ORC NEW LOCATION action D CHANGE^ORCMENU1 D EX^ORCMENU2
ORCB DELETE ALERT action D DELETE^ORCB
ORC VERIFY CHART REVIEW action D VERIFY^ORCACT1("R") D EX^ORCACT
ORC VERIFY MENU menu W ! S VALMBCK=""
ORCHANGE PROBLEM COMMENTS action N CTXT,X S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),X=$P(CTXT,";",4),$P(CTXT,";",4)='X,$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
PSO CANCEL action D OERR^PSOCAN3
ORC SIGNIFICANT FINDINGS action D EN1^ORCONSLT("SIGF")
PXRM EXCH MENU menu This is the main menu for the Clinical Reminder Exchange Utility. D PEXIT^PXRMEXLM
PXRM LIST REMINDERS action This protocol builds a list of all the reminders defined at a site. D LRDEF^PXRMEXLM
PXRM EXCH QUIT action This protocol provides the actions for the quit option on the main Reminder Exchange screen. D EXIT^PXRMEXLM
VAFC MFU-TFL SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send and receive Master File update messages for a given patient. This is part of the CIRN project. Data is stored in PIMS.
VAFC MFU-TFL CLIENT subscriber This client is used to process the Treating Facility Master File update message. No acknowledgements will be generated from these actions.
VAFC TFL-UPDATE CLIENT subscriber This client protocol catches the local ADT message to update the Treating Facility file at this site and to send the message to the owner site.
VAFC EXCPT SUM ACTS MENU menu This protocol is the main menu for the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] summary screen.
VAFC EXCPT SUM SITE action This protocol sorts the exceptions by site in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. S VAFCSORT="SS" D SACT^VAFCEHLM
VAFC EXCPT SUM NEW action This protocol sorts the exceptions by newest event in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. S VAFCSORT="SN" D SACT^VAFCEHLM
VAFC EXCPT SUM PAT action This protocol sorts the exceptions by patient in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. S VAFCSORT="SP" D SACT^VAFCEHLM
VAFC EXCPT SUM OLD action This protocol sorts the exceptions by oldest event in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. S VAFCSORT="SO" D SACT^VAFCEHLM
VAFC EXCPT SUM REV FULL action This protocol allows the user to process a selected patient from the summary screen in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D FULL^VAFCEHLM
VAFC EXCPT MERGE MENU menu This protocol is the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option merge menu.
VAFC EXCPT MERGE ALL action This protocol allows the user to merge all differences for a selected patient in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D MRGALL^VAFCMGA
VAFC EXCPT MERGE SELECTED action This protocol allows the user to choose selected fields so that they will merge in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D MRGSLCT^VAFCMGA
VAFC EXCPT MERGE REJECT action This protocol allows the user to reject differences for a selected patient so that they will not merge. This is done using the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D REJECT^VAFCMGA
VAFC EXCPT MERGE COMPLETE action This protocol allows the user to verify that the merge is complete for a selected patient in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D COMPLETE^VAFCMGA
VAFC ADT-A28 SERVER event driver This server protocol fires when a patient is added to the Master Patient Index (MPI) as a new patient. It generates a Health Level Seven (HL7) "Add Person Information" (event code A28) message.
VAFC EXCPT HINQ INQUIRY action This protocol allows the user to do a HINQ inquiry for a selected patient in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D HI^VAFCMGA
VAFC EXCPT PATIENT AUDIT action This protocol allows the user to audit the differences made in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D RAUD^VAFCMGA1
VAFC EXCPT MERGE UNDO action This protocol allows the user to undo selected merges in the Clinical Information Resource Network (CIRN) Patient Data Review [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER] option. D UNDO^VAFCMGA1
ORCM DISABLE action D FULL^VALM1,DISABLE^ORCMEDT5 S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST A08 SERVER event driver HL7 A08 SERVER PROTOCOL
DGMST A08 SEND CLIENT subscriber HL7 Client protocol for the sending of MST HL7 A08 messages
DGMST PATIENT ENTER action Calls the entry point to enter one/many patient MST status entries. D PAT^DGMSTL1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST ENTER BY STATUS action Call the enter single MST status for multiple patients. D STAT^DGMSTL1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST EDIT ENTRY action Pick and edit a specific entry from the currently displayed MST list D EL^DGMSTL1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST DELETE ENTRY action Select and delete a specific entry from the currently displayed MST status list. D DL^DGMSTL1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST DISPLAY PATIENT action Display the current MST history for a selected patient. This is a patient who is not in the currently displayed MST status list. A patient name will need to be entered. D DP^DGMSTL1
DGMST EXPAND ENTRY action Expands and prints the MST status history for a patient selected from the currently displayed MST status list. D EXPND^DGMSTL S VALMBCK="R"
DGMST MAIN MENU menu Main protocol menu for the DGMST List Manager Interface
ORU REVIEW DELAYED ORDERS action This option may be used to review delayed orders at the time a patient is being admitted, discharged, or transferred. D:$G(DFN) EN1^ORCACT3(DFN)
RG ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol processes Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) register a patient (event code A04) Health Level Seven (HL7) messages. This protocol also reroutes the messages to the CIRN Master Of Record (CMOR) and from the CMOR to all other subscribers.
RG ADT-A08 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol processes Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) update patient information (event code A08) Health Level Seven (HL7) messages. This protocol also reroutes the messages to the CIRN Master Of Record (CMOR) and from the CMOR to all other subscribers.
RG PT SUBSCRIPTION REQUEST event driver This server protocol creates a Master Files Notification (MFN) message that contains information for the request to become a subscriber to a certain patient's data.
RG PT SUBSCRIPTION RECEIVER subscriber This client protocol is used to process subscription control Master Files Notification messages. The protocol is also used to reroute the message from the CIRN Master Of Record (CMOR) to all other subscribers of the identified patient.
MPIF TEST subscriber
MPIF ICN-Q02 SERVER event driver
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY MENU menu
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY (SELECT PATIENT) action D SELECT^MPIFQ1
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY (ADD PATIENT) action D ADD^MPIFQ1
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY (HELP) action Help for List Manager screen actions during Single Patient Initialization to MPI option. D HELP^MPIFQ1
MPIF CMOR COMPARISON CLIENT subscriber This client will make the CMOR request for change. This task used by the COMPARISON options. This should not be used for seeding the MPI with new patient/s.
MPIF CMOR COMPARISON SERVER event driver This process will take all the patients that your site is not the CMOR for and send the CMOR Activity Score to the CMOR for comparison. If the score from your site, for that patient, is greater and the difference is more than 80% the CMOR will automatically be changed to your site. This process should run after the MPI initialization has been completed.
MPIF CMOR RESULT SERVER event driver This is the server protocol for the Change of CMOR Requests.
MPIF CMOR RESULT CLIENT subscriber This is the client protocol for the change of CMOR request.
MPIF CMOR REQUEST event driver
MPIF CMOR RESPONSE subscriber
MPIF A28 REQUEST event driver
MPIF A28 RESPONSE subscriber
MPIF A29 SERVER event driver Inactivates ICN at the MPI and removes the CIRN/MPI fields populated when ICN is added to Patient file.
MPIF A29 subscriber Subscriber for the Inactivate ICN protocol
MPIF A30 subscriber Merges ICN at the MPI and all subscriber sites.
MPIF A30 SERVER event driver
GMRCACT NEXT SCREEN extended action S XQORM("A")="Select Action: "
GMRCACT PREVIOUS SCREEN extended action
GMRCACT QUIT action S VALMBCK="Q",GMRCQUT=1
GMRCACT REDISPLAY extended action
GMRCACT SIGNIFICANT FINDINGS action Update the significant findings flag for a consult. D SF^GMRCASF(""),ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("LH") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACT RESET MENU action S:$D(^TMP("GMRC",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
GMRCACTM HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
GMRCACT FIRST SCREEN extended action
GMRCACT LAST SCREEN extended action
GMRCACTM DISPLAY ACTIONS menu Menu of display actions which users can use to process through the display.
GMRCB BLANK LINE1 action Displays a blank line. (Item Text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCB BLANK LINE2 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCACT GOTO PAGE extended action
GMRCACT UP ONE LINE extended action
GMRCACT DOWN A LINE extended action
GMRCACT SEARCH LIST extended action
GMRCACT PRINT SCREEN extended action
GMRCACT CWAD DISPLAY extended action D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCACT PRINT LIST extended action
GMRCB BLANK LINE3 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCB BLANK LINE4 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
GMRCB BLANK LINE5 action Displays a blank line. (Item Text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
PXRM PATIENT DATA CHANGE action This protocol is to be called by other protocol event points whenever patient data, that can effect clinical reminder evaluation, has changed. D DATACHG^PXRMPINF
ORCHANGE NOTES SUBJECT action N CTXT,X S CTXT=$P($G(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0)),U,3),X=$P(CTXT,";",6),$P(CTXT,";",6)='X,$P(^TMP("OR",$J,ORTAB,0),U,3,4)=CTXT_U
IBCR SPECIAL GROUPS SCREEN action D EN^IBCRLL
IBCR SPECIAL GROUPS EDIT action D EDSG^IBCRLA1
IBCR SPECIAL GROUPS MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR REVENUE CODE LINK SCREEN action D ENRL^IBCRLA1
IBCR REVENUE CODE LINK EDIT action D EDRL^IBCRLA1
IBCR REVENUE CODE LINK MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR REVENUE CODE LINK CHANGE action D RLCLNK^IBCRLA1
IBCR PROVIDER DISCOUNT EDIT action D EDPD^IBCRLA1
IBCR PROVIDER DISCOUNT MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>3 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCR PROVIDER DISCOUNT SCREEN action D ENPD^IBCRLA1
ORC SIGN ALL ORDERS extended action
ORC SELECT ALL action D ALL^ORCB ;sets ORNMBR
ORC VERIFY ALL ORDERS extended action
RMPO EDIT PATIENT action D EN01^RMPOLM1
RMPO BILLING MENU menu
RMPO EDIT BILLING TRANSACTION action D EN02^RMPOLM1
RMPO ACCEPT BILLING action D EN03^RMPOLM1
RMPO UNACCEPT BILLING action D EN04^RMPOLM1
RMPO POST BILLING action D EN07^RMPOLM1
RMPO DISPLAY 2319 action D EN06^RMPOLM1
OR GUA DC GENERIC ORDERS action This protocol will discontinue all generic orders for a patient when the patient is discharged. The protocol should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. It will check to see if the movement is a discharge and then discontinue all generic orders (orders created by the Order Entry/Results Reporting package itself). The actual DC process is tasked, to reduce the wait for the person doing the discharge. Therefore, the order review screen may not immediately reflect the DC'd orders. Q:$G(DGPMT)'=3 D EN1^ORMEVNT
RMPO DELETE LETTER LIST ENTRY action D EN02^RMPOLG
RMPO LETTER MAIN menu
RMPO PRINT PATIENT LETTERS(1) action D ^RMPOLF0A
RMPO LETTER TYPE MAIN menu
RMPO MANAGE LETTER action D EN01^RMPOLY
RMPO EXIT LIST action S ^TMP($J,RMPOXITE,"EXIT")=1,QT=1
RMPO CLOSE BILLING action D SIGNOF^RMPOPST2
RMPO PRINT PATIENT LETTERS(2) action D EN02^RMPOLY
RMPO EXIT action Q
RMPO HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
OR GUA DC GENERIC ORDERS NOTASK action This protocol will discontinue all generic orders for a patient when the patient is discharged. The protocol should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. It will check to see if the movement is a discharge and then discontinue all generic orders (orders created by the Order Entry/Results Reporting package itself). The DC process is done interactively, which may sometimes result in a wait. If this protocol is placed before the ORU PATIENT MOVMT protocol in the item multiple of the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol, the review screen will reflect active orders AFTER the generic orders are DC'd. Q:$G(DGPMT)'=3 D EN^ORMEVNT
RMPO CHANGE VIEW action D EN08^RMPOLM1
RMPO QUIK EDIT action D EN09^RMPOLM1
RMPO ADD BILLING PATIENT action This protocol allows user to add a patient for billing. D EN10^RMPOLM1
RMPO PRINT ONE PATIENT LETTER action D ^RMPOLF0
RMPO ADD PATIENT TO LIST action D ADD^RMPOLG
RMPO DELETE BILLING PATIENT action This protocol allows user to delete patient from billing. D EN11^RMPOLM1
PCMM SEND SERVER FOR ADT-A08 event driver sending PCMM ADT-A08 messages primary care & TPA data
PCMM SEND CLIENT FOR ADT-A08 subscriber HL7 server protocol for sending PCMM ADT-A08 messages, which will contain primary care data used by the NPCD.
IVM SEND FINANCIAL QUERY action This protocol is executed from the [SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS] protocol as an item. It's purpose is to initiate a financial query for patients that require updated income information. D APPT^IVMCQ
DGMTH HARDSHIP MENU menu Contains the protocols for adding, editing, and deleting means test hardship determinations.
OR GUA DC GEN ORD ON TRANS action This protocol will discontinue all generic orders for a patient when the patient is transferred. The protocol should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. It will check to see if the movement is a transfer and then discontinue all generic orders (orders created by the Order Entry/Results Reporting package itself). The actual DC process is tasked, to reduce the wait for the person doing the transfer. Q:$G(DGPMT)'=2 D EN1^ORMEVNT
DGMTH ADD HARDSHIP action This protocol is for granting hardships. D ADD^DGMTHL1(.HARDSHIP)
DGMTH DELETE HARDSHIP action This protocol is for deleting a hardship. D DELETE^DGMTHL1(.HARDSHIP)
DGMTH EDIT HARDSHIP action Edits the existing hardship. D EDIT^DGMTHL1(.HARDSHIP)
DGMTH DATE STAMP action Updates the Dt/Tm Test Last Edited field of the means test. D DATETIME^DGMTU4($G(DGMTI))
IVM FINANCIAL QUERY FOR ADMISSION extended action This protocol is executed from the [DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS] protocol as an item. It's purpose is to initiate a financial query to HEC for admitted patients that require updated income information. Q:('$D(^UTILITY("DGPM",$J,1)))!($D(^UTILITY("DGPM",$J,3))) D QRYQUE^IVMCQ2(DFN)
DGMTH EDIT COMMENTS action This protocol allows the local site to edit the commments for the selected means test. D COMMENTS^DGMTHL1(.HARDSHIP)
ORS PROBLEM LIST action This protocol allows printing a chartable copy of the current patient's current Problem List. D VAF^GMPLUTL2(+ORVP)
RCDP ACCOUNT PROFILE MENU menu This option will show a profile of bills for an account.
RCDP ACCOUNT PROFILE SELECT NEW ACCOUNT action This option will allow the user to select a new account. D ACCOUNT^RCDPAPL1
RCDP ACCOUNT PROFILE BILL TRANSACTIONS action This option will show all transactions for a bill. D BILLTRAN^RCDPAPL1
OR GUA DC GEN ORD ON TRANS NOTASK action This protocol will discontinue all generic orders for a patient when the patient is transferred. The protocol should be set up as an item on the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol. It will check to see if the movement is a transfer and then discontinue all generic orders (orders created by the Order Entry/Results Reporting package itself). The DC process is done interactively, which may sometimes result in a wait. If this protocol is placed before the ORU PATIENT MOVMT protocol in the item multiple of the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol, the review screen will reflect active orders AFTER the generic orders are DC'd. Q:$G(DGPMT)'=2 D EN^ORMEVNT
RCDP ACCOUNT PROFILE SELECT STATUS action This option will allow the user to select statuses of bills to display. D SELSTAT^RCDPAPST
RCDP TRANSACTIONS LIST MENU menu This option will display all transactions associated with a bill.
RCDP TRANSACTIONS LIST TRANSACTION PROFILE action This option will show a transaction's profile. D TRANPROF^RCDPBTL1
RCDP TRANSACTION PROFILE MENU menu This option will display a transaction's profile.
RCDP BILL PROFILE MENU menu This option will display a bill's profile.
RCDP TRANSACTIONS LIST BILL PROFILE action This option will show a bill's profile. D BILLPROF^RCDPBTL1
RCDP ACCOUNT PROFILE BILL PROFILE action This option will display a bill's profile. D BILLPROF^RCDPAPL1
RCDP BILL PROFILE TRANSACTIONS action This option will list the transactions for a bill. D BILLTRAN^RCDPBPL1
RCDP BILL PROFILE NEW BILL action This option will allow you to select a new bill to display. D NEWBILL^RCDPBPL1
RCDP TRANSACTIONS LIST NEW BILL action This option will allow you to select a new bill to display. D NEWBILL^RCDPBTL1
RCDP TRANSACTION PROFILE SELECT NEW TRANSACTION action This option will allow you to select a new transaction. D NEWTRANS^RCDPTPLM
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE MENU menu This option will display a receipt's profile.
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE CANCEL TRANSACTION action This option will cancel a transaction for a receipt. D CANCTRAN^RCDPRPL1
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE ADD TRANSACTION action This option will add a payment transaction to a receipt. D ENTRTRAN^RCDPRPL1
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE EDIT TRANSACTION action This option will edit a payment transaction for a receipt. D EDITTRAN^RCDPRPL1
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE PRINT RECEIPT action This option will print a patient receipt. D PRINRECT^RCDPRPL2
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE EDIT RECEIPT action This option will allow editing of the receipt data such as deposit ticket. D EDITREC^RCDPRPL3
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE ACCOUNT PROFILE action This option will show the account profile. D ACCTPROF^RCDPRPL2
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE MOVE TRANSACTION action This option will move a payment from one receipt to another. D MOVETRAN^RCDPRPL1
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE MENU menu This option will display a deposit's profile.
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE EDIT DEPOSIT action This option will allow the user to edit the deposit ticket. D EDITDEP^RCDPDPL1
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE RECEIPT PROFILE action This option will jump to receipt profile listmanager screen. D RECEIPTS^RCDPDPL1
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE CUSTOMIZE action This option will allow the user to customize receipt processing. D CUSTOMIZ^RCDPRPL2
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE PROCESS RECEIPT action This option will process a receipt. D PROCESS^RCDPRPL3
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE CUSTOMIZE action This option will allow the user to customize the listmanager screen for deposits. D CUSTOMIZ^RCDPDPL1
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE ADD RECEIPT action This option will allow a new receipt to be added to the deposit. D ADDREC^RCDPDPL1
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE 215 REPORT action This option will print the 215 report for the receipt. D PRINT215^RCDPRPL2
RCDP DEPOSIT PROFILE CONFIRM DEPOSIT action This option will confirm a deposit. All receipts must be processed and accepted in FMS. D CONFIRM^RCDPDPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS MENU menu This protocol is the top level menu for linking accounts to payments.
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS SEARCH CHECK action This option will look for a specific check used for a payment. D CHKTRACE^RCDPLPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS SEARCH CREDIT action This option will search payments with matching credit card numbers. D FINDCRED^RCDPLPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS TO ACCOUNT action This option will link an unapplied payment to an account and process the payment in the Accounts Receivable package. D LINKPAY^RCDPLPL3
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS RECEIPT PROFILE action This option will jump to the receipt profile listmanager screen. D RECEIPT^RCDPLPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS ACCOUNT PROFILE action This option will jump to the Account Profile listmanager screen. D ACCOUNT^RCDPLPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS CLEAR SUSPENSE action This option will allow you to enter the FMS Document ID Number used to clear the payment from suspense in FMS. D CLEARSUS^RCDPLPL1
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS SUSPENSE REPORT action This option will allow you to print a report showing the payments processed to suspense and the associated FMS Document ID Number used to clear the payment from suspense in FMS. D REPORT^RCDPLPS1
RCDP FAST EXIT action This option will allow the user to exit back to the menu from any of the deposit management listmanager screens. D FASTEXIT^RCDPDPLM
RCDP LINK PAYMENTS SHOW PAYMENT action This option will show how a payment was applied to an account. D SHOWPAY^RCDPLPL2
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS PRINT action Protocol used by the Radiology/Nuclear Medicine HL7 Voice Reporting Errors List to Print entries D EN^RAHLEX1
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS MENU menu This Protocol is the MENU for the Rad/Nuc Med HL7 Voice Reporting Errors List
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS NEXT action This Protocol is for the Rad/Nuc Med HL7 Interface Exceptions List D NXTAPP^RAHLEX1(1)
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS PREVIOUS action This Protocol is for the Rad/Nuc Med HL7 Interface Exceptions List D NXTAPP^RAHLEX1(-1)
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS RESEND action This Protocol is for the Rad/Nuc Med HL7 Interface Exceptions List D RESEND^RAHLEX1
RA HL7 EXCEPTIONS DELETE action This Protocol is for the Rad/Nuc Med HL7 Interface Exceptions List D DELETE^RAHLEX1
RA PSCRIBE ORM subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA REG 2.3, RA EXAMINED 2.3, and RA CANCEL 2.3 event protocols. It is used by the VISTA HL7 package to send ORM messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple field of those event point protocols if this type of messaging scenerio is used at a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable HL7 message flow when exams are registered, cancelled and when they reach the status flagged as 'examined' by the site. Q Q
RA PSCRIBE ORU subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA RPT 2.3 event protocol. The HL7 package uses this protocol to send rad/nuc med report (ORU) messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple field of the RA RPT 2.3 protocol if this messaging scenario is used in a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable message flow when a rad/nuc med report is verified. Q Q
RA TALKLINK ORM subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA REG 2.3, RA EXAMINED 2.3, and RA CANCEL 2.3 event protocols. It is used by the VISTA HL7 package to send ORM messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple field of those event point protocols if this type of messaging scenerio is used at a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable HL7 message flow when exams are registered, cancelled, and when they reach the status flagged as 'examined' by the site. Q Q
RA TALKLINK ORU subscriber This protocol is used in conjunction with the RA RPT 2.3 event point protocol. The HL7 package uses this protocol to send rad/nuc med report (ORU) messages to TCP/IP recipients. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple field of the RA RPT 2.3 protocol if this messaging scenario is used in a facility. This is part of the file set-up to enable message flow when a rad/nuc med report is verified. Q Q
RA PSCRIBE TCP REPORT subscriber Subscriber protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process messages sent to VISTA from a COTS voice recognition unit using TCP/IP for message flow. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple of the RA PSCRIBE TCP SERVER RPT protocol. Q Q
RA PSCRIBE TCP SERVER RPT event driver Driver protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process radiology/nuclear med reports coming into VISTA from commercial voice recognition units using TCP/IP for message flow.
RA TALKLINK TCP REPORT subscriber Subscriber protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process messages sent to VISTA from a COTS voice recognition unit using TCP/IP for message flow. This protocol should be entered in the SUBSCRIBERS multiple of the RA TALKLINK TCP SERVER RPT protocol. Q Q
RA TALKLINK TCP SERVER RPT event driver Driver protocol for sending report to VISTA Radiology/Nuclear Medicine. This protocol is used by the HL7 package to process radiology/nuclear med reports coming into VISTA from commercial voice recognition units using TCP/IP for message flow.
RA RPT 2.3 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine report enters into a status of verified or Released/Not Verified. It executes code that creates an HL7 version 2.3 ORU message consisting of PID, OBR and OBX segments. The message contains relevant information about the report, including procedure, procedure modifiers, diagnostic code, interpreting physician, impression text and report text. Q
RA CANCEL 2.3 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is cancelled. It executes code that creates an HL7 version 2.3 ORM message consisting of PID, ORC, and OBX segments. The message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of cancellation, procedure modifiers, patient allergies and clinical history. Q
RA REG 2.3 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is registered. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM version 2.3 message consisting of PID, ORC, OBR, and OBX segments. The message containes all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. Q
RA EXAMINED 2.3 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam has reached a status where GENERATE EXAMINED HL7 MSG is Y at that (or at a lower) status. An HL7 version 2.3 ORM message will be generated that contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. Q
GMRCACTM NOTIF RECIP menu
GMRCU SELECT NOTIF SERV action D SELSS^GMRCNOTF,HDR^GMRCNOTF,INIT^GMRCNOTF S VALMBCK="R"
SCCV CONV FUNCTION MENU menu The main menu to examine/create conversion log entries I $G(SCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
SCCV CONV NEW TEMPLATE action This action is used to add a new conversion template entry (CST). D NEW^SCCVCST
SCCV CONV TEMPLATE DISPLAY action This action is used to display the template entry's details. D VIEW^SCCVCST
SCCV CONV REQ LOG action This action is used to list the log's request history. D PHIS^SCCVDSP1("R","CST")
SCCV CONV EXPAND menu Menu to allow history of request, event or error log to be displayed. I $G(SCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
SCCV CONV EVENT LOG action This action is used to list the log's event history. D PHIS^SCCVDSP1("E","CST")
SCCV CONV ERROR LOG action This action is used to list the log's error history. D PHIS^SCCVDSP1("ERR","CST") I $G(SCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
SCCV CONV EDIT action This action is used to display the template's details and edit if necessary. D EDIT^SCCVCST1($G(SCCVSCRN))
SCCV CONV REQUEST action This action is used to schedule the running or stopping of an CST event. D REQ^SCCVCST1(1,$G(SCCVSCRN),1)
SCCV CONV EXIT action Allows the user to exit the system without quitting through the hierarchy of screens, or the user can exit to the previous screen. D FASTEX^SCCVDSP
SCCV CONV ESTIMATE BULLETIN action This action is used to generate a copy of the estimate bulletin for a particular log entry. Only valid for 'ESTIMATE' events. D BULL^SCCVCST1 I $G(SCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
SCCV CONV PARAM MENU menu The main menu to display and edit Scheduling Conversion Parameters.
SCCV CONV EDIT PARAM action This action is used to edit the Scheduling parameters having to do with the Scheduling Conversion functionality. D EDIT^SCCVPAR
SCCV CONV CANCEL action This action is used to cancel a selected CST. D CANCEL^SCCVCST1
SCCV CONV DELETE FILE MENU menu The main menu to display and delete the old Scheduling files that the Scheduling conversion retired to non-use.
SCCV CONV DELETE FILES action This action is used to perform the actual data dictionary and template deletion for the old Scheduling files that are no longer used once the conversion is completed. This action does NOT delete the data global for the file. Use the xxx action to delete the data global. D DELDD^SCCVDEL
SCCV CONV DELETE FILE DISPLAY action This action is used to display the list of old/obsolete Scheduling files that can be deleted. D EN^SCCVDEL
SCCV CONV ONE ENTRY action This action is used to select a single entry (encounter, appointment, disposition, standalone add/edit) to convert without using a CST. D ONE^SCCVCST3
SCCV CONV PARAMETERS action This protocol displays the scheduling conversion related Site Parameters. It also allows the user to edit the appropriate conversion parameters. D PARAM^SCCVPAR I $G(SCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
SCCV CONV REFRESH action D REFRESH^SCCVCDSP
SCCV CONV ESTIMATE SUMMARY action D EN^SCCVEGD2
SCCV CONV DELETE DATA GLOBAL action This action is used to perform the actual data global deletion for the old Scheduling files that are no longer used once the conversion is completed. D DELDATA^SCCVDEL1
GMRC COMP STAT SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Select a new service for displaying consults Statistics pertaining to how long a service takes to complete a consult/request, from the time that the consult/request is accepted by the service to the time it is completed. D FULL^VALM1,EN^GMRCSTU,ODT^GMRCSTU,INIT^GMRCST,HDR^GMRCST S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC OUTSTD CONSLTS SELECT STATUS action List Manager Protocol: Select a list of statuses for displaying consults still pending resolution (all consults not discontinued or complete.) D NEWSTS^GMRCPC1 Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="CP" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),INIT^GMRCPC,HDR^GMRCPC S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC OUTSTD CONSLTS SELECT NUMBERED action List Manager Protocol: Togles on and off the display of the consult number in the report. D NUMBER^GMRCPC1 Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="CP" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),INIT^GMRCPC,HDR^GMRCPC S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC COLUMN WIDTH PRINT LIST extended action
GMRC COLUMN WIDTH MESSAGE action D PWIDTH^GMRCPC($G(GMRCCTRL))
GMRC COLUMN WIDTH HIDDEN MENU menu
LA7D CARELIFE RESULTS subscriber
LA7D CARELIFE SERVER event driver This server is used for sending ACK back to the MRTS account
RG EXCPT MAIN MENU menu This protocol serves as the main menu of exception handling options under the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING].
RG EXCPT SELECT action This protocol allows the user to select an exception for processing from the MPI/PD Exceptions screen in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D SELECT^RGEXHND1
RG EXCPT ACTION MENU menu This protocol serves as the action menu and allows several actions to be taken for a patient selected from the MPI/PD Exception Menu [RG EXCPT MAIN MENU]. This is activated through the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING].
RG EXCPT UPDATE STATUS action This protocol allows the user to update the exception status to PROCESSED from the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D UPD^RGEX03
RG EXCPT DISPLAY ONLY QUERY action This protocol allows the user to perform a Display Only Query to the MPI from the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D DISP^RGEX03
RG EXCPT EDIT PATIENT DATA action This protocol allows the user to edit patient data from the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D LOAD^RGEX03
RG EXCPT TYPE SORT action This protocol allows the user to sort exceptions by type in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. S RGSORT="ST" D SORT^RGEX01
RG EXCPT DATE SORT action This protocol allows the user to sort exceptions by date in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. S RGSORT="SD" D SORT^RGEX01
RG EXCPT PATIENT SORT action This protocol allows the user to sort exceptions by patient in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. S RGSORT="SN" D SORT^RGEX01
RG EXCPT SELECT TYPE action This protocol allows the user to select an exception type to view, all others will be filtered out, for exception processing from the MPI/PD Exceptions screen in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. S RGSORT="VT" D SORT^RGEX01
RG EXCPT PATIENT INQUIRY action This protocol allows the user to do a Patient Inquiry from the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D INQ^RGEX03
RG EXCPT PATIENT AUDIT action This protocol allows the user to audit the changes made in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D PA^RGEX03
RG EXCPT HINQ INQUIRY action This protocol allows the user to do a HINQ Inquiry for a selected patient in the MPI/PD Exception Handling option [RG EXCEPTION HANDLING]. D HI^RGEX03
GMRCACTM DEFAULT REASON menu
GMRCU SELECT DEF REASON SERV action This protocol allows the selection of a consult service for which to test the default reason for request. D SELSS^GMRCDRFR,HDR^GMRCDRFR,INIT^GMRCDRFR S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCU SELECT DEF REAS PATIENT action This protocol allows patient selection for testing the default reason for request. D SELPT^GMRCDRFR,HDR^GMRCDRFR,INIT^GMRCDRFR S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCACT SCHEDULED REQUEST action This action allows the request to be marked as scheduled. A comment may also be added to the request. There is NO linkage to the Scheduling software via this action. D RC^GMRCA1("",1),ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("L") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
ORC SCHEDULE CONSULT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("SCHED")
ORC REM MED RESULTS action D EN1^ORCONSLT("REMRSLT")
PXRM DIALOG DETAILS action Basic lists of dialog items. D BUILD^PXRMDLG(1) S VALMBG=1
PXRM DIALOG MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMDLG
PXRM DIALOG EXIT action D EXIT^PXRMDLG
PXRM DIALOG P/N TEXT action D BUILD^PXRMDLG(3)
PXRM DIALOG EDIT action D EDIT^PXRMDEDT("R",PXRMDIEN) D:$G(VALMBCK)'="Q" BUILD^PXRMDLG(PXRMMODE) S VALMBG=1
PXRM GENERAL EXIT action D EXIT^PXRMGEN
PXRM GENERAL INQUIRY action D INQUIRE^PXRMGEN
PXRM GENERAL EDIT action D EDIT^PXRMGEDT(PXRMGTYP,IEN,0)
PXRM GENERAL MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMGEN
PXRM SELECTION ITEM action This protocol is used by the list PXRM SELECTION. The protocol is set-up by the ENTRY action in this list. D SEL^PXRMSEL
ORB BLANK LINE action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
PXRM SELECTION PRINT ALL action D LIST^PXRMSEL
PXRM SELECTION MENU menu Menu protocol for list PXRM SELECTION. Allows selection or list all. Modified by INIT^PXRMSEL to include PXRM SELECTION ITEM also. D PEXIT^PXRMSEL
PXRM SELECTION EXIT action D EXIT^PXRMSEL
PXRM FINDING GENERAL MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMFPAR
PXRM SELECT RESOLUTION action This is protocol used by list PXRM FINDING PARAMETER LIST. The protocol is set up by the INIT action in this list. D SEL^PXRMFPAR
PXRM REMINDER DETAILS action This protocol displays a reminder inquiry, which is a listing of a complete reminder definition. D BUILD^PXRMDLG(3) S VALMBG=1
PXRM SELECTION ADD action D ADD^PXRMSEL S VALMBG=1
PXRM DIALOG COPY COMPONENT action D COPY^PXRMSEL S VALMBG=1,VALMBCK="R"
PXRM FINDING SELECTION MENU menu Menu protocol for list PXRM SELECTION for finding type parameters. Allows selection or list all. Modified by INIT^PXRMSEL to include PXRM SELECTION ITEM also. D PEXIT^PXRMGEN
PXRM DIALOG SELECTION MENU (DLGE) menu Special menu protocol for list PXRM SELECTION. Only used for dialog edit. D PEXIT^PXRMGEN
PXRM SELECTION VIEW (CV) action Used in dialog edit only. D CHNG^PXRMSEL S VALMBG=1
PXRM DIALOG EDIT INQUIRY action D INQ1^PXRMDLST S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM DIALOG SELECTION MENU (DLG) menu Menu protocol for list PXRM SELECTION. Allows selection, list all or change view. Modified by INIT^PXRMSEL to include PXRM SELECTION ITEM also. D PEXIT^PXRMSEL
PXRM DIALOG/REMINDER MENU menu Menu protocol for list PXRM SELECTION. Allows link reminder or quit. D PEXIT^PXRMSEL
PXRM SELECTION VIEW (AR) action Used in dialog link only. Reminders by name. D CHNGR^PXRMSEL("A")
PXRM SELECTION VIEW (LR) action Used in reminder link only. Linked reminders by name. D CHNGR^PXRMSEL("L")
PXRM SELECTION VIEW TOGGLE action Toggle between reminder name and print name. D CHNGV^PXRMSEL
PXRM DIALOG HISTORY menu D PEXIT^PXRMDLGH
PXRM DIALOG LINK action D RLINK^PXRMDLGZ(PXRMITEM) D INIT^PXRMDLGH
PXRM DIALOG SELECTION ITEM action This protocol is used by the list PXRM DIALOG LISTS. The protocol is set-up by the ENTRY action in this list. D SEL^PXRMDLG,BUILD^PXRMDLG(PXRMMODE)
PXRM DIALOG COPY action Copy current reminder dialog. D COPYS^PXRMSEL S VALMBG=1
PXRM DIALOG TEXT action D BUILD^PXRMDLG(2)
PRCO EDI PO DISPLAY action D PO^PRCOER4
VAFC EXCPT PATIENT INQUIRY action This protocol allows the user to do a Patient Inquiry from the Patient Data Review option [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER]. D INQ^VAFCEHLM
MPIF CMOR APPROVE/DISAPPROVE event driver Updating Request to change CMOR to approved or not approved.
MPIF CMOR APP/DIS subscriber Subscriber protocol for updating the status of the CMOR Request - approved or not approved.
SCMC LE PCMM TRANSMISSION ERRORS MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for PCMM HL7 Transmission Error Processing.
SCMC LE RETRANSMIT PATIENT action SCMC PCMM RETRANSMIT This protocol action permits a user to mark a patient on the list for retransmission. D RP^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE SORT LIST action This protocol action permits the user to sort the error list by Patient Name, Date Acknowledgement Received, or Provider Name. D SL^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE CHANGE STATUS action This protocol action permits the user to change the error processing status of the error list being viewed. It allows the user to select an error processing status of NEW, CHECKED, or BOTH. D CS^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE CHANGE DATE RANGE action This protocol action permits the user to change the date range of the error list being viewed. D CD^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE CHECK ERROR OFF LIST action This protocol action permits the user to check an error with an error processing status of 'NEW' off the list. D CE^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE RETRANSMIT ALL action SCMC PCMM RETRANSMIT This protocol action permits a user to mark all patients on the list for retransmission. D RA^SCMCHLR4
SCMC LE DESELECT PATIENT action This protocol action permits a user to Deselect Patient(s) for retransmission. D DP^SCMCHLR5
SCMC LE DESELECT ALL action This protocol action permits the user to Deselect ALL patients from retransmission. D DA^SCMCHLR5
SCMC LE UNCHECK ERROR action This protocol action permits the user to mark an error with an error processing status of 'Checked' back to an error processing status of 'New'. D UE^SCMCHLR5
RG ADT-A01 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol processes Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) update patient information (event code A01) Health Level Seven (HL7) messages. This protocol also re-routes the messages to the CIRN Master of Record (CMOR) and from the CMOR to all other subscribers.
RG ADT-A03 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol processes Admission, Discharge, and Transfer (ADT) update patient information (event code A03) Health Level Seven (HL7) messages. This protocol also re-routes the messages to the CIRN Master of Record (CMOR) and from the CMOR to all other subscribers.
RG ADT-A01 SERVER event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a patient is admitted through the Registration (PIMS) module. It executes code that creates an HL7 ADT message consisting of PID, EVN, PD1, and PV1 segments. The message contains all relevant information about the event, including patient name, event date/time, patient primary facility and patient class (inpatient or outpatient).
RG ADT-A03 SERVER event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a patient is discharged through the Registration (PIMS) module, or checked out of a clinic through the Scheduling (PIMS) module. It executes code that creates an HL7 ADT message consisting of PID, EVN, PD1, and PV1 segments. The message contains all relevant information about the event, including patient name, event date/time, patient primary facility and patient class (inpatient or outpatient).
XWB RPC SUBSCRIBER subscriber This RPC Broker protocol is one of two protocols used to facilitate invocation of Remote Procedure Calls on a remote server. The RPC Broker uses Vista HL7 as the vehicle to pass RPC name and parameters from local server to remote server. On the return path, Vista HL7 is also used to send results from the remote server back to the local server. This particular protocol represents the receiving system and as such information is used to generate the response HL7 message header(MSH segment) from this perspective.
XWB RPC EVENT event driver This RPC Broker protocol is one of two protocols used to facilitate invocation of Remote Procedure Calls on a remote server. The RPC Broker uses Vista HL7 as the vehicle to pass RPC name and parameters from local server to remote server. On the return path, Vista HL7 is also used to send results from the remote server back to the local server. This particular protocol represents the sending system and as such information is used to generate the HL7 message header(MSH segment) from this perspective.
DGRU INPATIENT CAPTURE extended action This protocol handles the ADT messaging for the RAI/MDS COTS database system. This protocol is attached to the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS protocol and is called when an inpatient ADT event occurs. D ^DGRUADT
DGRU-RAI-A01-SERVER event driver A01 message for the RAI/MDS commercial package
DGRU-RAI-A01-ROUTER subscriber ADT A01 event client for RAI/MDS commercial application
DGRU-RAI-A11-SERVER event driver
DGRU-RAI-A11-ROUTER subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A02-SERVER event driver Provides A02 transfer updates from corporate system to vendor RAI/MDS software and receives message acjnowledgements back.
DGRU-RAI-A03-SERVER event driver Provides A03 discharge updates from corporate system to vendor RAI/MDS software and receives message acknowledgements back from the vendor.
DGRU-RAI-A12-SERVER event driver Provides A12 cancel (delete) transfer updates from corporate system to vendor RAI/MDS software and accept message acknowledgements from vendor.
DGRU-RAI-A13-SERVER event driver Provides A13 cancel (Delete) discharge updates from corporate system to vendor RAI/MDS software and receives acknowledgements back from the vendor.
DGRU-RAI-A21-SERVER event driver Provides A21 leave of absence updates from the corporate system to the vendor RAI/MDS software and receives acknowledgements back from the vendor system.
DGRU-RAI-A22-SERVER event driver Provides A22 return from leave of absence updates from corporate system to vendor RAI/MDS software and receives acknowledgements back ffrom the vendor system.
DGRU-RAI-A08-SERVER event driver Provides A08 patient ADT updates from the corporate system to the vendor RAI/MDS software and receives asknowledgements back from the vendor.
DGRU-RAI-A02-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages from DGRU RAI Events
DGRU-RAI-A03-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-RAI-A12-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-RAI-A13-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-RAI-A21-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-RAI-A08-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-RAI-A22-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving messages for DGRU RAI events
DGRU-PATIENT-A08-ROUTER subscriber Protocol for receiving DGRU RAI update events
DGRU-PATIENT-A08-SERVER event driver Provides A08 patient demographic updates from the corporate system to the vendor RAI/MDS software and receives acknowledgement messages from the vendor software.
DGRU-RAI-MFU-SERVER event driver MFU message for the RAI/MDS commercial package
DGRU-RAI-MFU-ROUTER subscriber
DGRU RB MENU menu Main protocol menu for room bed translation LM interface.
DGRU ENTER ROOM-BED action D ADD^DGRURB S VALMBCK="R"
DGRU DEL ROOM-BED action Delete an existing DGRU room-bed translation value D DEL^DGRURB S VALMBCK="R"
IBAT PATIENT LIST MENU menu This menu is for the List Template 'IBAT PT TRANS LIST'. Q
IBAT CHANGE PATIENT action This would allow changing the currently selected patient to another. The user will also be prompted for date range with the current one as the default. D CP^IBATLM1B
IBAT ADD TRANSACTION action This protocol is used to manually add a Transfer Pricing transaction the the currently selected patient. D AT^IBATLM1B
IBAT CHANGE DATE RANGE action This would allow the user to change the date range for the currently selected patient for Transfer Pricing transactions. D CD^IBATLM1B
IBAT CANCEL TRANSACTION action This protocol is used to change the status of a Transfer Pricing transaction on the currently selected patient. D CT^IBATLM1B
IBAT ADD PATIENT action This protocol will allow you to add a patient to the Transfer Pricing Patient file. D AP^IBATLM0A
IBAT CHANGE STATUS action This protocol will allow you to change the status between active and inactive for a patient in the Transfer Pricing software. D CS^IBATLM0A
IBAT CHANGE VIEW action This will allow you to rebuild the listmanager list you currently have with different options. D CV^IBATLM0A
IBAT SELECT PATIENT action This will allow you to select a patient from the list. D SP^IBATLM0A
IBAT CHANGE FACILITY action This protocol will allow you to specify a different facility as the patient's preferred facility. D CF^IBATLM0A
IBAT FACILITY MENU menu This is the main protocol menu in the facility list manager screen. Q
IBAT EXPAND action This will show you more detailed information about a transaction. D EN^IBATLM2,ARRAY^IBATLM1A(VALMAR)
IBAT TRANS MENU menu This is the menu for the listmanager screen for transactions.
IBAT TRAN FAC EDIT action This will allow you to change the facility of a transaction. D FE^IBATLM2B
IBAT TRAN PRICE action This will allow you to edit the pricing information on a transaction. D PI^IBATLM2B
IBAT CHANGE PT FACILITY action This protocol will allow you to specify a different facility as the patient's preferred facility. D CF^IBATLM1B
IBAT QUIT action This will exit the Transfer Pricing listmanager screen. Q
IBAT CHANGE PT STATUS action This protocol will allow you to change the status between active and inactive for a patient in the Transfer Pricing software. D CS^IBATLM1B
IBAT PATIENT INQUIRY action This will show you detailed information about the patient. D EN^IBATLM3,ARRAY^IBATLM1A(VALMAR)
IBAT PT INQUIRY action This will show you detailed information about the patient. D PI^IBATLM0A
IBAT TP RX action This protocol is sibling of PS EVSEND OR and sends cost rx data to IB D EN^IBATEP
RMPR ELEC REQ menu
RMPR 2319 DISPLAY action D DIS^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP VIEW REQ action This will allow you to view the Suspense Request. D VIEW^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP VIEW 2319 action This will allow you to view the Patient 10-2319 Form. D VIEW23^RMPREO23
RMPR POST INIT ACTION action Function description To post an initial action note on a consult, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the following prompt: Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type PI to access the Post Initial Action option, and press 2 The next prompt displays: Enter a list or a range of numbers (shown in parenthesis) to select a suspense record. 3 Type the number for the record you want to post an initial action note, and press 4 At the next prompt, Edit? No//, type a Y for Yes to create a new note. 5 The text editor displays for you to type a free-text note. Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" key to save the data and exit out of the text editor. You will then return to continue processing suspense records. An initial action note can be posted on a suspense record. This signifies that some form of action has taken place. The status changes from OPEN to PENDING and will remain in this status until all action is completed. Steps D IACT^RMPREO23
RMPR POST OTHER NOTE action Function description To post an additional note to the suspense order, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type OT to access the Post Other Note option, and press 2 The next prompt displays: Enter a list or a range of numbers (shown in parenthesis) to select a suspense record. 3 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type a Y for Yes to edit the note on the suspense record. The text editor displays for you to type a free-text note 4 Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" key to exit out of the text editor, save the text, and return to continue processing suspense records. Using the Post Other Note (OT) option, an additional note can be posted on a request to signify that some action has taken place after the initial action. The status remains PENDING until the order is complete. Steps D OACT^RMPREO23
SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS extended action This extended action contains all the actions that need to be performed when an action is taken upon an appointment, such as checking in. D EN^SCDXHLDR
ORRP ALL action Display all orders for this patient S ORPRES="1;ALL ORDERS"
RMPR POST COMPLETE NOTE action Function description Steps To post a complete note, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type PC to access the Post Complete Note option, and press 2 The next prompt displays: Enter a list or a range of numbers (shown in parenthesis) to select a suspense record. 3 Type the number for the record you want to view, and press 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type a Y for Yes to edit the note on the suspense record. The text editor displays for you to type a free-text note, and the note will be complete with a status of CLOSED. 5 Press the Num Lock key and the "E" key to exit out of the text editor and return to continue processing suspense records. A complete note can be posted when all action has taken place for a request for a Prosthetic item or service. When a complete note is posted the status on the suspense record changes from PENDING (if action has previously taken place on the request) to CLOSED. D CACT^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP ADD MANUAL action Function description To add a manual suspense, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type AD, and press 2 At the PROSTHETIC SUSPENSE DATE RX WRITTEN, you can enter T for the current date or T - # (number of days the request was actually made), and press . 3 At the Requestor prompt, type the physician name, and press 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type Y for Yes to edit the note. 5 Type a free-text note in the text editor. 6 Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" keys simultaneously to exit the text editor. A manual suspense record can be added to Prosthetics for a request for an item or service. Steps D AMAN^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP EDIT MAN action Function description Description of item/services. Steps To edit a manual suspense, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen// prompt, type ED for the Edit Manual Suspense option, and press Note: If no changes are required, press at the // prompt to bypass the editing option. 2 Type a number (from the list shown) to select an order, and press 3 At the STATION: HINES, IL// prompt, press or change the station. 4 At the VETERAN prompt, press if the correct veteran name is shown or enter the correct name. This option is used to edit a manual Suspense record, not a 5 At the SUSPENSE FORM prompt, press to accept the default option. 6 At the REQUESTOR prompt, press to accept the requestor shown or enter the correct requestor. 7 At the DESCRIPTION OF ITEM/SERVICES: prompt, press to accept the description shown. 8 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type a Y for Yes to edit the description, and press 9 In the text editor, revise the information as needed. 10 When complete, press the "Num Lock" key + "E" key to exit out of CPRS electronic record for a patient. The following information for a the text editor, save the data, and return to the Suspense Processing list. suspense record can be edited: Station Veteran Suspense form Requestor D EMAN^RMPREO23
RMPR CHG PATIENT action D CHG^RMPREO23
RMPR RECEIVE action D EN^RMPRHL7A(.XQORMSG)
RMPR SUSP CANCEL action Function description Steps To cancel a request, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen// prompt, type CR for the Cancel Request option, and press 2 Select the record in the list to be canceled (indicated within parenthesis), and press 3 Enter the "Type" of the request or type two question marks to display the available options. 4 After selecting an option from the list, press and the suspense record will be deleted/canceled. Manually entered orders can be canceled through the Cancel Request (CR) option. Orders entered electronically (through CPRS) into Prosthetics can be denied or forwarded only. D CANCEL^RMPREO23
RMPR DISPLAY action Display CPRS Consult Request with all comments and notes. D DDISP^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP CON action Function description Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen// prompt, type PR for the Print Consult option, and press 2 Select the suspense record in the list to be printed (indicated within parenthesis), and press 3 At the Chart Copy (Y/N)? Y// prompt, type NO, and press . 4 At the DEVICE: HOME// prompt, press to print the consult. Print Consult (PR) is used to print a consult or view a consult on a terminal screen. Steps To print a consult, follow these steps: D PDISP^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP FORWARD action Function description Note: If an order is forwarded to Rehab for a patient to be evaluated, then the order may be resent to Prosthetics after that for a request for item(s) or service. Steps To forward a CPRS order, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen// prompt, type FW for the Forward Consult option, and press 2 Type a number (from the list shown) to select an order, and press 3 At the Consult Request Service prompt, enter the service where the consult will be forwarded. 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type YES to enter a free-text Completion Note. 5 In the text editor, revise the information as needed. 6 When complete, press the "Num Lock" key + "E" key to exit out of If an order is made through CPRS and sent electronically to Prosthetics, the text editor, save the data, and return to the Suspense Processing list. it can then be forwarded, but not cancelled. If an order is forwarded then a prompt to enter the service the order is being forwarded to will be invoked. The status changes from OPEN to CLOSED in the Suspense list when an order has been forwarded. D FORW^RMPREO23
RG FACILITY INTEGRATION SERVER event driver This is the server for the Facility Integration Message. It notifies other sites when there is a site integration that affects a particular patient.
RG FACILITY INTEGRATION CLIENT subscriber This is the client for the Facility Integration Message, which notifies sites that there has been a site integration which affects Clinical Information Resource Network - Patient Demographics and Master Patient Index (CIRN PD/MPI) for a particular patient.
VAFC EXCPT DISPLAY ONLY QUERY action This protocol permits the user to perform a Display Only Query to the MPI from the Patient Data Review option [VAFC EXCEPTION HANDLER]. D DISP^VAFCEHLM
ORQPT REMOVE PREFERENCE action D REMOVE^ORQPT1
ORQPT COMBINATION LIST action D COMBO^ORQPT1
TIU ACTION EXPAND LIST action Action EXPAND ENTRY permits users to expand notes to list any addenda or interdisciplinary children nested under the note. If the note is already expanded when the action is taken, the note is collapsed. D EXPAND^TIURA2 S VALMBCK="R"
RCBD PATIENT STATEMENT MENU menu
GMRCACT EDIT/RESUBMIT CONSULT action This protocol will allow the provider or update user to edit and resubmit a canceled consult. D EDTSUB^GMRCA1(""),ENTRY^GMRCSLMA("L") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
MCAR Device Server event driver This protocol is used by the HL7 package to send results to Vista from various clinical instrumentation.
MCAR Device Client subscriber Subscriber protocol for sending data to Vista from clinical instruments.
OR PATIENT ALERTS menu Display a patient's CPRS alerts and allow detailed display of alert recipients.
OR SELECT ALERTS action D SELECT^ORB3U1
PRCP SEND DIST ORDER action D BLDSEG^PRCPHLSO(ORDERDA)
PRCP EV QOH REQ event driver This event driver will send a request for quantrity on hand to the supply station.
PRCP SU QOH REQ subscriber This protocol will be used to accept acknowledgments to a QOH request from the supply stations.
PRCP EV ITEM UPDATE event driver This protocol will be used to send name and attribute updates to the supply station.
PRCP SU ITEM UPDATE subscriber
PRCP EV REL ORDER event driver This message will notify the supply station of released orders
PRCP SU REL ORDER subscriber
PRCP EV INV UPDATE event driver This message will be used whenever there has been something to affect the inventory in the supply station (excluding order refill activity).
PRCP SU INV UPDATE subscriber
PRCP EV REFILL/POST event driver this message will be used whenever the supply station sends a refill or post order transaction.
PRCP SU REFILL/POST subscriber
GMRCACTM MED RESULTING menu
GMRCACT SELECT MED RESULT action D SET^GMRCMED(+$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2)) S XQORM("HIJACK")=$O(^ORD(101,"B","GMRCACTM MED RESULTING",0))_"ORD(101,"
GMRCACT DISPLAY MED RESULT action D DISPRES^GMRCMED("") S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCACT DISASSOC MED RSLT action This protocol will allow a MEDICINE package result to be disassociated from the consult procedure request to which it is linked. D FULL^VALM1,EN1^GMRCDIS("") I $G(GMRCO) D REFRESH^GMRCDIS(GMRCO)
GMRCACTM DISASSOC MED RSLT menu This menu contains actions that me taken when disassociating a MEDICINE package result from a consult procedure request to which it is linked.
GMRCACT REMOVE MED RESULT action This protocol will allow display and selection of those Medicine package results associated with a consult procedure request and allow one or more results to be unlinked from the consult. D DIS^GMRCDIS("") D EXIT^GMRCSLMA("R")
GMRCU SELECT DEF REAS PROC action This protocol allows the selection of a procedure for which to test the default reason for request. D SELPROC^GMRCDRFR,HDR^GMRCDRFR,INIT^GMRCDRFR S VALMBCK="R"
VAFC EXCPT TF INQUIRY action This protocol displays Clinical Information Resource Network - Patient Demographics and Master Patient Index (CIRN PD/MPI) information for the selected patient. D PDAT^VAFCEHLM
PXRM DIALOG GROUP MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMDLG
TIU STATUS RETRACTED action The document has been signed, but may have been entered for the wrong patient. Reassignment to the correct patient has left the original document retracted in error.
TIU BROWSE ACTION DETAILED DISPLAY action Displays the all of the details concerning the selected document's history, including audit trail and reassignment history, in addition to the narrative body of the document. D EN^TIUAUDIT
TIU ACTION DISPLAY REASSIGN HX action Displays the reassignment history of selected documents for HIMS personnel. May be useful in tracing the origin and destination of documents that were initially entered in error. D DISPLAY^TIURHX
TIU ACTION ID NOTE action This action permits the user to add a new entry to an interdisciplinary interdisciplinary note, and the user is asked to select the note to attach it to. If an individual entry of an interdisciplinary note is selected, the option attempts to detach it from the interdisciplinary note. All of these actions are governed by business rules. The two business rule actions specific to ID notes are ATTACH TO ID NOTE, and ATTACH ID ENTRY. There is no business rule detach action. Those users who can ATTACH a note TO AN ID NOTE are permitted to detach the note once it is attached. note, attach a stand-alone note to an interdisciplinary note, or to detach an entry from an interdisciplinary note. Only one note at a time can be selected for this action. The action taken depends on the note selected. If an interdisciplinary note is selected, the option attempts to add a new entry to it. If a stand-alone note is selected, the option attempts to attach it to an S VALMBCK="R" D IDNOTE^TIUGR
TIU BROWSE ACTION ID NOTE action This option permits the user to add a new entry to an interdisciplinary to it. If the browsed note is an individual entry of an interdisciplinary note, the option attempts to detach the entry from the interdisciplinary note. note or to detach an entry from an interdisciplinary note. The other ID action, attaching a stand-alone note to an interdisciplinary note, may not be executed from the browse, it must be done from the review screen. The action taken depends on the note currently browsed. If the browsed note is an interdisciplinary note, the option attempts to add a new entry D IDNOTEB^TIUGR1(TIUDA)
TIU ACTION EXPAND LIST DUP action Action EXPAND ENTRY permits users to expand notes to list any addenda or interdisciplinary children nested under the note. If the note is already expanded when the action is taken, the note is collapsed. Duplicate of TIU ACTION EXPAND LIST. Created so users can use mnemonic EX, as well as mnemonic EE. D EXPAND^TIURA2 S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION MENU DISPLAY menu S XQORM(0)="AD",VALMBCK=""
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE ONLINE action This option will allow you to mark the CR document as being entered online. D ONLINE^RCDPRPL4
ORC CONSULT EDIT/RESUBMIT action D EN1^ORCONSLT("EDITRES")
RG ADT INPATIENT ENCOUNTER DRIVER extended action The addition of the RG ADT INPATIENT ENCOUNTER DRIVER protocol will allow tracking of patient admissions and discharges on the Registration (PIMS) side. This protocol builds HL7 messages that update the TREATING FACILITY LIST (#391.91) file, tracking the DATE LAST TREATED (#.03) and ADT/HL7 EVENT REASON (#.07) fields for a particular patient at a given facility. S RGDG101="" D EN^RGADT1 K RGDG101
RG ADT OUTPATIENT ENCOUNTER DRIVER extended action The addition of the RG ADT OUTPATIENT ENCOUNTER DRIVER protocol will allow the tracking of patient information during clinic checkout events initiated by the Scheduling (PIMS) module. This protocol builds HL7 messages that update the TREATING FACILITY LIST (#391.91) file, tracking the DATE LAST TREATED (#.03) and ADT/HL7 EVENT REASON (#.07) fields for a particular patient at a given facility. S RGSD101="" D EN^RGADT1 K RGSD101
EAS EZ 1010EZ APPLICATION menu
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW2 menu For 1010EZ Applications In Review.
EAS EZ ACCEPT FIELD action D ACCFLD^EASEZU3
EAS EZ ACCEPT ALL action D ACCALL^EASEZU3
EAS EZ CLEAR ALL action D CLEAR^EASEZU3
EAS EZ RESET TO NEW action D RESET^EASEZU3
EAS EZ PRINT 1010EZ action D PRT1010^EASEZU4
EAS EZ VERIFY SIGNATURE action D VERSIG^EASEZU4
EAS EZ FILE 1010EZ DATA action D FILE^EASEZU4
EAS EZ CLOSE/INACTIVATE 1010EZ action D CLOSE^EASEZU4
EAS EZ CONTINUE PROCESSING action D EXPND^EASEZL1
EAS EZ UPDATE FIELD action D UPDATE^EASEZU5
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW1 menu For 1010EZ Applications that are New (i.e., not yet linked to site PATIENT file).
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW3 menu For 1010EZ Applications that have been Printed from VistA.
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW4 menu For 1010EZ Applications that are Signed.
EAS EZ LINK TO FILE 2 action D LINK^EASEZU3
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW5 menu For 1010EZ Applications that are Filed.
PXCE SC PC Assign/Unassign action SC PCMM ROLL D FULL^VALM1 D:$G(DFN) PAT^SCMCQK D:'$G(DFN) EN^SCMCQK K VALMHDR S VALMBCK="R" D HOME^%ZIS
PXCE SC DISPLAY TEAM INFO action S TDFN=+$G(DFN) D:'TDFN SEL^SCMCU1 D EN^VALM("SC TEAM INFORMATION") K ^TMP("SCTI",$J),TDFN
XUMF NAME menu
XUMF LLCL action D EN^VALM("XUMF LLCL")
XUMF DSTA action D EN^VALM("XUMF DSTA")
XUMF AUTO action D EN^XUMF4A
XUMF NATL action D EN^VALM("XUMF NATL")
XUMF RDSN action D RDSN^XUMF4
XUMF RDSN MENU menu
XUMF CHCK action D EN^VALM("XUMF CHCK")
XUMF MFN event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the Institution file.
XUMF MFQ event driver This protocol is Master File Query event driver for the Institution file.
XUMF MFK subscriber This protocol handles Master File Notifications for the Institution file.
XUMF MFR subscriber This protocol handles Master File Query messages for the Institution file.
MAGD DHCP-PACS ADT EVENTS extended action Protocol for notifiying PACS interface ADT events D ADT^MAGDHLE
MAGD SEND ORM subscriber This protocol will receive the HL7 messages for the RA REG, RA CANCEL, and RA EXAMINED protocols.
MAGD SEND ORU subscriber This protocol receives the HL7 messages for protocol RA RPT.
PXRM EXCH DEFINITION INQUIRY action This protocol displays a reminder inquiry, which is a listing of a complete reminder definition. D DEFINQ^PXRMEXLM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM EXCH CREATE FILE ENTRY action This protocol is used to create an exchange file entry (packed reminder) and store it. D CRE^PXRMEXLM
PXRM EXCH INSTALL FILE ENTRY action D INSTALL^PXRMEXLR
PXRM EXCH DELETE FILE ENTRY action D DELETE^PXRMEXLR
PXRM EXCH LOAD HOST FILE action D LDHF^PXRMEXLM
PXRM EXCH LOAD MAILMAN action D LDMM^PXRMEXLM
PXRM EXCH CREATE HOST FILE action D CHF^PXRMEXLR
PXRM EXCH CREATE MAILMAN action D CMM^PXRMEXLR
PXRM EXCH INSTALL SELECTED COMPONENTS action D INSSEL^PXRMEXLI
PXRM EXCH INSTALL ALL COMPONENTS action D INSALL^PXRMEXLI
PXRM EXCH INSTALL MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEXLI
PXRM EXCH DIALOG MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH DIALOG TEXT action D TEXT^PXRMEXLD
ORRP CURRENT action Display active orders for this patient S ORPRES="2;ACTIVE ORDERS"
PXRM EXCH DIALOG FINDINGS action D FIND^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH INSTALLATION HISTORY action D IHIST^PXRMEXIH
PXRM EXCH DIALOG DETAILS action D DETAIL^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH DIALOG EXIT action D EXIT^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH INSTALL DIALOG (ALL) action D INSALL^PXRMEXID
PXRM EXCH INSTALL DIALOG (SELECTED) action D INSSEL^PXRMEXID
PXRM EXCH DELETE INSTALLATION HISTORY action D DELHIST^PXRMEXIH D PEXIT^PXRMEXIH
PXRM EXCH INSTALLATION DETAILS action D DETAILS^PXRMEXIH
PXRM EXCH INSTALLATION HISTORY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEXLR
PXRM EXCH SELECT DIALOG action This protocol is used by the list PXRM EX LIST DIALOG. The protocol is set-up by the ENTRY action in this list. D XSEL^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH DIALOG SUMMARY action D SUM^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH SELECT COMPONENT action This protocol is used by PXRM EX LIST COMPONENTS. The protocol is set-up by the entry action in this list. D XSEL^PXRMEXLI
PXRM EXCH DIALOG USAGE action D USE^PXRMEXLD
PXRM EXCH SELECT ENTRY action This protocol is used by PXRM EX REMINDER EXCHANGE. The protocol is set-up by the entry action in this list. D XSEL^PXRMEXLM
PXRM EXCH SELECT HISTORY action This protocol is used by PXRM EX INSTALLATION HISTORY. The protocol is set-up by the entry action in this list. D XSEL^PXRMEXIH D PEXIT^PXRMEXIH
EAS EZ 1010EZ REVIEW6 menu For 1010EZ Applications that have been Closed/Inactivated.
EAS EZ QUIT action S VALMBCK="Q" Q
PSO DRUG RESTR/GUIDE INFO action D FULL^VALM1,DDTX^PSONFI S VALMBCK="R"
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS #1 menu This hidden menu will contain standard Listman actions.
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS #4 menu This hidden action will be attached to PSO LM Renew Menu list Template.
PSJ LM DIN action Created for NFI chg #4 5/2/00; to display a hidden action DIN for drug text indication. D DINHIDE^PSJDIN(DFN,$G(PSJORD)) S VALMBCK="R"
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT ADDDEP action This will allow the user to add a new spouse or dependent. D ADDEP^EASECDP4
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT MENU menu This is used for the LTC Co-payment application.
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT MARR action D EN3^EASECDP2 S VALMBCK="R"
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT SPOUSE DEMO action D EN^EASECDP4 S VALMBCK="R"
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT DEMO action D EDITDEP^EASECDP4
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT ADD action D EN1^EASECDP2
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT REMOVE action D EN2^EASECDP2
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT EFFECTIVE action This will allow the user to edit an effective date of a dependent. D EN^EASECDP1
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT EXPAND MENU menu This is the menu that contains the actions for the LTC Co-payment Test Dependent Expand screen.
EASEC LTC COPAY DEPENDENT EXPAND action This allows the user to select a specific dependent and view more information about that dependent and edit the effective dates. D SEL^DGDEPU,RETDEP^EASECDP0,^EASECDPE K ^TMP("DGMTEP",$J)
RG EXCPT MPI/PD DATA action This protocol displays Master Patient Index/Patient Demographics (MPI/PD) information for the selected patient. D PDAT^RGEX03
RG EXCPT RSEND action This protocol allows the user to send a remote patient data query to treating facility sites. D RSEND^RGEX04
RG EXCPT RCHK action This protocol allows the user to check the status of a remote patient data query. D RCHK^RGEX04
RG EXCPT RDISP action This protocol allows the user to check the status of a remote patient data query. D RDISP^RGEX04
RG EXCPT PDAT MENU menu This protocol serves as the action menu for the MPI/PD Exception Handling Patient Data Query actions.
RG EXCPT EDIT NOTE action This protocol allows the user to add/edit notes to the exception. D EDTNOT^RGEX03
RMPR ELEC REQ TO 2319 menu
MAGJ PREFETCH/SEND ORM subscriber This protocol will initiate image prefetch for radiology exams.
GMRC IFC ORM EVENT event driver
GMRC IFC SUBSC subscriber
GMRC IF QC CONSULTS menu List Manager Protocol to print inter-facility consults by service for QC purposes.
GMRC IF CONSLTS SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Select a new service for displaying inter-facility consults. D EN^GMRCSTLM Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="IFC" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),HDR^GMRCIR S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF CONSLTS SELECT STATUS action List Manager Protocol: Select a list of statuses for displaying inter-facility consults. D NEWSTS^GMRCPC1 Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="IFC" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),HDR^GMRCIR S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF CONSLTS SELECT NUMBERED action List Manager Protocol: Toggles on and off the display of the consult number in the inter-facility consults report. D NUMBER^GMRCPC1 Q:$D(GMRCQUT) S GMRCARRN="IFC" D ENORLM^GMRCSTLM(GMRCARRN),HDR^GMRCIR S VALMBG=1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF COLUMN WIDTH MESSAGE action D PWIDTH^GMRCIR(130)
GMRC IF COLUMN WIDTH PRINT LIST extended action
GMRC IF SELECT NEW CONSULT action This protocol allows the user to select a new consult number for which to display incomplete IFC transactions. D NEWCSLT^GMRCINC S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCIFM INCOMPLETE TRANS MENU menu This protocol contains the menu of actions that one can take from the List incomplete IFC transactions option.
GMRC IF RETRANSMIT ACTIVITY action This protocol is used to re-transmit an unsuccessful activity on an inter-facility consult. D RETRAN^GMRCINC S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IFC ORM TEST event driver This item is the event protocol used to test the IFC implementation of services or procedures.
GMRCIFM TRANS MENU menu This protocol contains the menu of actions that one can take from the IFC Transaction Report option.
GMRC IF MRK TRANSACTION COMP action This protocol is used to mark an inter-facility consult transaction complete. D MKCOMP^GMRCINC S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF CONSLTS DESCRIPTION action List Manager Protocol: Display the Description from the Option file for option Inter-Facility Consult Requests [GMRC IFC RPT CONSULTS]. D DESC^GMRCIR S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF DETAILED DISPLAY action This protocol allows the user to select a consult number for which to display details from the IFC MESSAGE LOG (#123.6) file. D SELECT^GMRCITR S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF CHANGE VIEW action This protocol allows the user to change the view (sort) of entries from the IFC MESSAGE LOG (#123.6) file. D VIEW^GMRCITR Q:$D(GMRCQUT) D DATA^GMRCITR(GMRCS),HDR^GMRCITR,LM^GMRCITR,INIT^GMRCINC S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC IF ED BKG STRT action This protocol allows the start parameter for the IFC background job to be edited to some time in the future. This will delay the next running of the background job until the date/time defined in this parameter. D EDSTRT^GMRCIBKM
GMRC IF REFRESH BKG PAR action This protocol allows the listing of the IFC background parameters to be refreshed and redisplayed. D REFRESH^GMRCIBKM
GMRCIFM BKG PARAM MENU menu This protocol contains actions that may be taken during the display of the IFC background job parameters.
IBCEM FILE MESSAGE RECEIVED action This action allows a user to manually force a message to process through the return message process. D UPD^IBCEM
IBCEM CLONE BILL action This action allows a user to cancel and clone a bill that has been returned to the site in error. D CLONE^IBCECOB2 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM RESUBMIT BATCH action This action allows a user to resubmit all or part of a batch of bills. D RESUBM^IBCEM00
IBCEM VIEW/PRINT MESSAGE action This option allows the user to view an electronic return message. D VP^IBCEM
IBCEM 837 MESSAGE MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on 837 return messages. I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM SELECT BATCH BILL action This action allows the user to select bills from the list of bills displayed. D SEL^IBCEM01
IBCEM BATCH BILL MENU menu This is the menu used to display bills belonging to a batch and allow selection of one or more bills for processing. I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT EDI STATUS SCREEN action This action is used to display latest status message, return message and transmit message for a selected bill. I '$$PRVSCR^IBJTU1("IBJTED") D EN^IBJTED
IBJT EDI STATUS MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTED",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE RULE DISPLAY action Allows for the printing or viewing of details for a selected transmission rule. D SELRULE^IBCEF61(.IBRULE),DISPRUL^IBCEF61(IBRULE)
IBCE RULE DISPLAY ALL action Allows for the printing or viewing of details for all tansmission rules. D DISPRUL^IBCEF61() K IBRULE
IBCE RULE ACTIVE DATES EDIT action Allows the editing of transmission rules' active/inactive dates. D SELRULE^IBCEF61(.IBRULE),ACTIVE^IBCEF61(IBRULE) K IBRULE
IBCE RULE INS OPT EDIT action Allows editing of a transmission rule's insurance company data. D SELRULE^IBCEF61(.IBRULE),INSCO^IBCEF61(IBRULE) K IBRULE
IBCE RULE BILL TYPE EDIT action Allows the editing of bill types for a transmission rule whose rule type allows bill type restrictions. D SELRULE^IBCEF61(.IBRULE),BILTYP^IBCEF61(IBRULE) K IBRULE
IBCE RULE ADD action Allows entry of a new transmission rule. S IBOK=$$ADDRULE^IBCEF5() D SUCCESS^IBCEF61(IBOK) K IBOK,IBRULE
IBCE RULE MENU menu This protocol contains the action items needed to view/maintain transmission rules for EDI/MRA processing of claims K IBACTIVE
IBCE RULE MISC EDIT action Allows editing of miscellaneous fields for a transmission rule. These are the fields that do not have specific actions to edit them. D SELRULE^IBCEF61(.IBRULE),MISC^IBCEF61(IBRULE) K IBRULE
IBCE RULE BT RESTRICT MENU menu Produces a list manager screen with details of a selected rule. Actions will allow editing of restrictions to attach to the rule.
IBCE RULE BT DELETE action Allows the deletion of bill type restriction(s) attached to a transmission rule. I $$BTDEL^IBCEF62(+$G(IBRULE)) D SUCCBT^IBCEF62 K IBOK
IBCE RULE BT EDIT DATES action This protocol allows the inactive and active dates to be edited for bill type restrictions attached to this rule. D BTEDIT^IBCEF61(+$G(IBRULE))
IBCE RULE BT ADD action This protocol allows the user to add bill type restrictions to the rule. D BTADD^IBCEF61(+$G(IBRULE))
IBCEM COB MANAGEMENT menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to follow up on bills for secondary and tertiary billing. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM COPY SECOND/THIRD action This action is used to create Secondary and Tertiary bills. D PRO^IBCECOB2 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM COB EDI action This action is used to display the latest status message, EDI transmit message, and return message for a selected bill. D EDI^IBCECOB2
IBCEM COB CANCEL action This action allows a user to cancel a bill that has been returned to the site in error D CANCEL^IBCECOB2 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM COB RESUBMIT action This action is allowed a user to resubmit a bill that has not been flagged as being in error. A new batch number is assigned to any bills resubmitted with this option. D RES^IBCECOB2
IBCEM COB EDIT BILL action This option allows the user to enter the information required to generate a third party bill and to edit existing billing information. D EBI^IBCECOB2 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM COB TPJI action This action is used to display the Third Party Joint Inquiry display for the claim. D TPJI^IBCECOB2
IBCEM COB EXIT action This action is allowed a user to exit out of COB menu. D EXIT^IBCECOB2
IBCEM DELETE MESSAGE action This action allows a user to manually delete a message that you either can't or don't want to continue through the return message process. A bulletin is sent to alert that this action has been taken. D DEL^IBCEM
IBCE EOB LIST menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to enter, edit or delete EOB information for a claim. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE MANUAL EOB ADD action This action allows for the manual recording of a new EOB for a claim. D NEW^IBCEOB21
IBCE MANUAL EOB EDIT action This action allows for the editing of a previously entered manual EOB for a claim. D EDIT^IBCEOB21
IBCE MANUAL EOB DELETE action This action allows for the deletion of a previously entered manual EOB for a claim. D DELETE^IBCEOB21
IBCE EOB VIEW action This displays the EOB detail D VIEW^IBCEOB21
IBCE EOB CHANGE BILL action This allows the user to select another bill to display EOB's for. D CHANGE^IBCEOB21
IBCEM COB PRINT REPORT action This action allows user to print report and use report to follow up on bills for secondary and tertiary billing. D EN^IBCECOB3 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCEM COB V/P BILL action This action allows the user to print a third party bill after all required information has been input, and after the billing information has been reviewed and authorized. A reimbursable insurance bill that has been flagged for transmission cannot be printed before it has been transmitted at least once. D PBILL^IBCECOB2
IBCEM CLAIMS STATUS AWAITING menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to review the most current status messages received for a bill and do follow-up on the bills. Users will be able to select a bill from the list to view the details and the entire message text as well as to mark the message as reviewed or under review and to document user comments. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM CSA REPORT action This will be a list manager screen with an option to print this report. Using the report, billing staff will be able to review the most current status messages received for a bill(s) and do follow-up on the bills. D EN^IBCECSA3 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCEM CSA MSG DETAIL action This action allows a user to view the details of a bill selected from the summary screen. It will display the message text, user comments that have been entered during review of the message, and all of the fields from the summary page. D SMSG^IBCECSA4
ORRP DC action Display discontinued orders S ORPRES="3;DISCONTINUED ORDERS"
IBCEM CSA MSG MENU menu This menu contains actions to perform functions that allow for the review and processing of return status messages. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM CSA EDI HISTORY action This action is used to display the latest status message, EDI transmit message, and return message for a selection bill. D EDI^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA TPJI action There are set of actions and screens for Third Party AR/IB Joint Inquiry Provide detailed information on any Third Party Claim. D TPJI^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA PROCESS COB action This option is used to create Secondary and Tertiary bills. The Primary bill is copied to create the bill to the Secondary payer. The Secondary bill is copied to create the bill to the Tertiary payer. D PRO^IBCECSA4 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM CSA EDIT BILL action This option allows the user to edit information on an MRA (REQUEST FOR MRA status) third party bill that has been returned in error. This kind of bill may be edited because it has not yet been sent to A/R. D EBI^IBCECSA4 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM CSA CANCEL BILL action This action allows a user to cancel a bill that has been returned to the site in error. D CANCEL^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA RESUBMIT BILL action This action is allowed a user to resubmit a bill that has not been flagged as being in error. A new batch number is assigned to any bills resubmitted with this option. D RES^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA PRINT BILL action This action allows the user to print a third party bill after all required information has been input, and after the billing information has been reviewed and authorized. A reimbursable insurance bill that has been flagged for transmission cannot be printed before it has been transmitted at least once. D PBILL^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA COB MANAGEMENT action This will be a list manager screen with the option available to print an associated report. Using the screen, user will be able to follow up on bills for secondary and tertiary billing. D COB^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA REVIEW STATUS action This action is to allow user to mark the message as reviewed, not reviewed and reviewed complete from selection list. D STATUS^IBCECSA2
IBCEM CSA COMMENTS action This action allows user to document user comments for the specifice message from the selection list. D COM^IBCECSA2
IBCEM COB CSA action This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to review the the most current status messages received for a bill and do follow-up on the bills. Users will be able to select a bill from the list to view the details and the entire message text as well as mark to mark the message as reviewed or under reviewed and document user comments. D CSA^IBCECOB2
IBCEM CSA VIEW EOB action This action allows a user to view EOB for bills as well as MEDICARE remittance advice data. D EOB^IBCECSA4
IBCEM CSA EOB LINK menu This menu includes all the options in View EOB menu. K IBFASTXT I $S($G(IBPRVSCR)="":$G(IBFASTXT),1:IBPRVSCR'="IBJTED"&($G(IBFASTXT)>2)) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM CSA EOB GEN action This action allows a user to display EOB general information. N IBACT S IBACT=1 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB PAY action This action allows a user to view EOB payer information. N IBACT S IBACT=2 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB CLAIM action This action allows a user to view EOB claim status level information. N IBACT S IBACT=3 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB CLAIM ADJ action This action allows a user to view EOB claim level adjustments information. N IBACT S IBACT=4 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB MEDICARE action This action allows a user to view MRA medicare information. N IBACT S IBACT=5 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB OUTPATIENT action This action allows a user to view EOB medicare outpatient information. N IBACT S IBACT=6 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB LINE ADJ action This action allows a user to view EOB line level adjustments information. N IBACT S IBACT=7 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCEM CSA EOB REVIEW action This action allows a user to view EOB review data. N IBACT S IBACT=8 D ACT^IBCECSA6
IBCE EXTR CANCEL action Action item, used with IB EDI/MRA, to automatically cancel bills in a ready for extract status due to EDI/MRA being turned off. D CANCEL^IBCEXTR2
IBCE EXTR MENU menu
IBCE EXTR PRINT action D EN^IBCERP6A D PAUSE^VALM1 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCE EXTR CLON/AUTH action This action, used with IB EDI/MRA software, will cancel,clone and authorize the new bill without user input. D CPYCLN^IBCEXTR2
IBCE RULE ACTIVE ONLY action Filters the display of transmission rules so that only the ones currently in effect are displayed. D SCRACT^IBCEF61 S VALMBG=1
IBCE RULE BOTH ACTIVE AND INACTIVE action Removes all filters to display all transmission rules, regardless of whether or not they are currently active. D NOSCR^IBCEF61 S VALMBG=1
IBCEM COB VEOB MENU menu This menu allows the entry of review comments and the update of the review status and last edited fields. K IBFASTXT
IBCEM COB REVIEW STATUS action This action is to allow user to mark the message as reiewed, not reviewed and reviewed complete from selection list. D STATUS^IBCECOB4
IBCEM COB EOB action This action allows a user to enter review comments and to update the review status and last edited by fields. D RVEOB^IBCECOB2
IBCEM CSA MULTI SELECT REVIEW action This option allows the selection of more than 1 status message and allows the user to either automatically mark the messages as reviewed or allows the user to ask to see each message to determine whether or not it can be marked as reviewed. In either case, the result is that the message is marked as review completed, the review action is changed to FILED - NO ACTION and a review comment is entered noting the auto-review action and who the user was who performed it. D MSTAT^IBCEU0
IBCE PRVCARE UNIT MENU menu
IBCE PRVCARE ADD action D NEW^IBCEP4A(0)
IBCE PRVPRV MAINT menu
IBCE PRVNUM EDIT action D CHG1^IBCEP5A
IBCE PRVNUM ADD action D NEW^IBCEP5A($G(IBPRV),$G(IBINS))
IBCE PRVNUM DELETE action D DEL1^IBCEP5A
IBCE PRVCARE UNIT MAINT action This protocol calls the list manager template for provider id care unit maintenance functions. D EN1^IBCEP4($G(IBINS))
IBCE PRVINS EDIT action D CHG1^IBCEP0A Q
IBCE PRVINS ADD action D NEW^IBCEP0A($G(IBINS),$G(IBPRV),$G(IBPTYP),$G(IBDSP)) Q
IBCE PRVINS DELETE action D DEL1^IBCEP0A
IBCNSC PROVIDER ID PARAMETERS action S IBY=",12," D EA^IBCNSC1 S VALMBG=$G(IB1ST("PROVID")) S:'VALMBG VALMBG=1
IBCE PRVINS ID menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE PRVFAC MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE PRVFAC EDIT action D EDIT1^IBCEP7
IBCE PRVNVA MAINT menu
IBCE PRVNVA DEMOG action D EDIT1^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV)) Q
IBCE PRVINS JUMP action D PRVJMP^IBCEP0A($G(IBDSP)) Q
IBCE PRVINS CHG INS action D CHGINS^IBCEP0A
IBCE PRVINS DISPLAY PARAMS action D EN^IBCEPB Q
IBCE PRVINS CHG FORMAT action D CHGFMT^IBCEP0A
IBCE PRVINS FROM INS MAINT action D EN1^IBCEP0($G(IBCNS)) Q
IBCE ELEC REPT MENU menu
IBCE PRVINS PARAM EDIT action D EDIT^IBCEP0B
IBCE PRVINS PARAM DISPLAY MENU menu
IBCE PRVSTATE LICENSE action D EN^IBCEP5D
IBCE MESSAGE TEXT DISPLAY menu
IBCE MESSAGE SCREEN TEXT EDIT action D EDIT^IBCEM4
IBCE PRVCARE EDIT action D CHANGE^IBCEP4A(0)
IBCEM CSA RETRANSMIT BILL action This action allows a user to resubmit a bill that resides in the CSA list. D RETXMT^IBCECSA4
IBCEM STATUS MSG MENU menu
IBCE ELEC RPT ADD/EDIT action D EDIT^IBCERPT1
IBCEM VIEW STATUS MESSAGE action D VIEW^IBCEMSG2
IBCEM DELETE STATUS MESSAGES action D DEL^IBCEMSG2
IBCEM VIEW/PRINT STATUS MESSAGES action D VPRT^IBCEMSG2
PSJ PC IV LABELS ACTION menu D EN^PSIVLB(DFN,ON,PSIVLBTP,PSJMORE) Q
PSJ PC IV NEW LABELS action This action will allow the user to print new IV labels. D LBLBEG^PSIVLBL1 S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ PC IV REPRINT LABELS action This action will allow the user to reprint one or all labels that have not been reprinted, recycled, cancelled or destroyed and have not marked as Given or Completed in BCMA. D EN^PSIVLBRP(.PSJIDLST) K PSJLB S VALMBCK="Q"
PSJ PC RETURN IV LABELS ACTION menu D EN^PSIVLB(DFN,ON,PSIVLBTP,PSJMORE) Q
PSJ PC IV RECYCLED action This action will allow the user to recycle selected labels. S PSIVC=2 D WARD^PSIVRD S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ PC IV DESTROYED action This action will allow the user to enter destroyed IV labels. S PSIVC=3 D WARD^PSIVRD S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ PC IV CANCELLED action This action will allow the user to cancel selected labels. S PSIVC=4 D WARD^PSIVRD S VALMBCK="R"
PSJI LM VERIFY action This action allows the user to verify an IV order. N PSJIOPIV S PSJIOPIV=1 D PSBPOIV^PSIVORC1,VF^PSJLIACT,SETNML55^PSIVORC1 D SETIVINT^PSGSICH1 K PSJIOPIV D SETIVINT^PSGSICH1 K ^TMP("PSJINTER",$J) D KILL^PSJBCMA5(+$G(PSJSYSP))
ROR-SITE-DRIVER event driver
ROR-SITE-SUBSCRIBER subscriber
ROR EVENT LAB action This protocol is used by the Clinical Case Registries package to Otherwise, the protocol will be executed (if it is not disabled or unsubscribed manually) but will not call the processing routine (LAB^ROREVT01). maintain references to patients who have lab results. The protocol should be subscribed to the LR7O ALL EVSEND RESULTS protocol (this is done by the KIDS during the installation). If at least one of the defined registries enables event protocols, this protocol will process the Lab events and create references in the ROR PATIENT EVENTS file (#798.3). D:$D(^ROR(798.1,"AEP"))>1 LAB^ROREVT01
ROR EVENT VISIT action This protocol is used by the Clinical Case Registries package to Otherwise, the protocol will be executed (if it is not disabled or unsubscribed manually) but will not call the processing routine (VISIT^ROREVT01). maintain references to patients who have new data in the V-files (VISIT, V POV, etc). The protocol should be subscribed to the PXK VISIT DATA EVENT protocol (this is done by the KIDS during the installation). If at least one of the defined registries enables event protocols, this protocol will process the Lab events and create references in the ROR PATIENT EVENTS file (#798.3). D:$D(^ROR(798.1,"AEP"))>1 VISIT^ROREVT01
ROR EVENT PTF action This protocol is used by the Clinical Case Registries package to Otherwise, the protocol will be executed (if it is not disabled or unsubscribed manually) but will not call the processing routine (PTF^ROREVT01). maintain references to patients who have new admissions. The protocol should be subscribed to the DGPM MOVEMENT EVENT protocol (this is done by the KIDS during the installation). If at least one of the defined registries enables event protocols, this protocol will process the movement events and create references in the ROR PATIENT EVENTS file (#798.3). D:$D(^ROR(798.1,"AEP"))>1 PTF^ROREVT01
IBCI SEND ALL action D ALL^IBCIL0 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCI SEND NON-AUTH ONLY action D SNA^IBCIL0 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCI SELECT BILLS extended action D SELB^IBCIL0 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCI SKIP LIST MENU menu
IBCI BLANK PROTOCOL action
IBCI WORKSHEET SCREEN MENU menu
IBCI CLAIMSMANAGER RE-EDIT action D EBILL^IBCIMG S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCI CLAIMSMANAGER OVERRIDE action LOCK TO RESTRICT USE TO THOSE USERS WITH OVERRIDE ACCESS D ABILL^IBCIMG
IBCI CLAIMSMANAGER EXIT action D XIT^IBCIMG
IBCI CLAIMSMANAGER CANCEL BILL action D CBILL^IBCIMG
IBCI CLERK WORKSHEET SCREEN MENU menu
ORRP C/E action Display orders completed or expired S ORPRES="4;COMPLETED/EXPIRED ORDERS"
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY (CMOR PDAT) action This action will allow the user to request PDAT information from the CMOR. D CMOR^MPIFQ1
MPIF REAL-TIME QUERY (MPI PDAT) action This action will allow the user to request PDAT information from the MPI. D MPIPD^MPIFQ1
OREV ENTER/EDIT AUTO DC MENU menu D LIST^OREV,CHKSEL^OREV
OREV ENTER/EDIT ENTRIES action D EEE^OREV D DESELECT^OREV K ^TMP("OREDO",$J)
OREV MAIN DETAILED DISPLAY action D EN^VALM("OREV DETAILED DISPLAY") D DESELECT^OREV
OREV SWITCH action D ACT^OREV1 D DESELECT^OREV
OREV EDIT WRITE ORDERS PARAM action D FULL^VALM1 D EDITPAR^XPAREDIT("ORWDX WRITE ORDERS EVENT LIST") S VALMBCK="R" D DESELECT^OREV
OREV DETAILED MENU menu
OREV SWITCH IN DETAIL action D ACT^OREV1 D DET^OREV2
OREV ENTER/EDIT ENTRIES IN DETAIL action D EEE^OREV D DET^OREV2
OREV ENTER/EDIT EVENTS MENU menu D LIST^OREV,CHKSEL^OREV
XUMF IMF MFN event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the Institution file.
XUMF IMF MFK subscriber This protocol handles Master File Notifications for the Institution file.
XUHUI FIELD CHANGE EVENT extended action This is used to launch, in the backgound, the protocols that are listed in the ITEM multiple. Called from routine: DEQUE^XUHUI.
XUHUI SEND MESSAGE action This Action protocol is used to send a mail message to Members of Group: XUHUI CHANGE EVENT. D ^XUHUIMSG
VAFC QRY-A19 SERVER event driver This protocol is used as a server to pass an HL7 patient query ADT A19.
VAFC ADR-A19 CLIENT subscriber This client HL7 protocol is used to process in a patient query and respond with a ADR-A19 patient response. The process will be used to help re-synchronize the MPI with the associated systems that know an ICN.
VAFC MFN-M05 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send/receive a Treating Facility Master File updated HL7 message to/from the MPI.
VAFC MFN-M05 CLIENT subscriber This HL7 client protocol is used to send/receive a Treating Facility Master File updated HL7 message to/from the MPI.
MPIF ADT-A43 SERVER event driver This HL7 message protocol will be used to correct a mismatched or incorrect ICN identifier.
MPIF ADT-A43 CLIENT subscriber This is the HL7 message client protocol that will process the ADT-A43 Move Patient Identifier. This protocol will be used to correct erroneous or incorrectly identified ICN assignments.
MPIF ADT-A31 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A31 (update patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the updating of patient data on the MPI for that ICN.
MPIF ADT-A31 CLIENT subscriber This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A31 (update patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the updating of patient data on the MPI for that ICN.
MPIF ADT-A28 CLIENT subscriber This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A28 (create new patient) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the addition of a new patient in the MPIVET file on the MPI, unless an exact match is found. The corresponding associated/treating facility for an ICN will also be created.
MPIF ADT-A28 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A28 (create new patient) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the addition of a new patient in the MPIVET file on the MPI, unless an exact match is found. The corresponding associated/treating facility for an ICN will also be created.
MPIF ADT-A24 CLIENT subscriber This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A24 (link patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the addition of the associated/treating facility for an ICN OR the update of the data associated with the associated/treating facility.
MPIF ADT-A24 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A24 (link patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the addition of the associated/treating facility for an ICN OR the update of the data associated with the associated/treating facility.
MPIF ADT-A40 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A40 (merging patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the merging of ICN 2 into ICN1.
MPIF ADT-A40 CLIENT subscriber This protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A40 (merging patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the merging of ICN 2 into ICN 1.
MPIF ADT-A37 SERVER event driver This HL7 message server protocol will be used to unlink sites from the patient Treating Facility list.
MPIF ADT-A37 CLIENT subscriber This HL7 client protocol is used to send an HL7 v2.4 ADT-A37 (unlink patient information) message from VistA to the MPI. The event will result in the removal of a patient from the associated/treating facility list for an ICN.
RG ADT-A08 TRIGGER subscriber This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A08 HL7 2.4 trigger client protocol. This protocol is used to process in messages generated by the VAFC ADT-A08 SERVER protocol that is in 2.3 format and update the message to the 2.4 standard and include full enhanced mode acknowledgements at both the commit and application level.
RG ADT-A01 2.4 SERVER event driver This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A01 HL7 2.4 server protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI.
RG ADT-A01 2.4 CLIENT subscriber This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A01 HL7 2.4 client protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI. This will be used to send admission data to the MPI to support the synchronization of the patients date last treated and/or event reason.
RG ADT-A03 2.4 SERVER event driver This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A03 HL7 2.4 server protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI.
RG ADT-A03 2.4 CLIENT subscriber This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A03 HL7 2.4 client protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI. This will be used to send discharge and clinic checkout data to the MPI to support the synchronization of the patients date last treated and/or event reason.
RG ADT-A04 2.4 SERVER event driver This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A04 (Register a Patient) HL7 2.4 server protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI.
RG ADT-A04 2.4 CLIENT subscriber This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A04 HL7 2.4 client protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI. This will be used to send registration data to the MPI to support the synchronization of the patient demographic data.
RG ADT-A08 2.4 SERVER event driver This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A08 (Patient Update) HL7 2.4 server protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI.
RG ADT-A08 2.4 CLIENT subscriber This is the new MPI/PD ADT-A08 HL7 2.4 client protocol. This new version includes the new PID as well as the routing via the MPI. This will be used to send updated patient data to the MPI to support the synchronization of the patient demographic data.
RG ADT-A04 TRIGGER subscriber This protocol is used as an internal process of the A04 messages. The protocol will read in the message and reformat to the HL7 v2.4 standard with Application and Commit acknowledgements turned on.
PSS HUI DRUG UPDATE event driver This protocol will be used to send event notification and data when new drugs are added to the Drug file (#50) and when certain fields are updated in same file.
PSO RECEIVE ORDER subscriber This protocol is used to receive Outpatient Pharmacy orders from an external source.
XUHUI SEND HL7 MESSAGE action This Action protocol is used to send an HL7 MFN message to the HUI remote middleware. D ^XUHUIHL7
XUHUI MFN event driver This HL7 event protocol is one of two protocols used to generate staff/practitioner master file (MFN) messages. This particular protocol represents the sending system.
XUHUI MFK subscriber This HL7 event protocol is one of two protocols used to generate staff/practitioner master file (MFN) messages. This particular protocol represents the receiving system.
DG FIELD MONITOR extended action This protocol is an event point which monitors the editing of fields in DGTYPE Type of cross reference action (ADD, DELETE or UPDATE) DGDTH Date/time of change in $Horolog format DGUSER DUZ of user that made the change DGOPT Current menu option in "option_name^menu_text" format DGX X array as documented for Fileman new style x-refs DGX1 X1 array as documented for Fileman new style x-refs DGX2 X2 array as documented for Fileman new style x-refs This protocol is triggered by "listener" cross references on selected fields. By employing logic such as "If DGFILE=2, DGFIELD=.361, DG* application files. At the time of this event point, the following DGTYPE="ADD", then...", subscribers to this protocol may take action based on edit activity which involves those fields. This event point is designed to occur only once per field editing activity. The DGTYPE variable can be interpreted as follows: o ADD transactions indicate that data has been added to a field that was previously null. The DGX, DGX1 and DGX2 arrays will contain the Fileman X, X1 and X2 arrays (respectively) as documented for the execution of 'SET' logic. variables will be present in the environment: o DELETE transactions indicate that previously existing data has been deleted without being replaced. The DGX, DGX1 and DGX2 arrays will contain the Fileman X, X1 and X2 arrays (respectively) as documented for the execution of 'KILL' logic. o UPDATE transactions indicate that existing data has been deleted and new data has been filed. The DGX, DGX1 and DGX2 arrays will contain the Fileman X, X1 and X2 arrays (respectively) as documented for the execution of 'SET' logic. The naming convention used for these 'new style' cross-references for this Patch are as follows: 1. All names will begin with the letter "A" to denote a non-lookup MUMPS cross-reference. 2. The next characters identify the name space (i.e. Registration ="DG"). 3. The next two characters identify the field monitor utility ("FM"). Variable Description 4. The next character will be "D" if the field contains a decimal. If there is no decimal, there will not be a "D" character. 5. The next characters identify the field number. The establishment of this naming convention is intended to assist with the easy identification of the field monitoring utility as implemented across multiple field definitions. It should be followed as additional instances of this utility are distributed. -------- ----------------------------------------------- DGDA DA array as exists during Fileman editing DGFILE File or subfile number where changed field resides DGFIELD Number of changed field
SD WAIT LIST ENTRY action SDWL MENU S SDWLLIST=1 D CLEAR^VALM1,EN^SDWLE K SDWLLIST S VALMBCK="R"
SD WAIT LIST DISPLAY action S SDWLLIST=1 D CLEAR^VALM1,EN^SDWLI K SDWLLIST S VALMBCK="R"
SD WAIT LIST DISPOSITION action SDWL MENU S SDWLLIST=1 D CLEAR^VALM1,EN^SDWLDISP K SDWLLIST S VALMBCK="R"
SCMC PCMM INACTIVATE ON DATE OF DEATH action Inactiviate Patient Team Assignments in PCMM when date of death is entered D DEATH^SCMCTSK
OREV EDIT EVENT DELAY PARAMS action D PARAM^OREV3 D DESELECT^OREV
ORC DELAYED ORDERS action D EN^OREVNT S:$D(^TMP("OR",$J,"CURRENT","MENU")) XQORM("HIJACK")=^("MENU")
ORC DELAY EVENT action D ED^OREVNT D EX^ORCACT
ORC DELAYED ORDER ACTIONS menu Q:$$DONE^OREVNT1 S XQORM(0)="1AD\",(XQORM("?"),XQORM("??"))="D ITEMHELP^ORCHART",VALMBCK="",ORNMBR=$P(XQORNOD(0),"=",2) D SELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR) I '$G(OREBUILD),$G(ORNMBR) D DESELECT^ORCHART(ORNMBR)
ORCHANGE EVENT action D EVT^ORCHANG3
ORC RELEASE ORDERS action D EN^OREVNT1 D EX^ORCACT
OREV INCLUDE HISTORIES action D INCHIST^OREV2 S VALMBG=1 D DET^OREV2
OREV CHANGE DISPLAY action D CD^OREV2 D HDR^OREV
OREV ADD CHILD action D ACE^OREV3 D DESELECT^OREV K ^TMP("OREDO",$J)
PSJ LM FLAG action This option allows the user to flag/unflag an Inpatient Medications order. D FLAG^PSJOE(DFN,PSJORD)
PSJ LM CWAD action Displaying the CWAD information for the selected patient. D CWAD^PSJALG(DFN) S VALMBCK="R"
EAS EDB ORU-Z06 CLIENT subscriber
EAS EDB ORU-Z06 SERVER event driver
EAS EDB ORU-Z09 CLIENT subscriber
EAS EDB ORU-Z09 SERVER event driver
SCMC SEND SERVER WORKLOAD event driver HL7 server protocol for sending PCMM Workload messages, which will contain primary care data used by the NPCD.
SCMC SEND CLIENT WORKLOAD subscriber HL7 server protocol for sending PCMM workload messages Will contain primary care data used by the NPCD.
TIUHSLSM MENU menu D LSEXIT^TIUHSL
TIUHS CREATE OBJECT action D CREATE^TIUHSL S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS EDIT action D EDIT^TIUHSL S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS EDIT OBJECT action D HSEDIT^TIUHSV S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHSE MENU menu
TIUHS CREATE/MODIFY HS TYPE action D CREATEHS^TIUHSOLM S VALMBCK="R"
ORRP EXPIRING action Display orders about to expire S ORPRES="5;EXPIRING ORDERS"
TIUHS VIEW CURRENT HS action D FULL^VALM1 W @IOF D ^GMTSRI W ! S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS QUIT action G EXIT^TIUHSL
TIUHSFIND action D FIND^TIUHSL S VALMBCK="R"
TIU HS OBJECT DISPLAY action D HSOBJ^TIUHSV S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS CHANGE HS TYPE action D CHHST^TIUHSV S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS OBJECT MENU menu
TIUHS OBJ EDIT HS OBJECT action D EHSO^TIUHSOLM S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS OBJ CHANGE HST action D CHST^TIUHSOLM S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHS EDIT HS OBJECT MM action D EDITHSO^TIUHSL S VALMBCK="R"
RMIM DRIVER event driver
RMIM SUBSCRIBER subscriber
DG PATCH 244 event driver This server protocol will be used by patch DG*5.3*244 to generate an HL7 Update Patient (event code A08) message. All local subscribers to VAFC ADT-A08 SERVER will be added as subscribers to this protocol by the post init included with DG*5.3*244.
XUOAA PMU event driver This HL7 event protocol is one of two protocols used to generate Update Personnel Record (PMU) messages. This particular protocol represents the sending system.
XUOAA ACK subscriber This HL7 event protocol is one of two protocols used to generate Update Personnel Record (PMU) messages. This particular protocol represents the receiving system.
EAS UE PCE EVENT action This Protocol is attached to multiple ITEM of PXK VISIT DATA EVENT Protocol. This protocol will make enrollment call if any inpatient/outpatient encounter occurs to determine Veteran's User Enrollee status. D ENC^EASUER
EAS UE SCHED EVENT action This protocol is attached to multiple ITEM of SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS protocol. This protocol will make a call to enrollment api if any appointment made to determine Veteran's User Enrollee status. D SCHED^EASUER
EAS UE INP EVENT action This protocol attached as multiple item of protocol named DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS. It will notify enrollment whenever veteran is admitted, transfered or discharged. D INP^EASUER
FB PATIENT DATA CHANGE action D CHNG^FBPATDAT
DGRU-RAI-A08 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A12 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A21 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A22 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A13 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A01 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A03 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-MFU subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A02 subscriber
DGRU-RAI-A11 subscriber
TIU ALERTS MENU menu D LSEXIT^TIUAL1
TIU ALERTS 3RD PERSON ALERT action D SELECT^TIUALFUN("THIRD") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS RESEND ALERT action D SELECT^TIUALFUN("RESEND") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS SELECT action D SELECT^TIUALFUN("ASKUSR") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS COMBO action D SELECT^TIUALFUN("COMBO") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS CHANGE SEARCH CRITERIA action D CHNGSRCH^TIUAL1 S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS DELETE action D SELECT^TIUALFUN("ALRTDEL") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS BROWSE action D BROWSE^TIUALFUN S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS SEARCH AUTHOR action
TIU ALERTS SEARCH DICTATOR action
TIU ALERTS SEARCH EXPECTED COSIGNER action
TIU ALERTS SEARCH ATTENDING PHYSICIAN action
HL CS/RQ - SELECT MESSAGES action Protocol used by the HL7 Message Requeuer to flag messages for requeueing. D SELECT^HLCSRE1(1)
TIU ALERTS SEARCH ADDITIONAL SIGNER action
TIU ALERTS SEARCH MENU menu
TIU ALERTS ID SIGNER action D IDSIGNER^TIUALFUN S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS EDIT action D EDIT^TIUAL1 S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ALERTS DETAILED DISPLAY action D DETDISP^TIUALSET S VALMBCK="R"
VAFC EXCPT MPI/PD DATA action This protocol displays Master Patient Index/Patient Demographics (MPI/PD) information for the selected patient. D PDAT^VAFCMGA1
VAFC EXCPT RPA SEND action This protocol allows the user to send a remote patient audit query to treating facility sites. D RSEND^VAFCLAU
VAFC EXCPT RPA CHECK action This protocol allows the user to check the status of a remote patient audit query. D RCHK^VAFCLAU
VAFC EXCPT RPA DISPLAY action This protocol allows the user to display a remote patient audit. D RDISP^VAFCLAU
VAFC EXCPT PATIENT AUDIT MENU menu This protocol serves as the action menu for the MPI/PD Patient Audit query actions.
HL CS/RQ MENU - SCREEN 2 menu Protocol menu for screen number 2 (Message Select) of the HL7 Message Requeuer.
VAFC EXCPT PUSH CMOR action This protocol allows the user's site to relinquish being the CMOR for a patient and give it to another site. D LM^MPIFCMRP(VAFCDFN)
PSB BCBU RECEIVE action This Protocol processes the HL7 Messages that are sent by Pharmacy to CPRS for order updates D IPH^ALPBCBU(.XQORMSG)
PSB BCBU PATIENT MOVEMENT action This Protocol is used to track the patient admissions, discharges and other Movements for BCBU Contingency. Every time a patient movement activity happens a message is sent to the BCBU Contingency Workstation to keep it current with the patient location. D PMOV^ALPBCBU
PSB BCBU ORM RECV subscriber This is an HL7 subscriber protocol for routing messages to BCMA BACKUP workstations. It is configured as a "router" so there will not be a logical link defined. The Routing Logic field is simply a Mumps 'Quit' since the HLL("LINKS") array is set up by the sending application before the call to HL7. Messages are routed to logical links based on their association with Medical Center Divisions (40.8) in the Parameter File.
PSB BCBU ORM SEND event driver This is the event driver for all BCMA backup events.
PSB SELECT ORDER action Lists a BCBU patient's orders and allows selection of one or several orders which are then displayed. This protocol is used on the workstation only. D SELORD^ALPBSP1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSB ORDERS MENU menu Protocol menu containing protocol PSB SELECT ORDER.
PSB SELECT PATIENT action List all BCBU patients by name. Allows selection of a patient and then branches to PSB SELECT ORDER. This protocol is used on the workstation only. D SELPAT^ALPBSPAT S VALMBCK="R"
PSB PATIENT MENU menu Protocol menu containing protocol PSB SELECT PATIENT.
PSB ERR LOG DEL ONE action Deletes a selected entry or range of entries from the BCBU Error Log in file 53.71. D DELONE^ALPBELOG S VALMBCK="R"
HL CS/RQ - DESELECT MESSAGES action Protocol used by the HL7 Message Requeuer to deselect messages that have been flag for requeueing. D SELECT^HLCSRE1(0)
PSB ERROR LOG MENU menu Protocol menu containing protocols PSB ERR LOG DEL ALL and PSB ERR LOG DEL ONE.
PSB ERR LOG DEL ALL action Delete all entries from the BCBU Error Log in file 53.71. D DELALL^ALPBELOG S VALMBCK="R"
PSB BCBU PMU_B01 EVENT event driver PMU_B01 events are HL7 messages for adding personnel. This message is sent to the BCMA Contingency workstations
PSB BCBU PMU_B01 RECV subscriber This is an HL7 subscriber to the PMU_B01 event as implemented for the BCMA contingency backup software. Personnel create and update events are sent to the backup workstations to keep BCMA users in sync with Vista.
PSB BCBU PMU_B02 EVENT event driver PMU_B02 events are HL7 messages for updating personnel records. This message is sent to the BCMA Contingency workstations
PSB BCBU PMU_B02 RECV subscriber This is an HL7 subscriber to the PMU_B02 event as implemented for the BCMA contingency backup software. Personnel create and update events are sent to the backup workstations to keep BCMA users in sync with Vista.
PSB SELECT PATIENT WARD action Allows the user to list patients on selected wards. D SELWARD^ALPBSPAT S VALMBCK="R"
PSB SELECT PATIENT ALL action List all BCBU patients by name. Allows user to select by patient's name, patient's SSN, or first letter lastname+last 4 of SSN. D SELALL^ALPBSPAT S VALMBCK="R"
PSB SELECT ORDER ACTIVE action List all active orders for a selected patient. Also allows for the selection of a order to be viewied. D SELACT^ALPBSP1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSB SELECT ORDER ALL action List all orders for a selected patient regardless of the order status. Also allows for the selection of a order to be viewied. D SELALL^ALPBSP1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for creating, editing, and displaying patient record flag assignments.
DGPF DISPLAY ASSIGNMENT DETAIL action This action protocol permits the user to view the details of a patient's flag assignment within the Record Flag Assignment [DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT] option. D DF^DGPFLMA1
DGPF EDIT ASSIGNMENT extended action This action protocol permits the user to edit a patient's flag assignment within the Record Flag Assignment [DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT] option. D EF^DGPFLMA3
DGPF ASSIGN FLAG extended action This action protocol permits the user to assign a flag to a patient within the Record Flag Assignment [DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT] option. D AF^DGPFLMA2
DGPF SELECT PATIENT action This action protocol permits the user to select a patient within the Record Flag Assignment [DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT] option. D SP^DGPFLMA1 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPF PRF ORU/R01 EVENT event driver This protocol is the event protocol for Patient Record Flags assignment transmissions (ORU~R01).
DGPF PRF ORU/R01 SUBSC subscriber This protocol is the subscriber protocol for Patient Record Flags assignment transmissions (ORU~R01).
DGPF PRF QRY/R02 EVENT event driver This protocol is the event protocol for the Patient Record Flags query message (QRY~R02).
DGPF PRF ORF/R04 SUBSC subscriber This protocol is the subscriber protocol for the Patient Record Flags query message (QRY~R02). The protocol will return an observation results message (ORF~R04).
DGPF CHANGE ASSIGNMENT OWNERSHIP extended action This action protocol permits the user to change the site ownership of a patient's flag assignment within the Record Flag Assignment [DGPF RECORD FLAG ASSIGNMENT] option. D CO^DGPFLMA4
DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for creating, editing, and displaying patient record flags.
DGPF DISPLAY FLAG DETAIL action This action protocol permits the user to view the details of a patient record flag within the Record Flag Management [DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT] option. D DF^DGPFLF2
DGPF SORT FLAG LIST action This action protocol allows the user to select a sort criteria for the flag list within the Record Flag Management [DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT] option. The list may be sorted by flag name or flag type. D SL^DGPFLF2 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPF ADD FLAG action This action protocol allows a user to add a new Category II (Local) flag within the Record Flag Management [DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT] option. D AF^DGPFLF3
DGPF EDIT FLAG action This action protocol allows a user to edit a Category II (Local) flag within the Record Flag Management [DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT] option. D EF^DGPFLF4
DGPF CHANGE CATEGORY action This action protocol allows the user to change the category of the flag list being viewed within the Record Flag Management [DGPF RECORD FLAG MANAGEMENT] option. The user may view either Category I (National) flags or Category II (Local) flags. D CC^DGPFLF2 S VALMBCK="R"
PSO TPB EV event driver
PSO TPB SUB subscriber
IBCNE IIV VER REQUEST subscriber This is an electronic request for insurance verification for a specified patient.
IBCNE IIV REGISTER event driver This message is generated when a VISTA site installs. An Enroll message will populate the Eligibility Communicator table with all the needed information about the installing VISTA site.
IBCNE IIV MFN OUT subscriber This protocol is the client for the MFN enroll HL7 message.
IBCNE AUTO MATCH BUFFER SELECT action D SELECT^IBCNEAMC
IBCNE AUTO MATCH BUFFER LINK action D LINK^IBCNEAMC
IBCNE AUTO MATCH BUFFER MENU menu
IBCNE AUTO MATCH BUFFER EXIT action S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP INS VER SCREEN action Insurance Verification screen to display/edit eIV Site Parameters D EN^IBJPI
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR EDIT action D MP^IBJPI2
IBJP IIV GENERAL EDIT action D IIVEDIT^IBJPI2(0)
IBJP IIV PAT W/O INS action D IIVEDIT^IBJPI2(1)
IBJP INS VER MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE IIV RQV OUT event driver This protocol is for Verification Request messages.
IBCNE IIV RQI OUT event driver This protocol is for Identification messages
IBCNE IIV ID REQUEST subscriber This protocol is for identification messages.
IBCNB LIST CHECK NAMES action This action protocol will allow the user to see what insurance company names in the buffer are bad and allow for correction with the Auto Match utility. D AMCHK^IBCNBLA
IBCNE REVERIFY INSURANCE MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $D(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE SELECT INSURANCE action D SELECT^IBCNEQU D INIT^IBCNEQU
IBCNE FAST EXIT action D FASTEXIT^IBCNEQU
IBCNSC INS CO PAYER action IBCNE EIV MAINTENANCE S IBY=",7," D EA^IBCNSC1 S VALMBG=$G(IB1ST("PAYER")) S:'VALMBG VALMBG=1
IBCNE IIV TABLE subscriber This protocol handles any incoming MFN table updates.
IBCNE IIV MFN IN event driver This is the incoming MFN table server.
IBCNE IIV IN event driver This is the master incoming protocol.
IBCNE IIV RESPONSE subscriber
IBCNE PAYER MAINT MENU menu
IBCNE PAYER EXPAND action D EXPND^IBCNEPM2
IBCNE PAYER EXPAND MENU menu
IBCNE PAYER EXIT action Q Q
IBCNE PAYER LINK action This is the action protocol to link the payer with the selected insurance company. D LINK^IBCNEPM1
IBCNB ENTRY RESPONSE REPORT action This action protocol will allow the user to generate an IIV Response Report, using the associated Trace Number as input, from the Expand Entry screen. D RESP^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA)
LEXICAL SERVICES UPDATE extended action This protocol is used to notify other applications and processes ---------------- --------------------------------------------- LEXSCHG("LEX")=0 LEXSCHG("LEX")=NOW LEXICON UPDATE LEXSCHG("ICD")=0 LEXSCHG("ICD")=NOW ICD CODE UPDATE EVENT LEXSCHG("CPT")=0 LEXSCHG("CPT")=NOW ICPT CODE UPDATE EVENT NOTE: Calling application must NEW or KILL LEXSCHG. when the Lexicon Utility, ICD-9 files, or the CPT/HCPCS files are updated. When a file is updated, the file number will be added to the LEXSCHG local array: Entry Exit Package files were Updated Package Update Protocols Invoked S:'$D(LEXSCHG) XQORQUIT=1 H 2 S:+($G(XQORQUIT))'>0 LEXSCHG("LEX")=$$NOW^XLFDT
ICD CODE UPDATE EVENT extended action Protocol Event for Notifying Applications that an update to File #80 or File #80.1 has occurred. K XQORQUIT S:'$D(LEXSCHG("ICD")) XQORQUIT=1 H 2 S:+($G(XQORQUIT))'>0 LEXSCHG("ICD")=$$NOW^XLFDT K XQORQUIT
ICPT CODE UPDATE EVENT extended action Protocol Event for Notifying Applications that an update to File #81 has occurred. K XQORQUIT S:'$D(LEXSCHG("CPT")) XQORQUIT=1 H 2 S:+($G(XQORQUIT))'>0 LEXSCHG("CPT")=$$NOW^XLFDT K XQORQUIT
GMPL SELECTION LIST CSV EVENT action This protocol is invoked when a new ICD9 Code Set Version is installed. The protocol will generate a mail message related to Problem Selection Lists. The mail message will contain a list of any Problem Selection Lists that contain problems with inactive ICD9 codes attached. It will also determine if any attached ICD9 codes are due to be inactivated in the future and a report of those findings is also included. D CSVPEP^GMPLBLCK
ORCM GMRC CSV EVENT action This protocol will be invoked by the ICD event protocol upon installation of a new code set version. The protocol will be responsible for generating a mail message to a mail group containing any consult or procedure quick orders that have provisional diagnoses with inactive IDC9 codes or codes that will be inactivated in the future. D CSVPEP^ORCMGMCK
PXRM CODE SET UPDATE CPT action Search for inactive CPT codes in the Dialog file #801.41 D CPTPE^PXRMCSPE
PXRM CODE SET UPDATE ICD action Searches for all Inactive code in the Dialog file #801.41 D ICDPE^PXRMCSPE
GMRCADM SELECT NEW CSLT action This protocol is used to select a new consult on which to make administrative corrections. D NEWCSLT^GMRCAD31 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCADM EDIT ACTION action The protocol is used to select the activity on which to make an administrative correction. D SELACT^GMRCAD31 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRCAD31 ADM CORR MENU menu This menu contains the actions that may be taken for administrative corrections.
RCDPEX EOB EXCEPTION MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on EOB return messages. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPEX FILE EXCEPTION MESSAGE action This action allows a user to manually force a message to process through the EDI Lockbox ERA/EOB file process. D UPD^RCDPEX
RCDPEX DELETE MESSAGE action RCDPE ERA EXCEPT This action allows a user to manually delete a message that you either can't or don't want to continue through the EDI Lockbox message process. A bulletin is sent to alert that this action has been taken. D DEL^RCDPEX
RCDPEX VIEW/PRINT MESSAGE action This option allows the user to view an EDI Lockbox message. D VP^RCDPEX
RCDPEX EOB_SUM EXCEPTION MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on 837 return messages. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPEX EOB_SUM REMOVE EXCEPT action This action allows a user to manually delete a message that you either can't or don't want to continue through the EDI Lockbox message process. A bulletin is sent to alert that this action has been taken. D DEL^RCDPEX31
RCDPEX SUM_FILE EXCEPTION action This action allows a user to manually force a message to process through the EDI Lockbox EOB file process to store the detail data in IB. D UPD^RCDPEX3
RCDPEX SUM_VIEW/PRINT MESSAGE action This option allows the user to view an EDI Lockbox message. D VP^RCDPEX3
RCDPEX SUM_TRANSFER EOB OUT action D XFR^RCDPEX3 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on ERAs received. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST RESEARCH MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to research a payment/denial for a claim when reviewing an EOB. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE VIEW/PRINT WORKLIST EOB action This option allows the user to view the detail of a selected EOB from the list of EOB's presented in the Worklist Scratch pad function for an ERA. D PREOB^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST TPJI action This option allows the user access the third party joint inquiry (TPJI) functions for an electronic EOB's claim. D TPJI^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST REL HOLD action This option allows the user access the AR function for releasing a hold on a patient's bill(s) from within the EDI Lockbox worklist function. D RELHOLD^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST CHG MAINT action This option allows the user access to the IB options for cancel, edit, add patient charges from within the EDI Lockbox worklist function. D CHGMNT^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST FULL ACCT PROF action This option allows the user access to the AR function FULL ACCOUNT PROFILE. D FAP^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST ON HOLD RPT action This option allows the user access to the List On Hold Charges report in IB from within the EDI Lockbox worklist function. D LSTHLD^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST CL MATCH RPT action This option allows the user access to the Claims Matching report in AR from within the EDI Lockbox worklist function. D CMRPT^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST SPLIT LINE action This option allows the user to split the payment and adjustment amounts of a selected line in the ERA to redistribute the funds to more accurately reflect the disposition of the payment/adjustment. D SPLIT^RCDPEWL0
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST DIST ADJ action This option allows the user to select an adjustment line that has a negative net payment to allow this amount to be distributed to other lines so the total amount of payments received to post equals the total amount of the deposit. D DISTADJ^RCDPEWL6
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST REFRESH action This option allows the user to 'refresh' the worklist scratch pad entry to remove all previously entered edits/splits/adjustments and restore it to the state it was in before any manual changes were made. D REFRESH^RCDPEWL6
RCDPE VIEW/PRINT WORKLIST ERA action This option allows the user to view the summary or summary and detail information for an electronic remittance advice (ERA). D PRERA^RCDPEWL0
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST RECEIPT action D NEWREC^RCDPEWL4
RCDPE EOB WL RESEARCH EXIT action This option allows the user access to exit back to the ERA display menu D EXIT^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST RESEARCH action This option allows the user access to the IB options for cancel, edit, add patient charges from within the EDI Lockbox worklist function. D RESEARCH^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST SPLIT MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on ERAs received. D:$G(^TMP($J,"RCDPE_SPLIT_FILE"))&($G(VALMBCK)'="R") CHKFILE^RCDPEWL2 I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE EOB WL SPLIT LINE action D FILESP^RCDPEWL8
RCDPE EOB WL EDIT SPLIT action D EDITSP^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WL RECEIPT VIEW action D VRECPT^RCDPEWL4
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST PREVIEW MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on ERAs received. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST PREVIEW PRINT action This option allows the user to view the detail of a selected EOB from the list of EOB's presented in the Worklist Scratch pad function for an ERA. D PREOB^RCDPEWL2
RCDP RECEIPT PROFILE ERA WORKLIST action This option will allow entry into the ERA Worklist screens in view only mode. D WL^RCDPEWL2(RCRECTDA)
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST ADJUST action D ADJUST^RCDPEWL6
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST REESTABLISH action D REEST^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST BILL COMMENT action D BILLCOM^RCDPEWL2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST RECEIPT COMMENT action D RCOMM^RCDPEWL5
RCDPEX SUM_EDIT CLAIM action D EDITNUM^RCDPEX32 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
RCDPE EOB WL REVIEW action D REVIEW^RCDPEWL5
FB FEE TO FPPS EVENT event driver
FB FEE TO FPPS SUBSCRIBER subscriber
XOBV LISTENER START action This action protocol will start a single VistALink Listener. DO START^XOBUM
XOBV LISTENER STOP action This action protocol will stop a single VistALink Listener. DO STOP^XOBUM
XOBV LISTENER CONFIG action This action protocol will add/edit an entry in the VISTALINK LISTENER CONFIGURATION file (#18.03) by invoking the XOBV LISTENER CONFIG EDIT input template. DO CFG^XOBUM
XOBU SITE PARAMETERS action This action protocol will add/edit an entry in the VISTALINK SITE PARAMETERS file (#18.01) by invoking the XOBU SITE PARAMETERS input template. DO PARMS^XOBUM
XOBU FOUNDATIONS MAIN MENU menu This menu contains all the action protocols for the Foundations Management menu [XOBV SITE SETUP MENU] which is used to configure and manage VistALink Listeners.
XOBV LISTENER LOG CLEAR action This action protocol will delete non-active VistALink Listener log entries in the VISTALINK LISTENER STARTUP LOG file (#18.04). DO CLEAR^XOBUM
XOBU FOUNDATIONS MAIN REFRESH action This action protocol will refresh and redisplay the current Foundations Management screen. This is useful when checking the current status of a VistALink Listener. DO REFRESH^XOBUM
XOBU FOUNDATIONS SYSTEM STATUS action This action protocol will display the M operating system status. DO SS^XOBUM
XOBV LISTENER BOX-VOL action This action protocol will start all VistALink Listeners contained in the default configuration for the BOX-VOLUME pair whose STARTUP field is set to YES. DO BOX^XOBUM
PSB BCMA RASO17 SRV event driver This is a test event driver protocol for PSB (BCMA). This protocol is to serve the RAS/O17 event. The trigger event in general is a MEDPASS or administration of a ORDER/Medication.
PSB BCMA RASO17 SUB subscriber
MAGD APPOINTMENT action This protocol will be used with Scheduling to pass information to Imaging. D ^MAGDHOWS
MAGD RECEIVE EVENTS action This protocol will be a subscriber to the GMRC EVSEND OR protocol and is used to pass HL7 event messages to Imaging. D ^MAGDHOWC
DGRO ROM ORF/R04 SUBSC subscriber This protocol is the subscriber protocol for the Register Once Messaging query message (QRY~R02). The protocol will return a patient FDA array message (ORF~R04).
DGRO ROM QRY/R02 EVENT event driver This protocol is the event protocol for the Register Once Messaging query message (QRY~R02).
RMPR SUSP ADD AUTO action Function description To add a manual suspense, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type AD, and press 2 At the PROSTHETIC SUSPENSE DATE RX WRITTEN, you can enter T for the current date or T - # (number of days the request was actually made), and press . 3 At the Requestor prompt, type the physician name, and press 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type Y for Yes to edit the note. 5 Type a free-text note in the text editor. 6 Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" keys simultaneously to exit the text editor. A manual suspense record can be added to Prosthetics for a request for an item or service. Steps D AAUTO^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP ADD CLOTHING action Function description To add a manual suspense, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type AD, and press 2 At the PROSTHETIC SUSPENSE DATE RX WRITTEN, you can enter T for the current date or T - # (number of days the request was actually made), and press . 3 At the Requestor prompt, type the physician name, and press 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type Y for Yes to edit the note. 5 Type a free-text note in the text editor. 6 Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" keys simultaneously to exit the text editor. A manual suspense record can be added to Prosthetics for a request for an item or service. Steps D ACLO^RMPREO23
RMPR SUSP ADD CLONE action Function description To add a manual suspense, follow these steps: Step Action 1 At the Select Item(s): Next Screen//, type AD, and press 2 At the PROSTHETIC SUSPENSE DATE RX WRITTEN, you can enter T for the current date or T - # (number of days the request was actually made), and press . 3 At the Requestor prompt, type the physician name, and press 4 At the Edit? NO// prompt, type Y for Yes to edit the note. 5 Type a free-text note in the text editor. 6 Press the "Num Lock" key and the "E" keys simultaneously to exit the text editor. A manual suspense record can be added to Prosthetics for a request for an item or service. Steps D CLONE^RMPREO23
SD-PAIT-EVENT event driver
SD-PAIT-SUBS subscriber
GMRA FIX FREE TEXT LIST menu D:'$D(^XTMP("GMRAFX",LTYPE,"IDX")) LIST^GMRAFX D CHKSEL^GMRAFX
GMRA FIX ADD/EDIT ALLERGY FILE action D AEA^GMRAFX D DESELECT^GMRAFX
GMRA FIX ENTERED IN ERROR action D PROCESS^GMRAFX("E") D DESELECT^GMRAFX
GMRA FIX DETAIL LIST action D EN^VALM("GMRA FIX DETAIL") D DESELECT^GMRAFX
GMRA FIX DETAIL MENU menu D DET^GMRAFX1,CHKSEL^GMRAFX1
GMRA FIX ENTERED IN ERROR IN DETAIL action D PROCESS^GMRAFX1("E") D DESELECT^GMRAFX1
GMRA FIX UPDATE REACTANT action D PROCESS^GMRAFX("U") D DESELECT^GMRAFX
GMRA FIX UPDATE REACTANT IN DETAIL action D PROCESS^GMRAFX1("U") D DESELECT^GMRAFX1
GMRA FIX ADD/EDIT ALLERGY FILE IN DETAIL action D AEA^GMRAFX D DESELECT^GMRAFX1
GMRA FIX PATIENT A/AR EDIT IN DETAIL action D AR^GMRAFX3 D DESELECT^GMRAFX1
GMRA FIX DETAIL IN DETAIL action D DSPREACT^GMRAFX3 D DESELECT^GMRAFX1
ORRP PENDING action Display pending orders S ORPRES="7;PENDING ORDERS"
PSO TPB SD SUB action D EN^PSOTPINA
HLEM EVENTS MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for acting on lists of HL7 Monitor Events.
HLEM SELECT PROFILE action This ListManager protocol allows the user to select the HL7 Monitor Events Profile to use while working with HL7 Monitor Events Log. D SELECT^HLEMSL1
HLEM SINGLE EVENT MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for acting on a single HL7 Monitor Event.
HLEM DISPLAY EVENT action This ListManager protocol allows the user to select the a single HL7 Monitor Event for display and editing. D SELECTE^HLEMSL1
HLEM EDIT EVENT action Allows an event to be updated with notes and review status. D EDIT^HLEMSE1($G(EVENT("IEN")))
HLEM EVENT HELP action Provides detailed information and instructions for an event based on the even type. D HELP^HLEMSE1($G(EVENT("TYPE")))
HLEM DISPLAY APPLICATION DATA action Displays application-specfic data that is associated with the event. D APPDATA^HLEMSE1($G(EVENT("IEN")))
HLEM GOTO SITE action Allows a user to select a site and jumps the screen to that site. D GOSITE^HLEMSL1
HLEM EVENT STATISTICS MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for viewing HL7 Event Log Statistics.
HLEM SELECT PROFILE (STATS) action This ListManager protocol allows the user to select the HL7 Monitor Events Profile to use while working with HL7 Monitor Events Log. Called from within the Statistics screen. D SELECT^HLEMST
HLEM STATISTICS action This action will display the statistics menu. D EN^HLEMST
HLEM NEW PROFILE action This ListManager protocol allows the user to create a new HL7 Monitor Events Profile to use while working with HL7 Monitor Events Log. D NEW^HLEMSL1
HLEM EDIT PROFILE action This ListManager protocol allows the user to select the HL7 Monitor Events Profile to edit. D EDIT^HLEMSL1
HLEM CHANGE DATE RANGE action This ListManager protocol allows the user to select the starting date to use while working with HL7 Monitor Events Log. Called from withinthe Statistics screen. D CHNGDATE^HLEMST
SD ENC PERF MON ORU-R01 SERVER event driver HL7 event driver (server) protocol for transmission of Enounter Performance Monitor summary data to Austin Automation Center.
SD ENC PERF MON ORU-R01 CLIENT subscriber HL7 subscriber (client) protocol for transmission of Encounter Performance Monitor summary data to Austin Automation Center.
TIU ACTION DICTATE DOCUMENTS action Allows users to mark documents as "Dictated/Not Transcribed." NOTE: This step is only applicable when an UNDICTATED document is created in anticipation of Dictation/Transcription and Upload. D DICTATED^TIURA2
TIU BROWSE ACTION DOCUMENT DICTATED action Allows MIS clerks to mark current document as "signed on chart." D DICTATE1^TIURA2(TIUDA)
TIU ACTION MENU DICTATION menu Menu of actions supporting dictation. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
TIU BROWSE MENU DICTATION menu Menu of actions supporting dictatation. S VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions" S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION MENU TRANSCRIPTION menu Menu of actions which may be executed by transcriptionists. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
TIU BROWSE MENU TRANSCRIPTION menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$D(DIROUT) TIUQUIT=1
TIU ACTION BROWSE FOR TRANSCRIPTION action Allows users to browse through Documents from the Review Screen. In addition to scrolling sequentially through the selected documents and their addenda, the user may Search for a particular word or phrase, or Print draft copies to a selected device. D BROWSE^TIURA2("TIU BROWSE FOR TRANSCRIPTION")
MCAR ORM SERVER event driver
MCAR ORM CLIENT subscriber
PSO LM NON-VA MEDS RPT action D FULL^VALM1 D HID^PSONVARP S VALMBCK="R"
VAFC MPIPD FIELD TRIGGER action MPI/PD FIELD MONITORING D MPIPD^VAFCTR
RCDPE WORKLIST ERA LIST MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed manually on ERAs received. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE WORKLIST ERA SELECT action D ENTERWL^RCDPEWL7
RCDPE WORKLIST ERA SORT action D SORT^RCDPEWL8
RCDPE ERA LIST VIEW ERA action This option allows the user to view the summary or summary and detail information for an electronic remittance advice (ERA). D PRERA^RCDPEWL7
RCDPE ERA LIST BATCH HIDE action This action allows the user to remove from or add the batch listings for each ERA on the screen display. D BATDSP^RCDPEWL8
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST BATCH action This option allows the user access to the options for batch editing. It cannot be used if there are no batches defined for an ERA worklist entry and can only be accessed if the full ERA entry (not an individual batch) has been selected. D BATED^RCDPEWL8
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST VERIFY action This option allows the user to access the options for verifying the EEOBs against the data on the VistA system to insure the payments are being made for the correct claim. D VERIF^RCDPEWL8
PSO EXT SERVER event driver This protocol is necessary for transmission of prescription fills to the automatic dispensing machine using HL7 V.2.4 formatted messages.
PSO EXT CLIENT subscriber This protocol is used as the ACK from the external interface for an RDS_O13 message.
PSO DISP SERVER event driver This protocol is used when a dispensing system external interface sends back a dispensing message to VistA.
PSO DISP CLIENT subscriber
PSS EXT MFU SERVER event driver This protocol will be used to send even notification and data when new drugs are added to the DRUG file (#50) and when certain fields are updated in the same file. This information will be sent to the automated dispensing machines through HL7 V.2.4 formatted messages.
PSS EXT MFU CLIENT subscriber This protocol will be used as the ACK from the external interface for a MFN_M01 message.
BPSJ MFN REGISTER1 subscriber This message is generated when a VISTA site installs.
BPSJ REGISTER event driver The epharmacy event driver.
BPSJ PAYER INPUT event driver The epharmacy payer sheet event driver.
BPSJ PAYER RESPONSE subscriber RESPONSE PROTOCOL FOR PAYER SHEET INPUT.
HL CS/RQ - VIEW MESSAGE action Protocol used by the HL7 Message Requeuer to view an HL7 message. D EXPND^HLCSRES
BPS P2 UPDATE action D UPD^BPSOS2
BPS P2 CONTINUOUS action D CONTUPD^BPSOS2
GMTS HS ADHOC action Generates an 'Ad Hoc' Health Summary for specified patients. Instead of selecting a pre-defined Health Summary Type, the user defines his own ad hoc Health Summary structure for temporary use while using this option. The user selects Health Summary components, time and occurrence limits when applicable, and selection items when applicable. W ! D MAIN^GMTSADOR
BPS PROTOCOL 2 menu BPS MANAGER
BPS P2 ZERO action DO ZERO^BPSOS2A
BPS P1 EXIT action S ECMEQUIT=1 S ECMEQUIT=1
GMTS COMP DESC LIST action Lists all components which may be used to define Health Summary Types, along with the abbreviation and a brief description of each. W ! S DIC="^GMT(142.1,",L=0,FLDS="[GMTS COMP DESC LIST]",BY=.01,FR="A",TO="zzzz" D EN1^DIP S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR
IBCNR PLAN LIST menu Show a menu of actions for this option.
IBCNR PLAN ADD/EDIT action Add or edit pharmacy plan association. D SEL^IBCNRP
IBCNR PLAN DELETE action Delete pharmacy plan association. D DEL^IBCNRP
IBCNR PAYERSHEET ADD/EDIT action Add or edit test payer sheet association. D SEL^IBCNRPSM
IBCNR PAYERSHEET LIST menu Show a menu of actions for this option.
IBCNR PAYERSHEET DELETE action Delete test payer sheet association. D DEL^IBCNRPSM
IBCNR GROUP PLAN LIST menu Match Group Plans to Pharmacy Plans
GMTS HS BY PATIENT action Generates a Health Summary of a specified pre-defined Health Summary Type for a specified patient. W ! S DIC("B")=$P($G(^GMT(142,+$G(^DISV(+$G(DUZ),"^GMT(142,")),0)),U),GMTSTYP=0 S:'$D(DFN) DFN=$S($D(ORVP):$P(ORVP,";"),1:"") D SELPT^GMTS:+DFN'>0,SELTYP^GMTS Q:GMTSTYP'>0 D HSOUT^GMTS
IBCNR GROUP PLAN ADD/EDIT action Add/Edit Pharmacy Plan match to Group Plan D SEL^IBCNRPM2
IBCNR GROUP PLAN DELETE action Delete Pharmacy Plan match to Group Plan D DEL^IBCNRPM2
IBCEM COB MRA PRINT action D PMRA^IBCECOB2 S VALMBCK="R"
PSO VDEF RDE O11 OP PHARM PRES HR subscriber
PSO VDEF RDE O11 OP PHARM PRES VS event driver VistA VDEF OP Pharmacy PRES HL7 message Prescriptions
GMTS HS BY LOC action Allows user to print health summaries interactively for all patients on a specified ward or for all patients with appointments at a specified outpatient clinic on a selected day. D MAIN^GMTSPD
PSO VDEF RDS O13 OP PHARM PPAR HR subscriber
PSO VDEF RDS O13 OP PHARM PPAR VS event driver VistA VDEF OP Pharmacy PPAR HL7 Message Parital refills
PSO VDEF RDS O13 OP PHARM PREF VS event driver VistA VDEF OP Pharmacy PREF HL7 Message Refills
PSO VDEF RDS O13 OP PHARM PREF HR subscriber
GMRV ORU R01 VITALS HR subscriber
GMRV ORU R01 VITALS VS event driver VistA VDEF Vitals HL7 message
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ADV REACT HR subscriber
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ADV REACT VS event driver VistA VDEF Adverse Reaction Report HL7 message
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ALLERGY HR subscriber
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ALLERGY VS event driver VistA VDEF Allergy Update/Insert HL7 message
GMTS USER menu This menu allows the user to print Health Summaries by Patient or Hospital Location with a pre-defined Health Summary Type, or print Health Summaries for patients, based on ad hoc Health Summary definitions. The user may also use the Information Menu to list and inquire about Health Summary Types and Health Summary Components. This menu does not contain the options which allow the user to create or delete his/her own Health Summary Types.
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ADV ASSESS HR subscriber
GMRA VDEF ORU R01 ADV ASSESS VS event driver VistA VDEF Adverse Reaction Assessment HL7 message
DGFFP CHANGE PATIENT action D PAT^DGFFPLM
DGFFP LM MENU menu Main menu protocol for the Fugitive Felon patient inguiry List Manager screen
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR ADD action D ADD^IBJPI4
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR DELETE action D DELETE^IBJPI4
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR MODIFY action D MODIFY^IBJPI4
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR REORDER action D REORDER^IBJPI4
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR RESTORE action D RESTORE^IBJPI4
GMTS INFO ONLY MENU menu This menu contains options which provide information only about Health Summary Types and Health Summary Components.
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR SAVE action D SAVE^IBJPI4
IBJP IIV MOST POPULAR EXIT action D EXIT^IBJPI4
PXRM PATIENT LIST EXIT action
PXRM PATIENT LIST DISPLAY action D PLIST^PXRMLPU
PXRM PATIENT LIST MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLPU
PXRM PATIENT LIST SELECT ENTRY action This protocol is used by PXRM PATIENT LIST. The protocol is set-up by the entry action in this list. D XSEL^PXRMLPM D BLDLIST^PXRMLPM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST RULES action D ^PXRMLRM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST HEALTH SUMMARY (ALL) action D HSA^PXRMLPP
PXRM PATIENT LIST PATIENTS MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLPP
GMTS COMP INQ action This allows the user to display the characteristics of a Health Summary Component. W ! D ^GMTSCI S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR
PXRM PATIENT LIST CREATE action D START^PXRMLCR D BLDLIST^PXRMLPM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST DELETE action D PDELETE^PXRMLPU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION MANAGEMENT action D PLIST^PXRMETM
PXRM EXTRACT MANAGEMENT EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT VIEW/SCHEDULE action D HLIST^PXRMETM
PXRM EXTRACT MANAGEMENT MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMETM
PXRM EXTRACT MANAGEMENT SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMETM
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY action D TLIST^PXRMETH
PXRM EXTRACT HISTORY EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT HISTORY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMETH
GMTS TYPE INQUIRE action W ! D ^GMTSRI W ! S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR
PXRM EXTRACT MANUAL TRANSMISSION action D TRANS^PXRMETH
PXRM EXTRACT HISTORY SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMETH
PXRM PATIENT LIST CHANGE VIEW action D VIEW^PXRMLPP
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMETT
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT PATIENT LIST action D PLIST^PXRMETT(IEN)
PXRM7 RECO SERVER event driver This is the Sever Protocol that will send the Reminder Compliance HL7 messages to Austin Automation Center as well as other locations.
PXRM7 RECO SUBSCRIBER subscriber This is the Clinical Reminder Compliance Subscribing Protocol
PXRM EXTRACT MANUAL EXTRACT action D EXTRACT^PXRMETH(EDIEN)
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMETT
GMTS BLO action This component contains information extracted from the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply.Data presented include: collection date/time, lab test name, specimen, urgency, and order status (e.g., ORDERED, COLLECTED, PROCESSING, COMPLETE). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BLO",GMTSTITL="BRIEF LAB ORDERS" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM EDIT DIALOG ELEMENT action D SEL^PXRMDLG S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY FINDING TOTALS action D FLIST^PXRMETT
PXRM EXTRACT AD HOC REPORT action D GEN^PXRMETM
PXRM EXTRACT HISTORY TRANSMISSIONS action D TRHIST^PXRMETH
PXRM LIST RULE EDIT action D LREDIT^PXRMLRED
PXRM LIST RULE CREATE action D LRADD^PXRMLRM
PXRM LIST RULE CHANGE VIEW action D VIEW^PXRMLRM
PXRM LIST RULE MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLRM
PXRM LIST RULE EXIT action
PXRM LIST RULE MANAGEMENT SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMLRM
GMTS ADR action This component contains information from MAS, Pharmacy, and Dietetics packages. It provides a list of all known food, drug and environmental allergies or adverse reactions (e.g., hay fever). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ADR",GMTSTITL="ADVERSE REACTIONS/ALLERGIES" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM LIST RULE DISPLAY/EDIT action D LRINQ^PXRMLRM
PXRM LIST RULE DISPLAY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLRED
PXRM PATIENT LIST COPY action D PCOPY^PXRMLPM
PXRM PATIENT LIST OE/RR action D POERR^PXRMLPU
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION CREATE action D EPADD^PXRMEPM
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION DISPLAY/EDIT action D EPINQ^PXRMEPM
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEPM
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMEPM
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION EDIT action D EPEDIT^PXRMEPED
GMTS CW action This component contains clinical warning notes entered using the Generic is to another device type, information will include electronic signature block and date posted to ensure security of information. Progress Note package. No time or maximum occurrence limits apply to this component. Clinical Warnings are a type of progress note which includes clinical information which clinicians need to be alerted to. If this component is printed out on a CRT, information will include title, text of note, electronic signature block, and date posted. If the printout S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CW",GMTSTITL="CLINICAL WARNINGS" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM EXTRACT DEFINITION DISPLAY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEPED
PXRM EXTRACT HISTORY CHANGE VIEW action D VIEW^PXRMETH
PXRM PATIENT LIST HEALTH SUMMARY (INDIVIDUAL) action D HSI^PXRMLPP
PXRM PATIENT LIST PATIENT SELECT action This protocol is used by PXRM PATIENT LIST PATIENTS. The protocol is set-up by the entry action in this list D XSEL^PXRMLPP
PXRM DIALOG ADD ELEMENT action D ADD^PXRMDLG4
PXRM DIALOG SUMMARY action D BUILD^PXRMDLG(0)
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE CREATE action D EFADD^PXRMEFM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE DISPLAY/EDIT action D EFINQ^PXRMEFM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEFM
GMTS CN action This component contains crisis notes entered using the Generic Progress Note block and date posted to ensure security of information. package. No time or maximum occurrence limits apply to this component. Crisis Notes are a type of progress note which contains important information for anyone who deals with a patient. If this component is printed out on a CRT, information will include title, text of note, electronic signature block, and date posted. If the printout is to another device type, information will include electronic signature S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CN",GMTSTITL="CRISIS NOTES" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMEFM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE DISPLAY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEFED
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING RULE EDIT action D EFEDIT^PXRMEFED
PXRM EXTRACT FINDING GROUPS action D EFGRP^PXRMEFED
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP CREATE action D EGADD^PXRMEGM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP EXIT action
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP DISPLAY/EDIT action D EGINQ^PXRMEGM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEGM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMEGM
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP EDIT action D EGEDIT^PXRMEGED
GMTS DIET action This component contains information from the Dietetics package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: diet orders, start/stop dates, type of service (tray, e.g.); nutritional status, date assessed; supplemental feedings, start/stop dates; tube feedings, start/stop dates, strength of product, quantity ordered, and daily dosages. Note: When a time limit is selected, the data presented reflects orders initiated within the time period. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DI",GMTSTITL="DIETETICS" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUP DISPLAY MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMEGED
PXRM PATIENT LIST USER action D START^PXRMLPU(1) D BLDLIST^PXRMLPM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST USER SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMLPU D BLDLIST^PXRMLPU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST MAIN MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLPM
PXRM PATIENT LIST USER COPY action D PCOPY^PXRMLPU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST USER CREATE action D ^PXRMLCR D BLDLIST^PXRMLPU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST DEMOGRAPHIC action D DEM^PXRMLPP S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST ADD USER action D ADD^PXRMLPAU
PXRM PATIENT LIST AUTH MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLPAU
PXRM PATIENT LIST AUTH USER action Called from Clinical Reminders Patient List interface when the USR action is selected. D USER^PXRMLPP S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS BT action This component contains information from the Blood Bank module of the Lab Package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: transfusion date and abbreviated blood products (with total number of units transfused for each, e.g., RBC (2)). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BT",GMTSTITL="BLOOD TRANSFUSIONS" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM PATIENT LIST AUTH DELETE action D PDELETE^PXRMLPAU
PXRM PATIENT LIST AUTH USER SELECT action D XSEL^PXRMLPAU D BLDLIST^PXRMLPAU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST PUBLIC action D START^PXRMLPU(0) D BLDLIST^PXRMLPM S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM DIALOG OVERVIEW action D BUILD^PXRMDLG(5)
PXRM DIALOG LOCK menu D PEXIT^PXRMDLG
FHW1 protocol This is the OE/RR protocol for ordering diets. D ^FHORDW
FHW2 protocol This is the OE/RR protocol to order Early & Late trays. D ^FHOREW
FHW3 protocol This is the OE/RR option to order Isolation/Precautions. D ^FHORDW2
FHW4 protocol This is the OE/RR option for NPO Orders. D ^FHORDW1
FHW6 protocol This is the OE/RR protocol for ordering Dietetic consultations. D ^FHORCW
ORRP STATUS MENU menu This is the menu of order status groupings that may be selected for display.
GMTS CH action This component contains information extracted from the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: collection date/time, specimen, test name, results (w/ref flag: High/Low/Critical), units, and Reference range. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CH",GMTSTITL="CHEMISTRY & HEMATOLOGY" D ENCWA^GMTS
FHW7 protocol This is the OE/RR protocol for entering additional orders other than those contained in other dietetic protocols. D ^FHOROW
FHW8 protocol This is the OE/RR protocol for ordering Tubefeedings. D ^FHORTW
FHWPRO1 action This option is added to the OE/RR OROPRO menu to display the dietetic patient profile. D OE^FHORD6
FHWMAS extended action This protocol is used to process MAS events (admissions, discharges, etc.) from the MAS package. D ^FHWMAS
FHWN1 protocol D NOW^%DTC S D1=% D Q1^FHORDW1
FHWN2 protocol D NOW^%DTC S D1=%\1_".2359" D Q1^FHORDW1
FHWMENU protocol menu S FHA1=0 D ^FHVER
FH SIGNED REACTION INTERFACE action D EN1^FHWGMR
FH SIGNED REACTION CANCEL action D CAN^FHWGMR
TIU ACTION MENU CLINICIAN 2 menu Menu of actions which may be executed by clinicians. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT) S:$G(TIUGLINK) VALMSG=$$LINKMSG^TIUGR2(TIUGLINK)
GMTS CY action This component contains information extracted from the Cytopathology module of the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: collection date/time, accession number, specimen, gross description and microscopic exam (both word processing fields), ICD diagnoses, and SNOMED fields: topography, disease, morphology, etiology, and procedures. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CY",GMTSTITL="CYTOPATHOLOGY" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSU PATIENT DEMOGRAPHIC CHANGE action As an item on the DG FIELD MONITOR protocol, this protocol will call CHNG^PSUHL to flag changed patient records to facilitate the PSU PBM PATIENT DEMOGRAPHIC data extract by storing the DFN to the changed record and the date the of the transaction to the PBM PATIENT DEMOGRAPHICS file (#59.9). D CHNG^PSUHL
PSU-SITE-DRIVER event driver
PSU-SITE-SUBSCRIBER subscriber
PSU EVENT LAB action This Protocol is triggered by the LR7O ALL EVSEND RESULTS protocol. It calls a Pharmacy routine that creates an HL7 message and sends it to the national PBM Lab data data base. Q
FSC EDIT GOTO action This action allows jumping to another NOIS call from your selection. D EDIT^FSCLMP("GOTO")
FSC LIST CHANGE action This action allows changing the display to another list. D LIST^FSCLMP("CHANGE")
FSC MODIFY CHANGE action This action allows changing to another list definition. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("CHANGE")
FSC EDIT FORMAT action This action allows change the display of the NOIS call(s). D EDIT^FSCLMP("FORMAT")
FSC MODIFY REBUILD action This action allows rebuilding the calls on a list after changing the list definition. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("REBUILD")
FSC LIST VIEW action This action allows reviewing NOIS calls using the View Screen. D LIST^FSCLMP("VIEW")
GMTS MIC action This component contains information extracted from the Microbiology module of the Lab Package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data include: collection date/time, site/specimen, Parasite Report, organism(s), Mycology Report, Bacteriology Report, Mycobacteriology Report, Gram Stain Result, and remarks. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MIC",GMTSTITL="MICROBIOLOGY" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC MODIFY EDIT action This action allows editing the list definition. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("EDIT")
FSC EDIT NOTE action This action allows making a note on the NOIS call. D EDIT^FSCLMP("NOTE","USER")
FSC EDIT EDIT action This action allows editing a NOIS call. D EDIT^FSCLMP("EDIT","SPEC")
FSC LIST NEW action This action allows logging a new NOIS call. D LIST^FSCLMP("NEW")
FSC VIEW NEW action This action allows logging a new NOIS call. D VIEW^FSCLMP("NEW")
FSC EDIT NOTIFY action This action allows notifying others, flagging calls so that you can be notified, or unscheduling notification. D EDIT^FSCLMP("NOTIFY")
FSC LIST EDIT action This action allows editing selected NOIS calls using the Edit Screen. D LIST^FSCLMP("EDIT")
FSC EDIT CLOSE action This action allows closing a NOIS call. D EDIT^FSCLMP("CLOSE","SPEC")
FSC HELP (?) action This action documents that help can be made from a NOIS screen using a single question mark.
FSC HELP (??) action This action documents that help can be made form a NOIS screen using two question marks. This will display hidden actions available.
GMTS BMIC action This component contains information extracted from the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply to this component in addition to collection date/time, test name, specimen, report status, and test results. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BMIC",GMTSTITL="BRIEF MICROBIOLOGY" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC HELP (???) action This action documents that help can be made from a NOIS screen using three question marks. This will display a help frame of NOIS topics.
FSC EDIT NEW action This action allows logging a new NOIS call. D EDIT^FSCLMP("NEW")
FSC MODIFY NEW action This action allows creating a new list. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("NEW","SPEC")
FSC VIEW NOTIFY action This action allows notifying others, scheduling notification for yourself, or unscheduling notification on calls. D VIEW^FSCLMP("NOTIFY")
FSC LIST NOTIFY action This action allows sending notification to others, flagging calls you wish to be notified on, and unscheduling notification. D LIST^FSCLMP("NOTIFY")
FSC HIDDEN DEFINE LIST action This action allows reviewing and editing NOIS lists using the Modify Screen. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("DEFINE LIST")
FSC HIDDEN USER action This action is used to review and edit NOIS specialist's defaults. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("USER")
FSC LIST ADD action This action allows adding calls to the display by selecting specific calls, lists, or specifying a criteria using a query. D LIST^FSCLMP("ADD")
FSC LIST QUERY action This action allows changing the calls on the display by specifying criteria for the calls. D LIST^FSCLMP("QUERY")
FSC LIST REMOVE action This action allows removing calls from the display by selecting calls, lists, or query. D LIST^FSCLMP("REMOVE")
GMTS LO action This component contains information extracted from the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: collection date (either actual or expected), lab test, provider, accession, date/time ordered, specimen, and date/time results available. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="LO",GMTSTITL="LAB ORDERS" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC LIST SAVE action This action allows saving the calls on the display into a storage-only type of list. D LIST^FSCLMP("SAVE")
FSC MODIFY SAVE action This action allows saving the list definition. This is useful for copying another list's definition to a new list and then editing the list. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("SAVE")
FSC MENU MULTIPLE CALLS menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the Edit Screen when there are multiple calls selected.
FSC MENU HIDDEN ACTIONS menu This menu of NOIS actions diplays other actions available on NOIS screens.
FSC MENU LIST menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the List Screen.
FSC MENU LIST DEFINITION menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the Modify Screen.
FSC EDIT NEXT action This action allows going the next call in your selection. D EDIT^FSCLMP("NEXT")
FSC EDIT PREV action This action allows going to the previous call in your selection. D EDIT^FSCLMP("PREV")
FSC MENU SINGLE CALL menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the Edit Screen when there is only a single call selected.
FSC MENU VIEW menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the View Screen.
GMTS SP action This component contains information extracted from the Surical Pathology module of the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: collection date/time, accession number, specimen, gross description and microscopic exam (both word processing fields), ICD diagnoses, and SNOMED fields: topography, disease, morphology, etiology, and procedures. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="SP",GMTSTITL="SURGICAL PATHOLOGY" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC VIEW GOTO action This action allows changing the display so that a selected call is displayed. D VIEW^FSCLMP("GOTO")
FSC VIEW EDIT action This action allows editing NOIS calls using the Edit Screen. D VIEW^FSCLMP("EDIT")
FSC LIST SELECT action This action allows removing those calls from the display that do not meet a specific criteria (query), or simply selecting specific calls to remain on the list, or only those calls that are on selected lists. D LIST^FSCLMP("SELECT")
FSC EDIT OTHER action This action allows reviewing information on the call that does not concern the reported problem. Examples: when the call was last edited, scheduled notifications, audits, etc. D EDIT^FSCLMP("OTHER")
FSC VIEW FORMAT action This action allows changing the display of the call(s). D VIEW^FSCLMP("FORMAT")
FSC HIDDEN EXIT action This action is used to exit the NOIS screens and return directly to the options. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("EXIT")
FSC LIST SORT action This action allows sorting the list. The list is sorted by selected fields. The fields can be sorted in ascending or descending order. D LIST^FSCLMP("SORT")
FSC MODIFY QUERY action This action allows editing the query portion of the list definition. D MODIFY^FSCLMP("QUERY")
FSC EDIT STATUS action This action allows changing the status of the call. Closed or cancelled calls can be reopened by being changed to open. D EDIT^FSCLMP("STATUS")
FSC EDIT DUPLICATE action This action allows creating a new NOIS call by copying another NOIS call. D EDIT^FSCLMP("DUPLICATE","SPEC")
GMTS ADC action This component contains information from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: date range of admission, ward, length of stay (LOS), last treating specialty, last provider, admitting diagnosis text, bedsection, principal diagnosis, diagnosis for longest length of stay (DXLS), and seconary ICD diagnoses. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ADC",GMTSTITL="ADMISSIONS/DISCHARGES" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC LIST BATCH action This action allows editing multiple calls. Notes can be added to calls. Calls can also be closed using this action. Each call is prompted for the specified action. D LIST^FSCLMP("BATCH","SPEC")
FSC VIEW BATCH action This action allows editing multiple calls. Calls can be closed or have notes applied to calls without retyping the information. D VIEW^FSCLMP("BATCH","SPEC")
FSC HIDDEN PRINT TEXT action This action prints the display text. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("PRINT TEXT")
FSC HIDDEN PRINT SCREEN action This action prints the screen display. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("PRINT SCREEN")
FSC INSTALLS ALL action This action allows reviewing all installs for a date range. D INSTALLS^FSCLMP("ALL")
FSC INSTALLS PACKAGE action This action allows reviewing installs of a package for a date range. D INSTALLS^FSCLMP("PACKAGE")
FSC INSTALLS SITE action This action allows reviewing installs at a site for a date range. D INSTALLS^FSCLMP("SITE")
FSC MENU INSTALLS menu This menu of NOIS actions displays the actions available on the Install Screen.
FSC HIDDEN INSTALLS action This action allows reviewing site installs of packages. D HIDDEN^FSCLMP("INSTALLS")
FSC INSTALL PACKAGE action This action allows reviewing of package installs. D INSTALLS^FSCLMP("PACKAGE")
GMTS ADT action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. It can only be used with MAS Version 5 and up. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: movement date, movement type (ADM=Admission, TR=Transfer, TS= Treating Specialty, DC=Discharge), movement description, specialty, and provider. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ADT",GMTSTITL="ADT HISTORY" D ENCWA^GMTS
FSC INSTALL PATCH action This action allows reviewing patch installs. D INSTALLS^FSCLMP("PATCH")
PSO LM MULTI-RX PRINT action D QUEUE^PSOLLL7 Q
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED DETAIL DISPLAY action D SELECT^TIUSUPN("DISP^TIUSUPN1") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED UPDATE action D SELECT^TIUSUPN("UPDTDOC^TIUSUPN1") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED BROWSE action D SELECT^TIUSUPN("BROWSE^TIUSUPN1") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED MENU menu D EXIT^TIUSUPN
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED SELECT action D SELECT^TIUSUPN("ACTIONS") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU SIGNED/UNSIGNED QUIT action Q
TIU UNK ADDENDA MENU menu D EXIT^TIUADCL
TIU UNK ADDENDA BROWSE action D SELECT^TIUADCL("BROWSE") S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS CVF action This component provides a listing from the MAS scheduling module that contains future clinic visit dates, the clinic visited, and the appointment type. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CVF",GMTSTITL="CLINIC VISITS FUTURE" D ENCWA^GMTS
TIU UNK ADDENDA SELECT action D SELECT^TIUADCL("ACTIONS")
TIU UNK ADDENDA DETAILED DISPLAY action D SELECT^TIUADCL("DETDISP") S VALMBCK="R"
TIU UNK ADDENDA CHANGE VIEW action D CHNGVIEW^TIUADCL S VALMBCK="R"
TIU UNK ADDENDA FIND PARENT action D SELECT^TIUADCL("FNDPRNT")
TIU UNK ADDENDA ATTACH MENU menu D EXIT^TIUADCL1
TIU UNK ADDENDA ATTACH PARENT action D SELECT^TIUADCL("ATTACH^TIUADCL1")
XUMFX SERVER event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the MFS.
XUMF MFP MFQ event driver This protocol is Master File Parameters Query event driver for MFS.
XUMF MFP MFR subscriber This protocol handles Master File Parameters query response messages for the MFS.
XUMF MFS subscriber This protocol handles Master File Notification messages for the Master File Server mechanism.
GMTS CVP action This component contains information from the MAS scheduling module. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: past clinic visits, dates, and a visit status (e.g., NO SHOW, INPATIENT VISIT). Note: Cancellations are not shown. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CVP",GMTSTITL="CLINIC VISITS PAST" D ENCWA^GMTS
XUMFX MFQ event driver This protocol is Master File Query event driver for the MFS.
XUMFX MFR subscriber This protocol handles Master File Query messages for the Institution file.
DS Pub Man~~L event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the MFS.
DTS Term Srv~~L event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the MFS.
LA7POC ADT RTR subscriber
LA7POC1 ADT SUBS subscriber
LA7POC2 ADT SUBS subscriber
LA7POC3 ADT SUBS subscriber
LA7POC4 ADT SUBS subscriber
LA7POC5 ADT SUBS subscriber
GMTS DEM action This component contains the following patient demographic data (if available) from the MAS package: address, phone, county, marital status, religion, period of service, POW status (e.g., Y or N), branch of service, combat status (e.g., Y or N), eligibility code, current (verified) eligibility status, service connected %, eligible for care (e.g., Y or N), next of kin (NOK), NOK phone number and address. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DEM",GMTSTITL="DEMOGRAPHICS" D ENCWA^GMTS
LA7POC1 ORU-R01 EVENT 2.4 event driver
LA7POC ORU-R01 SUBS 2.4 subscriber
LA7POC2 ORU-R01 EVENT 2.4 event driver
LA7POC3 ORU-R01 EVENT 2.4 event driver
LA7POC4 ORU-R01 EVENT 2.4 event driver
LA7POC5 ORU-R01 EVENT 2.4 event driver
PRCV_IFCAP_02_EV_OBL/AMEND event driver
PRCV_IFCAP_02_SU_OBL/AMEND subscriber
PRCV 442 ITEM DELETE action This Action protocol is used to compile the values needed to prepare an HL7 message to DynaMed when the user deleted a line item number record from a purchase order. D DELJOB^PRCV442B
PRCV_IFCAP_03_EV_REC/ADJ event driver
GMTS BDEM action This component contains information from the MAS package. It provides brief patient demographic information including: address, phone number, and eligibility code (e.g., service connected 50-100%). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BDEM",GMTSTITL="BRIEF DEMOGRAPHICS" D ENCWA^GMTS
PRCV_IFCAP_03_SU_REC/ADJ subscriber
PRCV_IFCAP_01_EV_DYNAMED_UPDATE event driver Sends message from IFCAP to DynaMed for RIL and 2237
PRCV_IFCAP_01_SU_DYNAMED_UPDATE subscriber
PRCV_DYNAMED_01_SU_REQUISITION_SEND subscriber This is the receiving side of the submission of a requisition from DynaMed to IFCAP. There can be multiple items per message.
PRCV_DYNAMED_01_EV_REQUISITION_SEND event driver This sends the requisition from DynaMed to IFCAP.
PRCV 410 2237 LINE ITEM CANCEL action This protocol is called when a user, while editing a 2237, deletes a line item from that 2237. The protocol calls code that gathers values used to create an HL7 message for DynaMed notifying that system of the user's action. D CREATEM^PRCVLIC
PRCV_IFCAP_05_EV_ITEM_UPD event driver
PRCV_IFCAP_05_SU_ITEM_UPD subscriber
PRCV_IFCAP_04_EV_VEND_UPD event driver
PRCV_IFCAP_04_SU_VEND_UPD subscriber
GMTS DS action This component provides information from the MAS package about a patient's eligibility code and eligibility status (Verified), and rated disabilities, including the disability percentage and whether the disability is service connected or non-service connected. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DS",GMTSTITL="DISABILITIES" D ENCWA^GMTS
PRCV_DYNAMED_20_EV_FUND_BAL_SUBSCRIBE event driver
PRCV_DYNAMED_20_SU_FUND_BAL_SUBSCRIBE subscriber
PRCV_DYNAMED_21_EV_FUND_BAL_CANCEL_SUB event driver
PRCV_DYNAMED_21_SU_FUND_BAL_CANCEL_SUB subscriber
PRCV_DYNAMED_22_EV_FUND_BAL_DATA event driver
PRCV_DYNAMED_22_SU_FUND_BAL_DATA subscriber
PRCV_IFCAP_06_EV_IB_PROC event driver
PRCV_IFCAP_06_SU_IB_PROC subscriber
DGENUP PRINT 1010EZ-EZR action Allows the user to print a 1010EZ or 1010EZR. D PEZ^DGEN1
MHV MFN-Z01 Event Driver event driver
GMTS DD action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: Date range of admission through discharge, length of stay (LOS), Principal diagnosis, diagnosis for longest length of stay (DXLS), and secondary ICD discharge diagnoses. Note: This component provides discharge diagnoses coded in the MAS PTF file. The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DD",GMTSTITL="DISCHARGE DIAGNOSIS" D ENCWA^GMTS
MHV MFN-Z01 Subscriber subscriber
MHV QBP-Q13 Event Driver event driver
MHV QBP-Q13 Subscriber subscriber
MHV OMP-O09 Event Driver event driver
MHV OMP-O09 Subscriber subscriber
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS EXIT action Allows the user to exit the system without quitting through the hierarchy of screens, or the user can exit to the previous screen. D CKSENT^IBCEPTC3(.VALMBCK)
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS MENU menu This is the menu that contains the actions for the resubmission of previously transmitted claims. The list is generated by the user using a combination of sort and selection criteria.
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS SELECT action Allows selection of claims in the list to be resubmitted. D SELECT^IBCEPTC3
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS RESUB action Resubmits previously transmitted claims selected from the list. D RESUB^IBCEPTC3
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS REPORT action Prints the report for the list of claims in the display. D REPORT^IBCEPTC3
GMTS DC action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: date of discharge, DXLS, bedsection, disposition type, disposition disposition place, and outpatient treatment flag. Note: The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DC",GMTSTITL="DISCHARGES" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS action Displays all claims already selected but not yet resubmitted. Allows deletion of claims that are no longer desired to be resubmitted. D VIEW^IBCEPTC3
IBCE VIEW PREV TRANS BTCH SEL action Allows selection of a batch where all claims in the batch are automatically selected to be resubmitted. D SELBATCH^IBCEPTC3
HLO SYSTEM MONITOR MENU menu This is the menu for the HL7 (Optimized) System Monitor.
HLO DISPLAY PROCESSES action Displays a list of the HL7 processes. D PROCS^HLOUSR S (HLSCREEN,VALMSG)="Running Processes"
HLO DOWN LINKS action This action lists the links that have been down for more than 5 minutes. D DOWNLINK^HLOUSRA
HLO DISPLAY OUT-GOING QUEUES action Displays all the client links and their queues with pending messages. D EN^HLOUSR6 D CLEAN^HLOUSR6
HLO INCOMING QUEUES action Displays each incoming queue and a count of the messages on it. D INQUEUE^HLOUSR
HLO BRIEF SYSTEM STATUS action Provides an overview of the system operational status. D BRIEF^HLOUSR S (HLSCREEN,VALMSG)="Brief System Status"
HLO VIEW A LINK action Used to monitor in real-time the count of messages on a single link. D VIEWLINK^HLOUSR
HLO STOP SYSTEM action Shuts down the HL7 (Optimized) message system. D STOP^HLOUSR
GMTS PRC action This component contains MAS coded procedures, by admission, extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: procedure date, procedure name, and ICD-9CM procedure codes. Note: The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="PRC",GMTSTITL="PROCEDURES" D ENCWA^GMTS
HLO START MENU action This action is used to start the HL7 (Optimized) message engine. D STARTHL7^HLOPROC1 H 4 D:HLSCREEN="Brief System Status" BRIEF^HLOUSR D:HLSCREEN="Running Processes" PROCS^HLOUSR S VALMBCK="R",VALMSG="HL7 (OPTIMIZED) has been started..."
HLO TEST LINK action This action allows the user to select a link. The user is then informed as to whether or not connectivity can be established with the link. Applies only to TCP links D TESTLINK^HLOUSR S VALMSG=HLSCREEN,VALMBCK="R"
HLO MESSAGE VIEWER MENU menu This is the action menu for the List Template 'HLO MESSAGE VIEWER'.
HLO DISPLAY SINGLE MESSAGE action This action allows the user to select a message. It is then displayed. D EN^HLOUSR1
HLO TRANSMISSION FAILURES action This ListManager action displays a list of messages from the Redesigned Optimized HL7 package that failed to be transmitted. D SHOWLIST^HLOUSR2("TF")
HLO MONITOR MODE action This ListManager action allows the user to specify that the screen should operate in a dynamic mode where it is updated automatically every several seconds. D UPDMODE^HLOUSR
HLO SCROLL MODE action This ListManager action is to switch the display to automatic scrolling mode. D SCRLMODE^HLOUSR1
HLO START/STOP ONE QUEUE action This ListManager action is used to start or stop a queue. D STRTSTPQ^HLOUSR2
GMTS OPC action This component contains MAS coded surgeries, by admission, extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: surgery date, procedure name, and ICD-9CM procedure codes. Note: The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="OPC",GMTSTITL="MAS SURGERY" D ENCWA^GMTS
HLO MESSAGE SEARCH action This action allows the user to enter search criteria, then up to 200 messages that meet the criteria are displayed. D EN^HLOUSR3
HLO MESSAGE SEARCH MENU menu This is the protocol menu for the HLO Message Search Utility.
SDWL XFER REQ NEW action D EN^SDWLIFT3
SDWL XFER REQ MNU MAIN menu
SDWL XFER REQ VIEW action D EN^SDWLIFT2 D EXIT^SDWLIFT2
SDWL XFER REQ REMV action D EN^SDWLIFT4 D EXIT^SDWLIFT2
SDWL XFER REQ REMV CONF action D REMOVE^SDWLIFT4
SDWL XFER REQ MNU REMV menu
SDWL XFER ACC VIEW action D EN^SDWLIFT6 D EXIT^SDWLIFT6
SDWL XFER ACC MNU MAIN menu
GMTS TR action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: transfer date, type, destination, and provider (when available). Note: The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="TR",GMTSTITL="TRANSFERS" D ENCWA^GMTS
SDWL XFER REQ MNU VIEW menu
SDWL XFER ACC MNU VIEW menu
SDWL XFER ACC PRINT C/S action D ^SDWLIFT7
SDWL XFER ACC REJECT action D REJECT^SDWLIFT6
SDWL XFER ACC ACCEPT action D ACCEPT^SDWLIFT6
SDWL XFER REQ INAC action D ENI^SDWLIFT1
SDWL XFER REQ MNU INAC menu
HLO DOWN LINKS MENU menu This is the action menu for the List Template 'HLO DOWN LINKS'.
HLO SHUTDOWN LINK action This action is used to stop HLO messages from being transmitted to a particular the domain identified by an HL LOGICAL LINK file entry. D STOPLINK^HLOUSRA
HLO RESTART LINK action This action protocol allows the user to select an entry from the HL Logical Link file and will restart HLO messages going to the IP identfied by the link D RESTART^HLOUSRA
GMTS TS action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. Time and occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: treating specialty change date/time, new treating specialty, (admission date), and provider. Note: The occurrence limits are determined by the occurrence of admissions. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="TS",GMTSTITL="TREATING SPECIALITY" D ENCWA^GMTS
SDAM APPT TYPE VALIDATION action D EN^SDAMVSC
IBB PFSS ADT-A05 SERVER event driver
IBB PFSS ADT-A05 CLIENT subscriber
IBB PFSS ADT-A04 SERVER event driver
IBB PFSS ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber
PRC_IFCAP_01_EV_AAC event driver This protocol is used to send IFCAP procurement detail (PO details) to the Austin Automation Center (AAC).
PRC_IFCAP_01_SU_AAC subscriber This is the subscriber protocol for the HL7 IFCAP Report to Austin.
SDAM PFSS EVENT action This protocol is called as an extended action on the SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS protocol. It's calls the IBB GETACCT^IBBAPI to send or update appointment data to the PFSS external system. On new appointments, the IBB API will return the account number reference for the appointment. D EVENT^SDPFSS
PX IBB CACHE FILING EVENT action This protocol will call the PXBIBB routine if the site has implemented the COTS billing product. It will be called from the PXKMASC routine after the PXK VISIT DATA EVENT has been called. I $$SWSTAT^IBBAPI() D ^PXBIBB
MPIF POTENTIAL DUP (HELP) action Help for List Manager screen actions during Potential duplication resolution on the MPI. D HELP^MPIFD1
GMTS MED action This component contains information extracted from the Medicine package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: procedure date/time, medical procedure name, and result (e.g., normal, abnormal, borderline). Note: This component is a summary of procedure statuses. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MEDS",GMTSTITL="MEDICINE SUMMARY" D ENCWA^GMTS
MPIF POTENTIAL DUP (CMOR PDAT) action This action will allow the user to request PDAT information from the CMOR. D CMOR^MPIFD1
MPIF POTENTIAL DUP (MPI PDAT) action This action will allow the user to request PDAT information from the MPI. D MPIPD^MPIFD1
MPIF POTENTIAL DUP (SELECT PATIENT) action This action will allow the user to match to another patient on the MPI, resolving the duplicate. D SELECT^MPIFD1
MPIF POTENTIAL DUP MENU menu This menu is for the actions on the LM screen MPIF POTENTIAL DUP
BPS ECMESV1 NTE event driver
BPS ECMECL1 NTE subscriber NCPDP CLIENT
BPS PRTCL ECME USRSCR menu
BPS PRTCL USRSCR REVERSE action D REV^BPSSCRRV
BPS PRTCL USRSCR CONTINUOUS action D CU^BPSSCRCU
ORU AUTOLIST action This protocol is used to automatically update OE/RR Team Lists. It is triggered by the protocol DGPM MOVEMENT EVENTS and must be an item in that protocol. D EN^ORLP3AUT
GMTS ORC action This component contains current orders from the OE/RR package. Since the "c"=Complete, "dc"=Discontinued, "e"= expired, "?"=Flagged, "h"=Hold, "i"=incomplete, "p"=pending, "s"=scheduled. OE/RR package integrates all orders for the ancillary services, the orders will be reported in most recent orders first sequence without concern for the ancillary package the order originated from/for. Current orders are defined as those orders with an OE/RR order status other than discontinued or expired. The component information includes item ordered, OE/RR order status, start date, and stop date. OE/RR order status abbreviations include "blank"=Active, S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ORC",GMTSTITL="ORDERS CURRENT" D ENCWA^GMTS
BPS PRTCL USRSCR RESUBMIT action D RES^BPSSCRRS
BPS PRTCL USRSCR UPDATE action D UD^BPSSCRUD
BPS PRTCL USRSCR SORTLIST action D SL^BPSSCRSL
BPS PRTCL USRSCR COMMENT action D CMT^BPSCMT
BPS PRTCL USRSCR RESEARCH MENU action D RM^BPSRSM
BPS PRTCL USRSCR CLAIM LOG action D LOG^BPSSCRLG
BPS PRTCL USRSCR CLOSE action D CLO^BPSSCRCL
BPS PRTCL RSCH MENU menu
BPS PRTCL RSCH VIEW INSURANCE action D VI^BPSRSINS
GMTS RXIV action This component contains IV orders extracted from the Pharmacy package. Only time limits apply. Data presented include: start date, stop date, drug (additives), dose, status, solutions and infusion rates. Note: If no time limit is defined, only active IV orders are reported. If a time limit is defined, all IV orders which have an expiration or cancel date within the time limit range are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RXIV",GMTSTITL="INTRAVENOUS PHARMACY" D ENCWA^GMTS
BPS PRTCL RSCH VIEW ELIGIBILITY action D VE^BPSRSELG
BPS PRTCL RSCH VIEW PRESCRIPTION action D VP^BPSRSPRS
BPS PRTCL RSCH CLAIM TRACKING action D CT^BPSCT
BPS PRTCL RSCH TPJI action D TPJI^BPSRSTPJ
BPS PRTCL RSCH IB EVENT REPORT action D EVNT^BPSRSEV
BPS PRTCL RSCH ON HOLD COPAY action D OH^BPSRSHLD
BPS PRTCL RSCH RELEASE COPAY action D RH^BPSRSRLC
BPS PRTCL USRSCR CHANGE VIEW action D CV^BPSSCRCV
BPS PRTCL RSCH EXIT action
BPS PRTCL USRSCR EXIT action
GMTS RXOP action This component contains information from the Outpatient Pharmacy package. Only time limits apply. Data presented include: drug, prescription number, status expiration/cancellation date (when appropriate), quantity, issue date, last fill date, refills remaining, provider, and cost/fill (when available). Note: This component is formatted similar to the Short Medication Profile. If no time limit is defined, all orders are reported. When a time limit is defined, all outpatient pharmacy orders which have an expiration or cancel date within the time limit range are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RXOP",GMTSTITL="OUTPATIENT PHARMACY" D ENCWA^GMTS
BPS PRTCL CMT MENU menu
BPS PRTCL CMT ADD action D ADD^BPSCMT01
BPS PRTCL CMT EXIT action
BPS PRTCL USRSCR HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
BPS PRTCL USRSCR DEVELOPER LOG action D DV^BPSSCRDV
BPS PRTCL LOG MENU menu
BPS PRTCL UNSTRAND menu
BPS PRTCL UNSTRAND ALL action D ALL^BPSUSCR1 S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL UNSTRAND SELECT action D SELECT^BPSUSCR1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS RXUD action This component contains Unit Dose information extracted from the Pharmacy package. Only time limits apply. Data presented include: Drug, dose, pharmacy status, start date, stop date, and sig (which includes schedule instructions and route). NOTE: If no time limit is defined, all active orders are reported. If a time limit is defined, all unit dose orders which have an expiration or cancel date within the time limit range are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RXUD",GMTSTITL="UNIT DOSE PHARMACY" D ENCWA^GMTS
BPS PRTCL UNSTRAND PRINT action D PRINT^BPSUSCR1 S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL UNSTRAND EXIT action D EXIT^BPSUSCR
BPS VALM DOWN A LINE action D DOWN^VALM40
BPS VALM UP ONE LINE action D UP^VALM40
BPS VALM PREVIOUS SCREEN action This action will allow the user to view the previous screen of entries, if any exist. D PREV^VALM4
BPS VALM NEXT SCREEN action D NEXT^VALM4
BPS VALM PRINT SCREEN action D PRT^VALM1
BPS VALM GOTO PAGE action D GOTO^VALM40
BPS VALM FIRST SCREEN action D FIRST^VALM4
BPS VALM LAST SCREEN action D LAST^VALM4
GMTS PN action This component contains progress notes from the Generic Progress Notes Package AND progress notes from the Mental Health Package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply to this component. Data presented include: Progress note date/time, title, text of note, electronic signature block, and the note's correction text and correction date/time. Only those notes which have been signed with an electronic signature will be reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="PN",GMTSTITL="PROGRESS NOTES" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO REJECTS MENU menu
PSO REJECTS PATIENT SORT action D PAT^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECTS DRUG SORT action D DRG^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECTS REASON SORT action D REA^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECTS REFRESH action D REF^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECTS SELECT action D SEL^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECTS RX SORT action D RX^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECT DISPLAY OVERRIDE action D OVR^PSOREJP1
PSO REJECT DISPLAY RESUBMIT action D RES^PSOREJP1
PSO REJECT DISPLAY RX EDIT action D EDT^PSOREJP1
GMTS BPN action This component contains information from the Mental Health and Generic Progress Notes packages. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: Progress note date/time, title, author and last correction date/time. Only those notes which have been signed with an electronic signature will be listed. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BPN",GMTSTITL="BRIEF PROGRESS NOTES" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO REJECT DISPLAY MENU menu
PSO REJECT DISPLAY RX VIEW action D VIEW^PSOREJP1
PSO REJECT DISPLAY OUTSIDE CALL action S PSOREJRX=$P(PSOLST($P(PSLST,",",ORD)),"^",2) D OUT^PSOREJP1(PSOREJRX)
PSO REJECT DISPLAY IGNORE action D CLO^PSOREJP2
PSO REJECT DISPLAY SUSPENSE DATE action D CSD^PSOREJP2
PSO REJECT DISPLAY MENU - RESOLVED menu
PSO REJECT DISPLAY REOPEN action D OPN^PSOREJP2
IBTRED SUBMIT ECME action Triggers (re)submission the Pharmacy electronic claim through ECME. D CT^IBNCPBB(IBTRN) D BLD^IBTRED S VALMBG=7
IBCNR STATUS INQUIRY LIST menu
IBCNR STATUS INQUIRY DETAIL action D SEL^IBCNRPS2
GMTS RI action This component contains impressions from the Radiology package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: study date, procedure(s), status, and radiologist's impression (narrative). Only radiology impressions which have been verified are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RI",GMTSTITL="RADIOLOGY IMPRESSION" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBNCPDP PRTCL CT MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP PRTCL CT EXIT action
IBNCPDP VIEW ELIGIBILITY menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP PATIENT INSURANCE menu I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP VIEW INSURANCE CO action D INSVIEW^IBNCPDPV
IBNCPDP VIEW AN BEN action D NXT^IBCNSV("IBCNS VIEW AN BEN")
IBNCPDP VIEW BEN USED action D NXT^IBCNSV("IBCNS VIEW BEN USED") I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP VIEW EXP POL action D NXT^IBCNSV("IBCNS VIEW EXP POL") I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP QUIT action S VALMBCK="Q" S VALMBCK="Q"
IB PFSS DFT-P03 SERVER event driver
GMTS RP action This component contains information from the Radiology package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: study date, procedure(s) with status(es), report status, staff radiologist, resident radiologist, and the narrative fields modifier, history, report, and impression. Only radiology profiles which have been verified are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RP",GMTSTITL="RADIOLOGY PROFILE" D ENCWA^GMTS
IB PFSS DFT-P03 CLIENT subscriber
XOBV LISTENER CONNECTOR PROXY action This action protocol will allow the enter/edit of a connector proxy users. If more detailed editing of a connector proxy user becomes necessary, utilize the usual user editing options, such as the Edit an Existing User [XUSEREDIT] option located on the User Management [XUSER] menu. DO CP^XOBUM
SR RECEIVE action D EN^SRCHL7A(.XQORMSG)
IBCEM CSA RE-SORT MESSAGES action This action allows the user to re-sort the CSA status messages in the list without exiting the option. IB patch 320 added this. D RESORT^IBCECSA3
IBCEMC CHANGE MESSAGE SEARCH CRITERIA action This action provides the user the ability to modify the search/selection criteria to limit the number of status messages that are displayed and pre-selected by choosing specific status message information. D SCREEN^IBCEMCA
IBCEMC SELECT & DESELECT MESSAGES action This action allows the users to toggle the selection and de-selection of the status messages which are displayed in the list. Selected messages will have an asterisk next to the claim number. D TOGGLE^IBCEMCA
IBCEMC EXIT action This action quits the list. S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEMC REVIEW STATUS action This action allows the user to update the review status of multiple claims status messages. D REVSTAT^IBCEMCA1
IBCEMC CANCEL action This action allows the user to cancel multiple claims. D CANCEL^IBCEMCA2
IBCEMC COMMENT action This action allows the user to enter the same comment for multiple claims status messages. D COMMENT^IBCEMCA1
GMTS RS action This component contains procedure statuses from the Radiology package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: request date/ time, status, procedure, scheduled date/time, and provider name. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="RS",GMTSTITL="RADIOLOGY STATUS" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCEMC PRINT action This action allows the user to Print multiple claims from the MCS list. D PRINT^IBCEMCA3
IBCEMC RETRANSMIT action This action allows the user to retransmit multiple claims from the MCS list. D RETRAN^IBCEMCA1
IBCEMC MENU menu This is the main menu protocol for the MCS - Multiple CSA Message Management.
IBCE PRVNVA PROVINFO action D EDIT1^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV)) Q
IBCE PRVNVA NONIND MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE PRVNVA LOF ADD action D NEW^IBCEP5A($G(IBPRV),$G(IBINS))
IBCE PRVNVA LOF EDIT action D CHG1^IBCEP5A
IBCE PRVNVA LOF DELETE action D DEL1^IBCEP5A
IBCE PRVNVA LOF MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
GMTS SR action This component contains information from the Surgery package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: surgery date, surgeon, surgery report status, pre-operative diagnosis, post-operative diagnosis, surgeon's dictation, current procedural terminology operation code and text. Only surgery reports which have been verified are reported. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="SR",GMTSTITL="SURGERY REPORTS" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCEM CSA MSG MAN action D MCS^IBCECSA3
IBCE 2ND PRVCARE ADD action D NEW^IBCEPA
IBCE 2ND PRVCARE EDIT action D CHANGE^IBCEPA
IBCE 2ND PRVCARE MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNSC INS CO ASSOCIATION action S IBY=",13," D EA^IBCNSC1 S VALMBG=62
IBCNSL EXIT action S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNSL MENU menu
IBCNSL LINK action D LINK^IBCNSC02
IBCNSL UNLINK action D UNLINK^IBCNSC02
IBCE PRVNUM EXIT action D FASTEXIT^IBCEFG4
GMTS BSR action This component contains surgery report statuses extracted from the Surgery package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: surgery date, surgical procedure, and report status (e.g., COMPLETE). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BSR",GMTSTITL="BRIEF SURGERY REPORTS"
IBCE PRVINS MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE PRVFAC ADD action D ADD1^IBCEP7
IBCE PRVFAC DEL action D DEL1^IBCEP7
IBCE PRVFAC ADDITIONAL IDS action D ADDID^IBCEP7A
IBCE PRVFAC IDPARAM action D IDPARAM^IBCEP7A
IBCE PRVFAC VALFIDS action D VALFIDS^IBCEP7A
IBCE 2ND PRVCARE DELETE action D DEL^IBCEPA
IBCE PRVFAC ADDIDS MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE INSCO ID MAINT MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE INSCO ID MAINT EDIT PARAMS action D IDPARAM^IBCEPB
GMTS VS action This component contains vital measurements extracted from the Vital Signs module of the Nursing package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: measurement date/time, blood pressure (as SBP/DBP), pulse, temperature, height, weight, and respiratory rate. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="VS",GMTSTITL="VITAL SIGNS" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCE INSCO BILL PROV MAINT ADD action D ADD^IBCEPC
IBCE INSCO BILL PROV MAINT DEL action D DEL^IBCEPC
IBCE INSCO BILL PROV MAINT MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCE INSCO ID MAINT BILL PROV action D BILLPRVP^IBCEPB
IBCE PRVFAC VALF MAINT menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
GMRC SD CONSLTS SELECT STATUS action List Manager Protocol: Select a list of statuses for displaying consults still pending resolution (all consults not discontinued or complete.) S VALMBG=1,GMRCSTAT="" D NEWSTS^GMRCONS3 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC SD CONSLTS SELECT SERVICE action List Manager Protocol: Select a new service for displaying consults still pending resolution (all consults not discontinued or complete.) K GMRNOSRV D SERV^GMRCONS1 S:$D(GMRNOSRV) VALMBCK="R" Q:$D(GMRNOSRV) K ^TMP("GMRCR",$J) S VALMBG=1 D START^GMRCONS1 S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC SD OUTSTANDING CONSULTS MENU menu List Manager Protocol to print outstanding consults by service for QC purposes. In this option, ALL SERVICES is not allowed to be entered at the SERVICE: prompt.
BPS PRTCL USRSCR RESUBMIT EDITS action D RESED^BPSRES
BPS PRTCL REOPEN action D SELECT^BPSREOP1
GMTS COMP LIST action Lists all components which may be used to define Health Summary Types, along with several component characteristics. W ! S DIC="^GMT(142.1,",L=0,FLDS="[GMTS COMP LIST]",BY=.01,FR="A",TO="zzzz" D EN1^DIP S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR
BPS PRTCL REOPEN MENU menu
BPS PRTCL REOPEN EXIT action
TIUHL7 MSG MGR MENU menu D EXIT^TIUHL7
TIUHL7 MSG MGR SELECT action D ACTION^TIUHL7("SELECT") S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR VIEW action D ACTION^TIUHL7("VIEW") S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR DELETE action D ACTION^TIUHL7("DELETE") S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR BLANK 1 action S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR BLANK 2 action S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR BLANK 3 action S VALMBCK="R"
TIUHL7 MSG MGR BLANK 4 action S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS TYPE LIST action W ! S DIC="^GMT(142,",L=0,FLDS="[GMTS TYPE LIST]",BY=.01,FR="A",TO="zzzz" D EN1^DIP W ! S DIR(0)="E" D ^DIR
TIUHL7 MSG VIEW MENU menu D EXIT^TIUHL7A
TIUHL7 MSG VIEW DELETE action D DELETE^TIUHL7A S VALMBCK="Q"
TIUHL7 MSG VIEW REPROC action D REPROC^TIUHL7A S VALMBCK="Q"
TIUHL7 EXAMPLE MDM EVENT event driver
TIUHL7 EXAMPLE MDM SUB subscriber
TIUHL7 MSG MGR REFRESH action D REFRESH^TIUHL7
PXRM EXTRACT COUNTING GROUPS action D EFGRP^PXRMEFED
PXRM PATIENT LIST VIEW action D VIEW^PXRMLPU S VALMBCK="R"
PXRM PATIENT LIST CREATION DOC action Protocol for displaying patient list creation documentation. D DCDOC^PXRMLCD
PXRM PATIENT LIST EDIT action Called by Clinical Reminders patient list interface edit action. D EDIT^PXRMLPP S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS CP action This component prints all compensation and pension exams for a given patient by user-specified time and occurrence limits. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CP",GMTSTITL="Comp. & Pen. Exams" D ENCWA^GMTS
PXRM RULE SET TEST action Test the structure of a rule set. D RSTESTS^PXRMRST
XUMF QUERY EVENT event driver This protocol is the VETS data query event driver for the NTRT.
XUMF QUERY HANDLER subscriber This protocol handles Master File Query messages from the VETS service.
XUMF MD5 EVENT event driver This protocol is the VETS MD5 query event driver for the NTRT.
XUMF MD5 HANDLER subscriber This protocol handles Master File Query messages from the VETS service. It returns the MD5 value for the standard file specified in the query definition.
XUMF VETS UPDATE event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the MFS.
XUMF UPDATE subscriber This protocol handles Master File Notification messages for the Master File Server mechanism.
DGPF TRANSMISSION ERRORS MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for viewing and retransmitting PRF Rejected Status ("RJ") HL7 error messages.
DGPF TRANSMIT REJECT MESSAGE action This protocol provides the action for selecting one or more of the PRF Rejected Status ("RJ") HL7 error messages from the displayed list. The selection will trigger the retransmission of the patient's PRF Assignment and History information to the site that the rejection occurred at. D RM^DGPFLMT2 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPF TRANSMIT SORT LIST action This action protocol provides for switching the display list of PRF Rejected Status ("RJ") HL7 error messages from the default sort by patient name to the date/time error message received. D SL^DGPFLMT2 S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS DCS action This component prints all discharge summaries (including report text) for user-specified time and occurrence limits. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="DCS",GMTSTITL="Discharge Summary" D ENCWA^GMTS
DGPF TRANSMIT VIEW MESSAGE action This action protocol allows the user to select a single PRF Rejected Status ("RJ") HL7 error message from the displayed list and view the details. D VM^DGPFLMT2 S VALMBCK="R"
DGPF TRANSMIT VIEW MSG MENU menu This protocol menu provides for the selection of the action protocol to retransmit a single PRF Rejected Status ("RJ") HL7 error message while viewing the details of the error message.
DGPF RECORD FLAG QUERY MENU menu This menu protocol is used to associate the action protocols used in the Record Flag Manual Query [DGPF MANUAL QUERY] option.
DGPF DISPLAY QUERY RESULTS action This action protocol permits the user to view the details of a selected patient record flag assignment from query results within the Record Flag Manual Query [DGPF MANUAL QUERY] option. D DR^DGPFLMQ1 S VALMBCK="R"
TIU ACTION MAP TITLES action Allows mapping of Local TIU Titles to VHA Enterprise Standard Titles using the full features of the Mapper utility to assist in the choice. D MAP^TIUMAPR
TIU ACTION MENU MAPPING menu Menu of actions which may be executed to map local TIU Titles to VHA Enterprise Standard Titles. S XQORFLG("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions",VALM("MAX")=+$G(VALMCNT)
TIU ACTION CHANGE VIEW MAPPING action Allows modification of the current list of mapped or unmapped titles to include either UNMAPPED, MAPPED, FAILED attempts, or ALL Active Titles for a specified user and time range (where applicable). D FULL^VALM1,MAKELIST^TIUMLIST S VALMBCK="R",VALMBG=1
TIU ACTION MAP TITLES DIRECT action Allows users who know which VHA Enterprise Standard Title should be associated with a given local title to map the Local Title directly, without the assistance of the Mapper. D DIRECT^TIUMAPR
TIU ACTION EDIT COSIGNER action This List Manager action allows authorized users to modify the Expected Cosigner (Attending Physician for Discharge Summaries) of documents without having access to the text of the document. It is intended for Clinical Coordinators when they need to change the Expected Cosigner of a document whose text cannot be edited because it is already signed. It permits edit of unsigned or uncosigned documents of type Progress Notes, Consults, or Discharge Summaries. See USR ACTION EDIT COSIGNER. Q:$G(TIUGLINK) D EDITCOS^TIURA3
TIU BROWSE ACTION EDIT COSIGNER action This List Manager action allows authorized users to modify the Expected Cosigner (Attending Physician for Discharge Summaries) of a single document without having access to the text of the document. It is intended for Clinical Coordinators when they need to change the Expected Cosigner of a document whose text cannot be edited because it is already signed. It permits edit of unsigned or uncosigned documents of type Progress Notes, Consults, or Discharge Summaries. See USR ACTION EDIT COSIGNER. Q:$G(TIUGLINK) D EDITCOS1^TIURA3
GMTS BDS action This component prints the admission, discharge and cosignature dates, as the dictating and approving provider names, and signature status of all discharge summaries for user-specified time and occurrence limits. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BDS",GMTSTITL="Brief Disch Summary" D ENCWA^GMTS
RG EXCPT PV REJECT action This action allows the review of remote data from the Master Patient Index (MPI). When patient identity information is edited locally and sent to the MPI, it is compared to the Primary View data and must also pass specific data business rules before updating the MPI. If the local data fails, either because the Authority Score was not high enough (in comparison to Primary View) or it failed a business rule, it is rejected. This protocol allows the local facility to review the reason for the rejected data. D REJ^RGEX03
RG EXCPT BLANK1 action The purpose of this protocol entry is to control menu alignment. It contains no ITEM TEXT or MNEMONIC, as it is only a placeholder.
ORRDI SUBSCRIBER subscriber USED FOR RDI MESSAGING
ORRDI EVENT event driver USED FOR RDI MESSAGING
PSO SPEED SIG LOG REPRINT action D ST^PSOLLLHN
HLO SET PURGE action Allows the purge date/time for the message to be set. D SETPURGE^HLOUSR3
HLO SINGLE MESSAGE ACTIONS MENU menu Contains the actions that can be used on a single message that has already been selected.
RG EXCPT PV MPI PDAT action This action allows the review of remote data from the Master Patient Index (MPI). For a selected patient, the Remote Procedure Call returns the Primary View data as it currently exists on the MPI Patient Data Inquiry (PDAT) report. This protocol allows the local facility to review the Primary View data. D MPIPV^RGEX03
SDWL XFER ACC EWL action D FULL^VALM1,EN2^SDWLE6(SDWLIFTN,SDWLDFN,SDWLTY)
SDWL XFER ACC PCMM action D FULL^VALM1,PCMM^SDWLIFT6(SDWLIFTN,SDWLDFN)
GMTS EADT action This component contains information extracted from the MAS package. It is discharged. Transfers included ward location and transfer facility. Treating specialties includes Specialty Tranfers Diagnosis. Dicharges include the data in the Discharge Diagnosis and Discharges components. Following the data for each admission ICD Procedures, and ICD Surgeries will be include if present. a consolidated view of all the MAS components. It can only be used with MAS Version 5 and up. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include patient eligibility and rated disabilities. Movement data then follows with movement date, movement type (ADM=Admission, TR=Transfer, TS= Treating Specialty, DC=Discharge), movement description, specialty, and provider. Admissions include the admission diagnosis if the patient hasn't been S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="EADT",GMTSTITL="ADT History Expanded" D ENCWA^GMTS
SDSC ACCEPT action D ACC^SDSCLST
SDSC CHANGE action D EDT^SDSCLST
SDSC DETAIL action D SEL^SDSCLST
SDSC MENU menu
SDSC SEND action D REV^SDSCLST
SDSC RECORD MENU menu
PSO PMP MENU menu
PSO PMP SELECT action D SEL^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP RX SORT action D RX^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP ISSUE DATE SORT action D ID^PSOPMP0
GMTS MEDA action This component contains information extracted from the Medicine package. Data presented include: procedure date/time, medical procedure name, and result (e.g., normal, abnormal, borderline). Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MEDA",GMTSTITL="Med Abnormal" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO PMP LAST FILL SORT action D LF^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP DRUG SORT action D DR^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP STATUS GROUP action D GS^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP SIG DISPLAY action D SIG^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP PATIENT INFORMATION action D PI^PSOPMP0
PSO PMP CHANGE VIEW action D CV^PSOPMP0
PSO REJECT DISPLAY MED PROFILE action D MP^PSOREJP1
PSO REJECTS GROUP BY INSURANCE action D GI^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECT DISPLAY ADD COMMENT action D ADDCOM^PSOREJP3
PSO REJECT DISPLAY CLARIFICATION CODE action D CLA^PSOREJP1
GMTS MEDB action This is the brief procedure view defined by the Medicine View file. This output can be managed by the local IRM staff. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MEDB",GMTSTITL="Med Brief Report" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO REJECT DISPLAY HIDDEN MENU menu This is the hidden menu option for the Reject Information(UNRESOLVED) [PSO REJECT DISPLAY] ListMan screen.
PSO REJECT DISPLAY PRIOR AUTHORIZATION action D PA^PSOREJP1
PSO LM QUEUE TO CMOP action D CM^PSORESUS
PRSA SELECT RECESS WK action D SELRWK^PRSARC01("Y",.OUT)
PRSA RECESS TRACKING MENU menu
PRSA SET RECESS HOURS action D SETRECES^PRSARC03
PRSA DESELECT WEEKS action D DSELWK^PRSARC01
PRSA FILE RECESS SCHEDULE action D FLRECESS^PRSARC01
PRSA RECESS HOURS VIEW action D EN^PRSARCS
PRSA CHANGE AWS START action D EDITSTRT^PRSARC01
GMTS MEDC action This prints the full set of results which are present in each procedure. No labels will be included which have no values associated with them. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MEDC",GMTSTITL="Med Full Captioned" D ENCWA^GMTS
PRSA RECESS QUIT action S PRSOUT=1 D FLRECESS^PRSARC01
PRSA RECESS HELP action D EN^PRSARCH
PRSA RECESS SAVE AND CONTINUE action S PRSVONLY=1 D FLRECESS^PRSARC01 K PRSVONLY
PRSA RECESS VIEW MENU menu
YS MHA A08 EVENT event driver This server will be used to send A08 HL7 messages to the MHNDB.
YS MHA A08 CLIENT subscriber HL7 A08 client protocol for sending messages to the MHNDB.
PXRM EXTRACT SUMMARY DELETE action Delete an extract summary. D DELETE^PXRMETH
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z04 CLIENT H subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z04 SERVER H event driver
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z05 CLIENT subscriber
GMTS MEDF action This component provides a full report of procedures as defined by the Medicine View file. This report includes labels which have no value associated with them. Time and maximum occurence limits apply. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MEDF",GMTSTITL="Med Full Report" D ENCWA^GMTS
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z05 SERVER event driver
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z07 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z09 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z10 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z10 SERVER event driver
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z11 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z11 SERVER event driver
EAS ESR 050 ORF-Z07 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORF-Z10 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORF-Z10 SERVER event driver
GMTS PLL action This component lists all known problems, both active and inactive, for a patient. based upon ICD Text Display parameter, provider narrative unless Provider Narrative Display parameter set to NO, date of onset if problem is active, date problem resolved if inactive, date last modified, the responsible provider, and all active comments for the problem. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="PLL",GMTSTITL="All Problems" D ENCWA^GMTS
EAS ESR 050 ORF-Z11 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORF-Z11 SERVER event driver
EAS ESR 050 QRY-Z07 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 QRY-Z07 SERVER event driver
EAS ESR 050 QRY-Z10 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 QRY-Z11 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 MFN-ZEG CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 MFN-ZEG SERVER event driver
MD RECEIVE OR action This protocol receives order messages from CPRS. (IA 3135) D EN^MDWOR(.XQORMSG)
MD RECEIVE GMRC action This protocol receives messages from Consult. (IA 3140) D EN^MDWORC(.XQORMSG)
GMTS PLA action This component lists all known active problems for a patient. display ICD data based up ICD Text Display parameter, provider narrative unless Provider Narrative Display parameter set to NO, date of onset if problem is active, date problem resolved if inactive, date last modified, the responsible provider, and all active comments for the problem. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="PLA",GMTSTITL="Active Problems" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO PMP HIDDEN ACTIONS MENU menu
PSO PMP HIDDEN ACTIONS MENU #2 menu
PSO VIEW RX REJECT action D OUT^PSOREJP1(RXN)
HLO ACTIVATE/INACTIVATE action
HLO MESSAGE ERRORS action This ListManager action displays a list of messages from the HLO HL7 package that were determined to be in error. D SHOWLIST^HLOUSR2
HLO SEQUENCE QUEUES action Displays the sequence queues. D EN^HLOUSR4
HLO SEQUENCE QUEUE MENU menu This menu has actions that can be performed on a sequence queue.
HLO ADVANCE SEQUENCE QUEUE action This action advances a sequence queue to the next message. D ADVANCE^HLOUSR4
DG HOME TELEHEALTH ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber HL7 subscriber (client) protocol for transmission to AAC's VIE server.
DG HOME TELEHEALTH ADT-A04 SERVER event driver HL7 subscriber (server) protocol for transmission to AAC's VIE server.
GMTS PLI action This component lists all known inactive problems for a patient. display ICD data based upon ICD Text Display parameter, provider narrative unless Provider Narrative Display parameter set to NO, date of onset if problem is active, date problem resolved if inactive, date last modified, the responsible provider, and all active comments for the problem. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="PLI",GMTSTITL="Inactive Problems" D ENCWA^GMTS
DG HOME TELEHEALTH ADT-A03 SERVER event driver HL7 subscriber (server) protocol for transmission to AAC's VIE server.
DG HOME TELEHEALTH ADT-A03 CLIENT subscriber HL7 subscriber (client) protocol for transmission to AAC's VIE server.
IBCEM ENTER COMMENTS action D CMNTW^IBCECOB6
IBCEM VIEW COMMENTS action D EN^IBCECOB6
IBCEM COB COMMENTS menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCEM MRA STATUS action D STATUS^IBCECOB6
IBCEM ENTER COMMENTS 1 action D CMNTV^IBCECOB6
IBCE PRVCARE DELETE action D DELETE^IBCEP4A(0)
IBCE PRVNVA NP PO action D EDITID^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV),1) Q
IBCE PRVNVA NP PI action D EDITID^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV),2) Q
GMTS MHPE action The Mental Health Physical Exam component contains the results of the physical examintation concerning patient's overall condition associated with the systems identified. This data is being extracted from the Medical Record (# 90) file. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="MHPE",GMTSTITL="MH Physical Exam" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCE PRVNVA NF LO action D EDITID^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV),1) Q
IBCE PRVNVA NF LI action D EDITID^IBCEP8($G(IBNPRV),2) Q
RA SCIMAGE ORM subscriber
RA SCIMAGE ORU subscriber
RA SCIMAGE TCP SERVER RPT event driver
RA SCIMAGE TCP REPORT subscriber
MHV RTB-K13 Event Driver event driver
MHV RTB-K13 Subscriber subscriber
MHV ORP-O10 Event Driver event driver
MHV ORP-O10 Subscriber subscriber
GMTS SW action This component provides information from the Social Work package about a patient's Social/Family Relationship, Current Substance Abuse Problems, and Psycho-Social Assessment. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="SW",GMTSTITL="Social Work" D ENCWA^GMTS
LA7UI ORM-O01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Q Q
LA7UI ORM-O01 SUBS subscriber Subscriber protocol for LA7UI ORM events.
LA7UI1 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI ORU-R01 SUBS subscriber Subscriber protocol for LA7UI ORU events.
LA7UI2 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI3 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI4 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI5 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2. Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI6 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI7 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
GMTS CD action This component contains advance directive electronic signature block, and date/time posted. notes entered using the Generic Progress Note package. Time and maximum occurrent limits apply to this component. Advance Directives are a type a progress note which includes clinical information that clinicians need to be alerted to. If this component is printed to either a CRT or another device type, information will include title, text of note, S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="CD",GMTSTITL="Advance Directive" D ENCWA^GMTS
LA7UI8 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI9 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
LA7UI10 ORU-R01 EVENT event driver Event driver for Lab Universal Interface (HL7 v1.6 upgrade) using HL7 messaging v2.5.1 Uses the LA7UIx naming convention, where x is an integer. This allows sites to support more than one Generic Interface Manager (GIM).
XUS NPI EXTRACT INPUT event driver The XUS NPI EXTRACT REPORT event driver.
XUS NPI EXTRACT RESPONSE subscriber RESPONSE PROTOCOL FOR XUS NPI EXTRACT INPUT.
PSO LM FLAG action This option allows the user to flag/unflag an Outpatient Pharmacy prescription. D FLAG^PSOORFL
TIUHL7 HTAPPL ACK EVT event driver
TIUHL7 HTAPPL ACK SUB subscriber
PSO REJECT TRICARE MENU menu
PSO REJECT FILL RX action D FILL^PSOREJP3
GMTS EM action This component contains information extracted from the Electron Microscopy module of the Lab package. Time and maximum occurrence limits apply. Data presented include: collection date/time, accession number, specimen, gross description, microscopic exam, supplementary report description, brief clinical history, and EM Diagnosis. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="EM",GMTSTITL="Electron Microscopy" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSO REJECT DISCONTINUE action D DC^PSOREJP3
PSO REJECTS HIDDEN ACTIONS #1 menu
PSO REJECTS TRICARE ON/OFF action D TRICTOG^PSOREJP0
MHVSM QRY-A19 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM QRY-A19 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM MDM-T02 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM MDM-T02 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM ADR-A19 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM ADR-A19 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM QBP-Q11 Subscriber subscriber
GMTS HF action This component lists all the health factors associated with a particular patient for user-specified time and occurrence limits. The list will display health factors by category and include a level of severity for each health factor including Minimal(M), Moderate(MO), and Heavy/Severe(H). Set the occurrence limit to 1 to list the latest unique health factors within each category. (E.g. If there were 12 "Non-Smoker" health factor entries, only the latest "Non-Smoker" entry would display.) S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="HF",GMTSTITL="Health Factors" D ENCWA^GMTS
MHVSM QBP-Q11 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM RSP-K11 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM RSP-K11 Subscriber subscriber
HLO APPLICATION ERRORED MESSAGES action This ListManager action displays a list of messages from the HLRO HL7 package that were determined by the receiving application to be in error. D SHOWLIST^HLOUSR2("AE")
HLO MESSAGE REPROCESS action Used to reprocess the message being viewed in the Message Viewer D REPROC^HLOUSR3
HLO MESSAGE RESEND action Used to resend the message being displayed in the Message Viewer. D RESEND^HLOUSR3
HLO SEQUENCE DELETE action This action deletes a specified sequence queue. D SPURGE^HLOUSR7
HLO OUTBOUND DELETE action This action deletes messages from a specified queue. D OPURGE^HLOUSR7
HLO DISPLAY OUT-GOING QUEUE MENU menu Menu for the outbound queue viewer.
HLO DELETE TOP MESSAGE action Deletes the top message on a queue (no purge). D DELTOP^HLOUSR6
GMTS OE action This component lists outpatient diagnosis (ICD-9) and procedure (CPT) for a particular patient. The user can specify item and occurrence limits, whether hospital location should be displayed or not, the format of ICD-9 data (e.g. code only, long text, short text or no ICD-9 data), and whether the provider narrative should be displayed or not. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="OE",GMTSTITL="Outpatient Encounter" D ENCWA^GMTS
HLO VISUAL PARSER action Parses a message and displays its parts to the user. D PARSE^HLOPRSR1(.SEGS)
PSN NEW CLASS extended action D ^PSNEWCLS K ^TMP("PSN",$J) S ZTREQ="@"
WII LM MENU menu This protocol controls the main list manager menus displayed to the user. This protocol is called from the option WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS.
WII PRINT LIST action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to print the approved entries. D PL^WIILM01 S VALMBCK="R"
WII REMOVE ENTRY action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to remove entries from the list. Note that the entries are not deleted from the file but marked with a status of Transmission Not Approved. D RM^WIILM01 S VALMBCK="R"
WII EXPAND ENTRY action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to expand the details of a single entry on the pending approval list. D EX^WIILM02 K ^TMP($J,"WIIELG") S VALMBCK="R"
WII ADD ENTRY action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to manually add an entry into the WII ADMISSIONS DISCHARGES file (#987.5) in the case that an admission or discharge did not get collected by the weekly back ground job (WII BUILD ADT EVENTS). D ADD^WIILM02 S VALMBCK="R" D CLEAN^VALM10,INIT^WIILM
WII LM STS 2 MENU menu This protocol controls the rollback list manager menus displayed to the user. It is attached to the WII LM MENU protocol. The following protocols are included in this protocol.
WII DFAS STS 2 LIST action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to review entries that have been selected for transmission to the repository. D CLEAN^VALM10,EN^VALM("WII LM STS 2 REVIEW") D CLEAN^VALM10,INIT^WIILM
WII PENDING RBCK action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII LM STS 2 MENU. Its function allows users to roll back entries that have been selected to transmit to the repository but have yet been sent. D PD^WIILM01 S VALMBCK="R"
GMTS NTM action This component lists measurements (e.g. blood pressure, height, weight, respirations, etc.) in a non-tabular format for a particular patient for a user-specified time and occurrence limits. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="NTM",GMTSTITL="Non-Tabular Measurem" D ENCWA^GMTS
WII DFAS STS 3 LIST action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to delete the approved entries off the approved listed. D CLEAN^VALM10,EN^VALM("WII LM STS 3 REVIEW") D CLEAN^VALM10,INIT^WIILM
WII LM STS 3 MENU menu This protocol controls the Transmission Not Approved displayed to the user. This protocol is attached to the WII LM MENU protocol.
WII APPROVE action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII REVIEW ADT EVENTS option. Its function allows users to approve entries that have been collected by the weekly back ground process (WII BUILD ADT EVENTS). The approved entries are sent to the repository when the user exits the WII REVIEW ADT option. D TR^WIILM01 S VALMBCK="R"
WII PENDING RBCK3 action This protocol is a list manager action item located on the WII LM STS 3 MENU. Its function allows users to roll back entries that have been flagged NOT to transmit D PD3^WIILM01 S VALMBCK="R"
PSO FILL/RELEASE DATE DISPLAY action D RFDSP^PSOLMUTL
LR7O VBECS RECEIVE action D EN1^LR7OVB(.XQORMSG)
VBECS OMG SERVER event driver This protocol is triggered when an order update message is sent from VBECS to CRPS.
VBECS OMG CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A08 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A40 CLIENT subscriber
GMTS IM action This component lists the immunizations (e.g., Rubella, Samllpox, etc.) and information about each immunization adminstered to a particular patient. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="IM",GMTSTITL="Immunizations" D ENCWA^GMTS
VBECS ADT-A08 ROUTER subscriber
VBECS ADT-A08 SERVER event driver
VBECS ADT-A40 SERVER event driver
OR OMG SERVER event driver This protocol is triggered whenever an order for a Blood Bank component class or diagnostic test is created in CPRS. Q Q
OR OMG CLIENT subscriber
PSA RET DRG BATCH LIST MENU menu
PSA RET DRG SELECT BATCH action D SEL^PSARDCBL
PSA RET DRG ADD BATCH action D ADD^PSARDCBL
PSA RET DRG CONTRACTOR ADD/EDIT action D CMF^PSARDCBL
PSA RET DRG BATCH MENU menu
GMTS ST action This component lists the skin tests and the results (e.g. positive, negative, doubtful, or no take) for a particular patient. Some examples of skin tests are cocci, mon-vac, PPD, schick, tine, etc. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ST",GMTSTITL="Skin Tests" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSA RET DRG ADD ITEM action D ADD^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG CANCEL BATCH action D CAN^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG EDIT BATCH action D EDT^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG PICKUP BATCH action D PKP^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG BATCH CREDIT UPDATE action D CRE^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG SELECT ITEM action D SEL^PSARDCBA
PSA RET DRG ITEM MENU menu
PSA RET DRG EDIT ITEM action D EDT^PSARDCIT
PSA RET DRG CANCEL ITEM action D CAN^PSARDCIT
PSA RET DRG ITEM CREDIT UPDATE action D CRE^PSARDCIT
GMTS LH action This component lists directions to a particular patient's home. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="LH",GMTSTITL="Location of Home" D ENCWA^GMTS
PSA RET DRG COMPLETE BATCH action D COM^PSARDCBA
BPS PRTCL USRSCR REOPEN CLOSED CLAIMS action D EUSCREOP^BPSREOP1
BPS PRTCL RSCH GRPL menu D FULL^VALM1 S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL IBCNR EDIT PLAN action IBCNR E-PHARMACY SUPERVISOR This option allows the user to edit the PLAN APPLICATION sub-file (#366.033). Specific to e-Pharmacy. D ^IBCNRE4 S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL IBCNR PLAN MATCH action IBCNR E-PHARMACY SUPERVISOR This option allows a user to match a GROUP INSURANCE PLAN file (#355.3) record to a PHARMACY PLAN file (#366.03) record. D EN^IBCNRPMT S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL IBCNR GROUP PLAN MATCH action IBCNR E-PHARMACY SUPERVISOR This option allows a user to match multiple GROUP INSURANCE PLAN file (#355.3) records to a PHARMACY PLAN file (#366.03) record. D EN^IBCNRPM1 S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL USRSCR PHARM WRKLST action D EN^BPSWRKLS
IBNCR PATIENT ROI menu
IBNCR ADD ROI action D AD^IBNCPDR2
IBNCR VIEWEDIT ROI action D VP^IBNCPDR5
GMTS EDL action This component lists the latest patient education for each topic and a brief assessment of the patient's understanding of the topic for a particular patient for a user-specified time limit. Some examples of topics are complications, diet, disease process, exercise, follow-up care, general information, lifestyle adaptations, medications, nutrition, smoking, etc. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="EDL",GMTSTITL="Education Latest" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBNCR EDIT ROI INFO action D EN^IBNCPDR1
IBNCR ROI EXP MENU menu
PSO RDI VISITS MENU menu Display for remote data interoperability medication data.
PSO RDI REMOTE action This option allows the user to display the pharmacy data from other facilities only. D REMOTE^PSORMRX
PSO RDI BOTH action This option allows the user to display pharmacy data for both local and other facilities. D BOTH^PSORMRX
IBJP IB PAY-TO PROVIDER DIVISIONS action D EN^IBJPS4(0)
IBJP IB PAY-TO PROVIDER EDIT action D PRVEDIT^IBJPS3(0)
IBJP IB PAY-TO PROVIDER DEL action D PRVDEL^IBJPS3(0)
IBJP IB PAY-TO PROVIDER ADD action D PRVADD^IBJPS3(0)
IBJP IB PAY-TO PROVIDERS MENU menu
GMTS OD action This component lists outpatient diagnosis (ICD-9) for a particular patient. The user can specify time and occurrence limits, whether hospital location should be displayed or not, the format of ICD-9 data (e.g. code only, long text, short text or no ICD-9 data), and whether the provider narrative should be displayed or not. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="OD",GMTSTITL="Outpatient Diagnosis" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBJP IB PAY-TO DIVISION ADD action D DIVADD^IBJPS4(0)
IBJP IB PAY-TO ASSOCIATIONS MENU menu
SDRR EVENT action This protocol will hang off SDAM menu - it is used for the RECALL REMINDER project. This protocol will allow for user to enter or edit information that has been stored in the RECALL REMINDERS file. D SDAM^SDRR1 I $G(SDDIK)>0 N DIK,DA S DIK="^SD(403.5,",DA=SDDIK D ^DIK K SDDIK,DA,DIK W !!?10,"No Recall Record created." H 2
PXRM PSN EVENT action This is the Clinical Reminders protocol for capturing NDF PSNS events. It should be attached to the PSN NEW CLASS protocol. D PSNEVENT^PXRMPSN
XUMF MFS EVENTS extended action This protocol allows applications to subscribe to MFS update (push and unsolicited updates) events. I $T(MFSEXIT^HDISVAP)'="" D MFSEXIT^HDISVAP
PSS MED ROUTE RECEIVE action This protocol processes updates to the Standard Medication Routes (#51.23) File. D ^PSSMRTUP
LA7 LAB RESULTS AVAILABLE (EVN) event driver A VistA Laboratory package HL7 ORU result message is created and sent The following subscripts are supported by the event: "CH", "MI", "SP", "CY", "EM". by the HL package for transmission to any subscribers of event protocol LA7 LAB RESULTS AVAILABLE (EVN). It provides the capability for the generation of a Laboratory HL7 ORU message containing patient laboratory results to subscribers of the HL7 event protocol LA7 LAB RESULTS AVAILABLE (EVN) as these results are made available within the Laboratory package.
LA7 LAB RESULTS TO HDR (SUB) subscriber This protocol should be attached to the HL7 event protocol LA7 LAB the router to determine which Laboratory package subscript should be sent to the HDR. The following subscripts are supported by the event: "CH", "MI", "SP", "CY", "EM". Examples: ROUTING LOGIC: D RTR^LA7HDR("CH;") will only send to HDR results associated with Laboratory "CH" subscript. RESULTS AVAILABLE (EVN). See this protocol for further information. ROUTING LOGIC: D RTR^LA7HDR("MI;") will only send to HDR results associated with Laboratory "MI" subscript. ROUTING LOGIC: D RTR^LA7HDR("CH;MI;") will only send to HDR results associated with Laboratory "CH", and "MI" subscripts. ROUTING LOGIC: D RTR^LA7HDR("CH;MI;SP;") will only send to HDR results associated with Laboratory "CH", "MI", and "SP" subscripts. ROUTING LOGIC: D RTR^LA7HDR("CH;MI;SP;CY;EM;") will send to HDR results associated with all Laboratory subscripts currently supported. Note: The order of the subscripts listed in the input parameter is not significant. Separating the subscripts using the ";" character is significant. This subscriber protocol is used by the Laboratory package to indicate to the HL package to send laboratory results to the VA Health Data Repository (HDR). It utilizes the "Router" Subscriber Protocol supported by the VistA HL package. The routing logic uses the value of the parameter passed into
LA7 LAB RESULTS ACTION action Action protocol to setup sending lab results to HL7 message subscribers via protocol LA7 LAB RESULTS AVAILABLE (EVN) - Lab Results Available Event. This protocol should be attached to protocol LAB RESULTS => EXTERNAL PACKAGE [LR7O ALL EVSEND RESULTS] which is an extended action protocol triggered by the lab result verification process. D QUEUE^LA7HDR
RG EXCPT BLANK2 action The purpose of this protocol entry is to control menu alignment. It contains no ITEM TEXT or MNEMONIC, as it is only a placeholder.
GMTS EXAM action This component lists the latest examination information and results for a particular patient for a user-specified time limit. Some examples of exam types are eye exams, ear exams, neurological exams, pelvis exams, etc. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="EXAM",GMTSTITL="Exams Latest" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCNSM RX COB DETERMINATION action D EN^IBNCPDS1
IBCNE JT VIEW EXP ELIG BEN SCREEN action This is the action protocol for the Expanded eligibility/benefits screen used from TPJI - Third Party Joint Inquiry. D EBJT^IBCNES2
IBCNE SV VIEW EXP ELIG BEN SCREEN action This is the action protocol for the Expanded eligibility/benefits screen used from the edit/view patient insurance options. D EBSV^IBCNES2 I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE ELIG BEN INFO MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE AB VIEW EXP ELIG BEN SCREEN action This is the action protocol for the Expanded eligibility/benefits screen used from the edit/view Annual Benefits lists/menu protocols. D EBAB^IBCNES2 I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE VP VIEW EXP ELIG BEN SCREEN action This is the action protocol for the Expanded eligibility/benefits screen used from the VP - view/edit insurance policy action on the pt. insurance screens. D EBVP^IBCNES2 I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCNE JT COVERAGE LIMIT DATE RANGE action This is the action protocol in order to adjust the date range for the display of the plan coverage limitations from the Third Party Joint Inquiry - Claim Information - VP view policy screen. D CL^IBCNSC41 D BLD^IBCNSP S VALMBG=$G(IB1ST("PLIM"))
IBCNB LIST POSITIVE VIEW action Positive Buffer View. K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(1)
IBCNB LIST NEGATIVE VIEW action Negative Buffer View. K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(2)
IBCNB LIST MEDICARE VIEW action Medicare Buffer View. K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(3)
GMTS TP action This component lists treatments provided that are not covered in the IDC-9-CM procedures for a particular patient for user specified time and occurrence limits. Some example of treatment types include nursing activities such as ear irrigation, dental care instructions, or preventive health care counseling. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="TP",GMTSTITL="Treatments Provided" D ENCWA^GMTS
IBCNB EXPAND BENEFITS action D EN^IBCNBLB
EDP MONITOR action This protocol monitors ordering events for the Emergency Department tracking board. It is placed on the * EVSEND OR protocols to check for updates being sent from ancillary packages to order entry; it monitors when orders are transmitted and when orders are completed. D EN^EDPFMON(.XQORMSG)
EDP CHECK-IN action This protocol will monitor Scheduling events for patients being checked-in to the Emergency Department. It is placed on the SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS protocol. D SDAM^EDPFMON
EDP OR MONITOR action This protocol monitors ordering events for the Emergency Department tracking board. It is placed on the OR EVSEND * protocols to look for order numbers assigned to new orders placed from the ancillary packages. D ENOR^EDPFMON(.XQORMSG)
EDP NEW PATIENT extended action This extended action protocol will be processed when a new patient is SDT = Time In SDCL = Hospital Location file #44 ien SDATA = ^DFN ^ SDT ^ SDCL SDAMEVT = 1 (unscheduled new visit) added to the EDIS Patient Board. Items added to this event may look for: EDPDATA = ED Log ien ^ DFN ^ Time In ^ Hospital Location ien To support some devices that previously monitored SDAM APPOINTMENT EVENTS, the following variables will also be defined: DFN = Patient file #2 ien
EDPF ADD BOARD action This action adds a display board. D ADD^EDPBKS
EDPF REMOVE BOARD action This action removes a display board. D REM^EDPBKS
EDPF CHANGE BOARD action This action can change a computer name or display board. D CHG^EDPBKS
EDPF SELECT DIVISION action This action allows the editor to switch to values for another division. D NEWDIV^EDPBKS
GMTS BADR action This component provides patient allergy/adverse reaction information from the Allergy Tracking System. It provides a list of all known food, drug and environmental allergies or adverse reactions (e.g., hay fever). S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="BADR",GMTSTITL="Brief Adv React/All" D ENCWA^GMTS
EDPF BIGBOARD MENU menu This is the menu of actions for the EDPF BIGBOARD KIOSK list template, which allows editing of the parameter of the same name.
EDPF BLANK 1 action Displays a blank line; used for whitespace on menus. (Item text is 3 spaces.)
EDPF BLANK 2 action Displays a blank line; used for whitespace on menus. (Item text is 3 spaces.)
EDPF BLANK 3 action Displays a blank line; used for whitespace on menus. (Item text is 3 spaces.)
EDPF QUIT action This action exits the list template. Q
XUMF 04 MFN event driver This protocol is the Master File Notification event driver for the Institution file.
XUMF 04 MFK subscriber This protocol handles Master File Notifications for the Institution file.
XUMF 04 MFQ event driver This protocol is Master File Query event driver for the Institution file.
XUMF 04 MFR subscriber This protocol handles Master File Query messages for the Institution file.
XOBU TERMINATE CONNECTION MANAGER action DO VLEN^XOBUZAP1 SET VALMBCK="R"
GMTS ED action This component lists the patient education topics and a brief assessment of the patient's understanding of the topic for a particular patient for user-specified time and occurrence limits. Some examples of topics are complications, diet, disease process, exercise, follow-up care, general information, etc. lifestyle adaptations, medications, nutrition, smoking, etc. S:'$D(DFN)&$D(ORVP) DFN=+ORVP S GMTSPRM="ED",GMTSTITL="Education" D ENCWA^GMTS
XOBU TERMINATE ALL JOBS action Allows user to terminated all the Cache jobs in the list. DO TERMALL^XOBUZAP
XOBU TERMINATE A JOB action Allows user to terminated one Cache job from the list. DO TERMPID^XOBUZAP
XOBU TERMINATE SYSTEM STATUS action This action protocol will display the M operating system status. DO SS^XOBUZAP
XOBU TERMINATE JOBS REFRESH action Allows user to refresh the list to remove jobs that have been terminated using other actions and to build list from the most current Cache job list. DO REFRESH^XOBUZAP
XOBU TERMINATE JOBS UTILITY MENU menu This general purpose tool helps sites terminate Cache jobs in a specified the utility before the utility can display the jobs that meet the criteria. For example, for VistALink the code that executes the utility is the following: VL ; -- entry point for VistALink socket job cleanup NEW XOBSEL DO VLSEL(.XOBSEL) DO EN^XOBUZAP(.XOBSEL) state and routine. QUIT ; VLSEL(XOBSEL) ; -- setup VistALink connection socket job selection ; criteria ; -- routine name the job should be executing SET XOBSEL("ROUTINE")="XOBVSKT" ; -- state the routine should be in ; A list of valid jobs sates can be found at STATE^XOBUZAP / 5 = READ SET XOBSEL("STATE")=5 ; -- optional title to be used by ListManager SET XOBSEL("TITLE")="VL/J2M Connection Terminator" QUIT ; Cluster Note: The utility must be run in the namespace on each box in a cluster. The immediate use for the utility is help sites terminate socket connections for VistALink and Broker. It would be used during VistALink and Broker upgrades to safely terminate connection jobs in a 'READ' state. It is up to these applications to supply the necessary option that accesses this utility. They must specific the job selection criteria to
PRS B02 SERVER HLO MPI event driver This is the SERVER protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B02 UPDATE Person messages to MPI
PRS B02 CLIENT HLO MPI subscriber This is the CLIENT protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B02 Update Person messages to MPI
PRS B02 SERVER event driver Provides PMU B02 HL7 messages to the Person Service based on modifications to the PAID EMPLOYEE file.
PRS B02 CLIENT subscriber
PRS B01 SERVER HLO MPI event driver This is the Server protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B01 Add Person messages to MPI to get the person enumerated
VALM EDITOR action D EDITOR^VALMW2
PRS B01 CLIENT HLO MPI subscriber This is the CLIENT protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B01 Add Person messages to MPI to get the person enumerated
PRS B01 SERVER event driver Provides PMU B01 HL7 messages to the Person Service based on adds to the PAID EMPLOYEE file.
PRS B01 CLIENT subscriber
XUPS B01 SERVER event driver Provides PMU B01 HL7 messages to the Person Service based on adds to the New Person file.
XUPS B01 CLIENT subscriber
XUPS B02 CLIENT subscriber
XUPS B02 SERVER event driver Provides PMU B02 HL7 messages to the Person Service based on modifications to the New Person file.
XUPS B01 SERVER HLO MPI event driver This is the Server protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B01 Add Person messages to MPI to get the person enumerated
XUPS B01 CLIENT HLO MPI subscriber This is the CLIENT protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B01 Add Person messages to MPI to get this person enumerated
XUPS B02 CLIENT HLO MPI subscriber This is the CLIENT protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B02 Update Person messages to MPI
VALM NEXT SCREEN action This action will allow the user to view the next screen of entries, if any exist. D NEXT^VALM4
XUPS B02 SERVER HLO MPI event driver This is the SERVER protocol that will be used to serve PMU-B02 UPDATE Person messages to MPI
XOBW WEB SERVER MENU menu This protocol is the menu associated with the ListMan template that is used to manage web servers. This menu contains the suite of maintenance actions.
XOBW WEB SERVER EDIT action This protocol allows the user to edit a WEB SERVER (#18.12) entry. DO EDIT^XOBWU
XOBW WEB SERVER ADD action This protocol allows the user to add a new WEB SERVER (#18.12) entry. DO ADD^XOBWU
XOBW WEB SERVER DELETE action This protocol allows the user to delete a WEB SERVER (#18.12) entry. DO DEL^XOBWU
XOBW WEB SERVER TESTER action This protocol executes the ListMan template that allows the user to test connectivity to a selected web server. Note: This protocol has a SCREEN that checks to see if the HWSC sample SOAP web service is installed. DO WST^XOBWU
XOBW WEB SERVICE MENU menu This protocol is the menu associated with the ListMan template that is used to manage web service metadata. This menu contains the suite of maintenance actions.
XOBW WEB SERVICE ADD action This protocol allows the user to add a new WEB SERVICE (#18.02) entry. DO ADD^XOBWUS
XOBW WEB SERVICE EDIT action This protocol allows the user to edit a WEB SERVICE (#18.02) entry. DO EDIT^XOBWUS
XOBW WEB SERVICE DELETE action This protocol allows the user to delete a WEB SERVICE (#18.02) entry. DO DEL^XOBWUS
VALM PREVIOUS SCREEN action This action will allow the user to view the previous screen of entries, if any exist. D PREV^VALM4
XOBW WEB SERVICE MANAGER action This protocol executes the ListMan template that allows the user to maintain web service metadata. DO WSM^XOBWU
XOBW WEB SERVER TEST WS AVAILABILITY action This protocol allows the user to check the availability for each web service 'authorized' for a selected server. DO AVAIL^XOBWU
XOBW ASSOCIATE MENU menu This protocol is the menu associated with the ListMan template that is used to manage web server lookup keys. This menu contains the suite of maintenance actions.
XOBW ASSOCIATE ADD action This protocol allows the user to add a new WEB SERVER LOOKUP KEY (#18.13) entry. DO ADD^XOBWUA
XOBW ASSOCIATE EDIT action This protocol allows the user to edit a WEB SERVER LOOKUP (#18.13) entry. DO EDIT^XOBWUA
XOBW ASSOCIATE DELETE action This protocol allows the user to delete a WEB SERVER LOOKUP KEY (#18.13) entry. DO DEL^XOBWUA
XOBW ASSOCIATE SORT action This protocol allows the user to switch the sorting ('key' or 'server') of the list of web server lookup keys shown in the key manager utility. The protocol act as a toggle. If list is currently sorted by 'key', it will switch to the sort to by 'server' and vice versa. DO SORT^XOBWUA
XOBW ASSOCIATE FILTER KEY action This protocol allows the user to limit the list of web server lookup key entries that are displayed by the key manager. The user specifies text that is used as a filter against the beginning characters of the key values. Only matching keys will be listed in lookup key manager utility. Also, this protocol is used to clear a key filter if one is currently being applied. DO KFILTER^XOBWUA
XOBW ASSOCIATE FILTER SERVER action This protocol allows the user to limit the list of web server lookup key entries that are displayed by the key manager. The user specifies text that is used as a filter against the beginning characters of the server name. Only keys with matching associated web server names will be listed in lookup key manager utility. Also, this protocol is used to clear a server filter if one is currently being applied. DO SFILTER^XOBWUA
XOBW WEB SERVER LOOKUP KEY MANAGER action This protocol executes the ListMan template that allows the user to maintain web server lookup keys. DO LKM^XOBWU
VALM REFRESH action This actions allows the user to re-display the current screen. D RE^VALM4
PXRM ORDER CHECK UPDATES action This is the Clinical Reminders protocol for checking orderable items in file 801, when an update is done to the ORDERABLE ITEM file, file #101.43. D OIUPDATE^PXRMORHL(.XQORMSG)
PSO LM INTERVENTION MENU menu S VALMBCK="R"
PSO LM DELETE INTERVENTION action D FULL^VALM1,^PSODELI
PSO LM EDIT INTERVENTION action D FULL^VALM1,EDIT^PSODELI
PSO LM ADD INTERVENTION action D FULL^VALM1,NEW^PSODELI
PSO LM PRINT INTERVENTION action D FULL^VALM1,OUT^PSODELI
PSO LM VIEW INTERVENTION action D VIEW^PSODELI
PSO LM DISPLAY FDA MED GUIDE action D DISPLAY^PSOFDAMG Q
IBCEM CSA CORRECT REJECTED/DENIED BILL action This action allows a user to correct a rejected or denied bill that has been returned to the site. D CRD^IBCECSA4 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
IBCEM CORRECT REJECTED/DENIED BILL action This action allows a user to correct a rejected or denied bill that has been returned to the site. D CRD^IBCECOB2 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
VALM LAST SCREEN action The action will display the last items. D LAST^VALM4
MDHL Device Client subscriber Clinical Procedures CliO Client Protocol for UCI Devices
MDHL Device Server event driver CLinical Procedures CliO Server Protocol for ICU Devices.
MDC CPAN VS event driver Outbound for CLIO ADT A01 from MDC
MD DGPM PATIENT MOVEMENT extended action This Protocol is an interface to the DGPM Movement Event Protocol that will process ADT Events for patient that are admitted to the hospital and will call the code in CliO to process that movement. D EN^MDCPVDEF
MDC CPTP VS event driver Outbound for CLIO ADT A02 from MDC
MDC CPDE VS event driver CLIO Outbound ADT A03 Discharge from MDC
MDC CPUPI VS event driver CLIO Outbound ADT A08 Patient Update from MDC
MDC CPCAN VS event driver CLIO Outbound ADT A11 Cancel Admit from MDC
MDC CPCDE VS event driver CLIO Outbound ADT A13 Cancel Discharge from MDC
MDC CPCT VS event driver CLIO Outbound ADT A12 Cancel Transfer from MDC
VALM FIRST SCREEN action This action will display the first screen. D FIRST^VALM4
MDC ADT_A01 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A01 messages sent by the CP/CliO system.
MDC ADT_A11 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A11 messages.
MDC ADT_A02 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A02 messages send by the CP/CliO system.
MDC ADT_A12 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A12 messages sent by the CP/CliO system.
MDC ADT_A03 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A03 messages sent by the CP/CliO system.
MDC ADT_A13 OUTBOUND subscriber This is the outbound routing protocol for all ADT A13 messages sent by the CP/CliO system.
RA REG 2.4 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is registered. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM message consisting of PID, PV1, ORC, OBR, OBX and ZDS segments. The message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, CPT modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. This protocol is used to trigger v2.4 compliant HL7 messages.
RA EXAMINED 2.4 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam has been edited by the user. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM message consisting of PID, PV1, ORC, OBR, OBX and ZDS segments. This message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of registration, procedure modifiers, CPT modifiers, patient allergies, and clinical history. This protocol is used to trigger v2.4 compliant HL7 messages.
RA CANCEL 2.4 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine exam is cancelled. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORM message consisting of PID, PV1, ORC, OBR, OBX and ZDS segments. The message contains all relevant information about the exam, including procedure, time of cancellation, procedure modifiers, CPT modifiers, patient allergies and clinical history. This protocol is used to trigger v2.4 compliant HL7 messages.
RA RPT 2.4 event driver This protocol is triggered whenever a Radiology/Nuclear Medicine report enters into a status of Verified or Released/Not Verified. It executes code that creates an HL7 ORU message consisting of PID, OBR and OBX segments. The message contains relevant information about the report, including procedure, procedure modifiers, diagnostic code, interpreting physician, impression text and report text. This protocol is used to trigger v2.4 compliant HL7 messages.
VALM UP ONE LINE action Move up a line D UP^VALM40
MAG CPACS A01 event driver This protocol generates headers for IHE-based inpatient admission messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A01 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes inpatient admission messages to a commercial PACS system.
MAG CPACS A02 event driver This protocol generates the header for patient transfer messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A02 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes patient transfer messages to a commercial PACS system.
MAG CPACS A03 event driver This protocol generates headers for IHE-based patient discharge/end visit messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A03 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes inpatient patient discharge/end visit messages to a commercial PACS system.
MAG CPACS A11 event driver This protocol generates headers for IHE-based inpatient admission cancellation messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A11 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes admission cancellation messages to a commercial PACS system.
MAG CPACS A12 event driver This protocol generates headers for IHE-based transfer cancellation messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A12 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes transfer cancellation messages to a commercial PACS system.
VALM DOWN A LINE action Move down a line. D DOWN^VALM40
MAG CPACS A13 event driver This protocol generates headers for IHE-based inpatient discharge cancellation messages to be delivered to a commercial PACS system by VistA Imaging.
MAG CPACS A13 SUBS subscriber This protocol routes inpatient discharge cancellation messages to a commercial PACS system.
IBJP IB SITE SELECTED SERVICE CODES action D EN^IBJPI5
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST ADMIN COST ADJ action Used to adjust the administrative costs, IRS cost, DMV cost, etc S PRCASUP=1 D FULL^VALM1 D ^PRCAEXM K DTOUT S VALMBCK="R" K PRCASUP
PSO HRC MENU menu
PSO HRC PATIENT INFORMATION action D PI^PSOMPHRC
PSO HRC PAT INFO MENU menu
PSO DETAILED ALLERGY/HRC LIST action D DD^PSOMPHRC D EXIT^PSOLMDA
PSO ALLERGY/HRC LIST MENU menu
PSO HRC SELECT action D SEL^PSOMPHRC
VALM DISPLAY menu This protocaol is the default protocol for the List Manager utility.
PSO HRC REFILL MENU menu
IBCEM COB MANAGEMENT 2 menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to follow up on bills for secondary and tertiary billing. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBCAPR PRINTF action D PRTOPT1^IBCAPR
IBCAPR MENU menu
IBCAPR PRINTFD action D PRTOPT2^IBCAPR
IBCAPR PRINT MAR action D PRTOPT3^IBCAPR
IBCAPR PRINT MAR DEFAULT action D PRTOPT4^IBCAPR
IBCAPR2 MAIN ENTRY action D EN^IBCAPR2 S VALMBCK="R"
IBCEM REMOVE FROM WORKLIST action D WLRMV^IBCECOB1
BPS PRTCL RSCH HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
VALM QUIT action This protocol can be used as a generic 'quit' action. Q
BPS PRTCL RSCH ELIG INQ action D RESED^BPSELG
PSO REJECT DISPLAY ADDITIONAL INFO action D ADDTXT^PSOREJP5
IBNCPDP INS ELIG SEND action D SEND^IBNCPIV
IBNCPDP INS ELIG EFF DATE action D CHGD^IBNCPIV
IBNCPDP INS ELIG VER INQ MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBNCPDP INS ELIG TOGGLE action D TOGGLE^IBNCPIV
IBNCPDP INS ELIG PAT action D CP^IBNCPIV
IBCNB LIST EPHARMACY VIEW action K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(5)
IBJT ECME RESP INFO SCREEN action This is the action protocol used in TPJI - Third Party Joint Inquiry - for the display of ECME response information for e-Pharmacy claims and prescriptions. D EN^IBJTRX
IBJT ECME RESP INFO MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
VALM PRINT SCREEN action This action allows the user to print the current List Manager display screen. The header and the current portion of the list are printed. D PRT^VALM1
PSJ LM OVERRIDES action Created to display provider override reasons from CPRS and pharamcist interventions from Inpatient Medications associated with this order. D OVRDISP^PSGSICH2(DFN,$S(($G(PSIVAC)]""):ON,1:$G(PSJORD)),3) S VALMBCK="R" K ^TMP($J,"PSJ")
BPS VIEW ECME RX MENU menu
BPS VRX NAV VIEWRX action D NAV^BPSVRX(1) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV ECME CLAIM LOG action D NAV^BPSVRX(2) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV BILLING EVENTS RPT action D NAV^BPSVRX(3) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV CRI action D NAV^BPSVRX(5) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV INS POL action D NAV^BPSVRX(6) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV BILL LIST action D NAV^BPSVRX(7) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV TPJI CLAIM INFORMATION action D NAV^BPSVRX(9) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV TPJI AR ACCT PROFILE action D NAV^BPSVRX(10) S VALMBCK="R"
VALM PRINT LIST action This action allws the user to print the entire list of entries currently being displayed. D PRTL^VALM1
BPS VRX NAV TPJI AR COMMENT HISTORY action D NAV^BPSVRX(11) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV TPJI ECME RX INFO action D NAV^BPSVRX(12) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV DG ELIG STATUS action D NAV^BPSVRX(13) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS VRX NAV DG ELIG VERIFICATION action D NAV^BPSVRX(14) S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL USRSCR VIEW ECME RX action This is the action protocol for the hidden menu action on the ECME User Screen called VER to be able to launch the View ePharmacy Rx ListManager report. D VER^BPSVRX
PSO REJECT SUSPENSE DT CALC action D SDC^PSOREJP2
PSO REJECT DISPLAY SMA action Submit Multiple Reject Action Codes D SMA^PSOREJP1
PSO REJECTS CHAMPVA ON/OFF action D CVATOG^PSOREJP0
PSO REJECT VIEW ECME RX action Action protocol from the Reject Information screen hidden menu to jump into the View ePharmacy Rx report. D VRX^PSOREJP1
PSO PMP VIEW ECME RX action Action protocol on the PSO PMP HIDDEN ACTIONS MENU #2 to launch the View ePharmacy Rx List Manager report. This is part of the PSO view prescription screen from the Patient Medication Profile screen. D VER^PSOREJP1
VALM EXPAND action I $D(^TMP("VALM DATA",$J,VALMEVL,"EXP")),^("EXP")]"" X ^("EXP") S:'VALMCC VALMBCK="R"
IBJT VIEW ECME RX action This is the action protocol from the ECME prescription screen in TPJI - Third Party Joint Inquiry - to launch the View ePharmacy Rx List Manager report. D VER^IBJTRX
PRCA MDA TPJI action D TPJI^PRCAMDA2
PRCA MDA MANAGEMENT menu
PRCA MDA ENTER/VIEW COMMENTS action D CMNT^PRCAMDA2
PRCA MDA REVIEW STATUS action D STATUS^PRCAMDA2
PRCA MDA EXIT action
PRCA MDA ENTER COMMENT action D CMNT^PRCAMDA3
PRCA MDA COMMENT EXIT action
PRCA MDA COMMENT MENU menu
PSO LM REPRINT FDA MED GUIDE action D REPRTMG^PSOFDAMG Q
VALM TURN ON/OFF MENUS action D MENU^VALM2
DGEN MSDS MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for patient MSDS data display and edit. D PEXIT^DGRP61
DGEN MSDS ADD action This protocol action allows a user to add a new military service episode. D ACT^DGRP61("A")
DGEN MSDS DELETE action This protocol action allows a user to delete a military service episode which has been previously added through the AD - Add option. Military service episodes downloaded from ESR are authoritative and may not be edited or deleted. D ACT^DGRP61("D")
DGEN MSDS EDIT action This protocol action allows a user to edit a military service episode which has been previously added through the AD - Add option. Military service episodes downloaded from ESR are authoritative and may not be edited or deleted. D ACT^DGRP61("E")
DGEN MSDS VIEW HISTORY action This protocol action allows the user to view the military service episodes which were entered into the VistA system before ESR became the authoritative source for military service data was received from ESR. This screen is display only. The old VistA military service episode data is no longer used and cannot be changed. D EN^DGRP62(DFN)
VBECS ADT-A01 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A02 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A03 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A11 CLIENT subscriber
VALM BLANK 1 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
VBECS ADT-A12 CLIENT subscriber
VBECS ADT-A13 CLIENT subscriber
GMRC FEE PARAM ADD action This protocol calls the routine that will allow the user to look up a consult service and add it to the list of defined fee services. D ADD^GMRCFPA S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC FEE PARAM REMOVE action This protocol calls the routine that will allow the user to remove a consult service from the list of defined services. D REMOVE^GMRCFPA S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC FEE PARAM SAVE action This protocol calls the routine that will save the current list of defined fee services to the GMRC FEE SERVICES parameter. D SAVE^GMRCFPA S VALMBCK="R"
GMRC FEE PARAM MENU menu This option allows a user to edit the list of consult services defiend as fee services. S XQORM("SH")=0 S:$G(VALMSG)'["*" VALMSG="+ Next Screen - Prev Screen ?? More Actions"
GMRC FEE PARAM QUIT action This protocol calls the routine that will confirm that the user wants to quit without saving changes to the list and, if yes, quits. D EXIT^GMRCFPA
LEX MAPPING CHANGE EVENT action D CTRL^LEXTRAN3
PSO DISPLAY DRUG ALLERGIES action This protocol will display drug allergies sign/symptoms. D ^PSODGAL2
PSO DRUG CHECK action D DGCK^PSODDPR5
VALM SEARCH LIST action Finds text in list of entries. D FIND^VALM40
PSJ LM DRUG CHECK action This action is used to check for enhanced order checks of a prospective drug against the drugs on the patient's medication profile screen. D DGCK^PSJDGCK
PSJ DISPLAY DRUG ALLERGIES action displays signs/symptoms of an allergy associated to a med order. D ^PSJDGAL2 S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM ECO MENU menu S XQORM("?")="D HELP^PSJCLOR1" K PSGEFN,^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),5),^PS(53.45,+$G(DUZ),6)
PSJ LM ECO START action D PRMPTSD^PSJCLOR3
PSJ LM ECO SELECT action D PRMPTOR^PSJCLOR3
PSJ LM VIEW ORDER DETAIL action D VWDETAIL^PSJCLOR2($G(PSGP)) S VALMBCK="R",VALM("TITLE")="Clinic Order Entry"
PSJ LM ECO HIDDEN ACTIONS menu S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM ECO IM PR action D IMPATPR^PSJCLOR1 S VALMBCK="R"
PSJ LM ECO RANGE action D CHGDT^PSJCLOR2 S VALMBCK="R"
GMPL EVENT extended action This protocol will be invoked whenever a problem is added or modified via Problem List options or RPC's. It is triggered by setting the Date Last Modified field #.03 of the Problem file #9000011, in the DTMOD^GMPLX function. The following variables will be available to read and use, but do NOT kill: DFN = Patient ien, file #2 GMPIFN = Problem ien, file #9000011
VALM BLANK 2 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
MHVSM QBP-Q13 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM QBP-Q13 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM RTB-K13 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM RTB-K13 Event Driver event driver
IBTRR ROI ADD action D AA^IBTRR1
IBTRR ROI EDIT action D EA^IBTRR1
IBTRR ROI REVOKE action D RA^IBTRR1
IBTRR ROI DELETE action D DA^IBTRR1
IBTRR MENU menu I $G(IBFASTXT)=1 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBTRE ROI CONSENT action D OP^IBTRR1
VALM BLANK 3 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
LRJ SYS MAP AUD LIST AUDITED FIELDS action This protocol lists fields which are audited in the LABORATORY TEST file (#60). D AUDLIST^LRJSAU60
LRJ SYS MAP AUD DISPLAY FILE 60 CHANGES action This protocol displays audit information based on changes to LABORATORY TEST file (#60). D AUDISP^LRJSAU60
LRJ SYS MAP AUD SET FILE 60 AUDITED FLAG action This protocol sets audits for additional LABORATORY TEST file (#60) fields based on user preference. D AUDSET^LRJSAU60 S VALMBCK="R"
LRJ SYS MAP HL MENU menu This Protocol Menu provides the functions that support Hospital Location Change Monitoring of location changes made in VistA (via ADT actions).
LRJ SYS MAP HL DISPLAY MESSAGE action This protocol will display the Hospital Location file edit extract into a Mailman format. D CREATMM^LRJSML1("^TMP($J,""LRJ SYS"")")
LRJ SYS MAP HL DISP EXT action This Action Protocol will re-display the raw Hospital Location data extracted from the Audit file. D DISPEXT^LRJSML1("^TMP($J,""LRJ SYS"")")
LRJ SYS MAP HL SEND MSG action This action will convert the extracted Raw Hospital Location changes to a readable format and forward a mail message to the user. D CRTMMARY^LRJSML2("^TMP($J,""LRJ SYS"")","^TMP($J,""LRDATA"")")
LRJ SYS MAP HL SEND EXT action This action will create a .TXT file of the Hospital Location changes extract file and mail it to the user. D CRTXTMM^LRJSML2("^TMP($J,""LRJ SYS"")")
LRJ SYS MAP AUF60 MENU menu This protocol menu provides the functions used to manage auditing in Lab.
VALM BLANK 4 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
LRJ SYS MAP AUF60 SEND DISPLAY MESSAGE action This protocol will send a display of the LABORATORY TEST file (#60) audit information as a mail message. D CRTMMARY^LRJSAU2("^TMP(""LRJ SYS F60 AUD MANAGER"",$J)","AUF60","File 60 Audit","LRJSAU60","^TMP(""LRJ SYS F60 AUD MANAGER"",$J)") S VALMBCK="R"
LRJ SYS MAP AUF60 SEND FILE MESSAGE action This protocol allows a delimited file to be sent in a mail message. The file contains information based on audits which are set after changes to the LABORATORY TEST file (#60). D CRTXTMM^LRJSAU2("^TMP(""LRJ SYS F60 AUD MANAGER"",$J,""EXTRACT"")","AUF60","File 60 Audit","LRJSAU60") S VALMBCK="R"
LRJ SYS MAP HL AUDIT QUERY action This Protocol allows a user to select a type of query for the Hospital Location extract report. D CDRNG^LRJSML4
LRJ SYS MAP HL SCHED AUDIT RPT DISP action This action allows the user to view the Hospital Location Change Management System Audit Task Option Schedule report and includes the following details: o Name of the option scheduled to be run o Task ID o Start Time for job o Rescheduling Frequency o Date this TaskMan job was originally scheduled D INIT^LRJSML5
LRJ SYS MAP HL SCHED AUDIT RPT TASK action This action will schedule the 'LRJ SYS MAP HL Change Management TaskMan Report' option [LRJ SYS MAP HL TASKMAN RPT] as a background task. D SCHDBCKG^LRJSML6
LRJ SYS MAP HL ACCEPT CONFIG action This Protocol is exercised from the Hospital Location Change Monitoring System. It is executed when: 1) The first time the site has synchronized Lab related Hospital Locations in VistA with those locations on a separate configuration. 2) The site has corrected Lab related Hospital Location(s) on a remote configuration and the begin or end dates for the TaskMan report need to be edited to reflect the time of the change. D ACPTCNFG^LRJSML6
PSO BPS DISPLAY EXIT action Q Q
PSO BPS DISPLAY MENU menu This is the parent menu protocol for the ePharmacy site parameter display.
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS MENU menu
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS EXIT action Q Q
ORB BLANK LINE1 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
VALM BLANK 5 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS COPYSP action D COPYSP^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS EDITALL action D EDITALL^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS EDITGEN action D EDITGEN^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS EDITRRRC action D EDITRRRC^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS EDITTRC action D EDITTRC^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS DISPLAY action D DIVLIST^PSOBPSSP
PSO BPS SITE PARAMS CHGDIV action D CHGDIV^PSOBPSSP
DG VTS ADT-A28 SERVER event driver This protocol is used to send an Hl7 v2.4 ADT-A28 message from VistA to RouteMatch.
DG VTS ADT-A28 event driver
DG VTS ADT-A28 CLIENT subscriber This is the subscriber protocol to DG VTS ADT-A28 SERVER protocol that sends HL7 message to RouteMatch.
VALM BLANK 6 action This protocol is used to format spaces in menu lists.
IBCNE MEDICARE COB EE action D EXPND^IBCNESI1 D BLDSCRN^IBCNESI1
IBCNE MEDICARE COB menu Protocol menu item that lists 271 medicare patients with subsequent insurance
IBCNE MEDICARE COB AC action Add or Edit comments for this inquiry response pertaining to secondaryy insurance D CMNT^IBCNESI2 D BLD^IBCNESI2
IBCNE MEDICARE COB CS action D STATUS^IBCNESI2
IBCNE MEDICARE COB DISP menu
IBDF ICD10 STATUS UPDATE CL action S IBDRE=1 D CL^IBDFUTL4 K IBDRE
IBDF ICD10 STATUS UPDATE menu
IBDF ICD10 STATUS UPDATE JP action D JP^IBDFUTL4
IBDF ICD10 STATUS UPDATE PL action D PRTL^VALM1
IBDF ICD10 STATUS UPDATE IS action D IS^IBDFUTL4
VALM DISPLAY W/EXPAND menu This protocaol is the default protocol for the List Manager utility.
IBCNB LIST COMPLETE VIEW action K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(6)
IBCNB LIST FAILURE VIEW action K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(4)
IBCNB ENTRY ESCALATE action D ESC^IBCNBLA1(IBBUFDA,IBKEYS)
PXRM TAXONOMY ADD action D ADD^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY EDIT action D EDITS^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY MENU menu This is the menu for the Taxonomy List Manager display. D PEXIT^PXRMTAXL
PXRM LEXICON MENU menu D PEXIT^PXRMLEXL
PXRM LEXICON ADD action D INCL^PXRMLEXL
PXRM LEXICON REMOVE FROM TAXONOMY action D RFTL^PXRMLEXL
PXRM LEXICON REMOVE FROM DIALOG action D RFDL^PXRMLEXL
VALM RIGHT action D RIGHT^VALM40(XQORNOD(0))
PXRM LEXICON USE IN DIALOG action D UIDL^PXRMLEXL
PXRM LEXICON SAVE action D SAVE^PXRMLEXL
PXRM LEXICON SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMLEXL
PXRM TAXONOMY INQUIRE action D INQS^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY COPY action D COPYS^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY CHANGE LOG action D CLOGS^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY CODE SEARCH action D CODESRCH^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY SELECT ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY IMPORT action D IMPS^PXRMTAXL
PXRM TAXONOMY UID REPORT action D REPD^PXRMUIDR
VALM LEFT action D LEFT^VALM40(XQORNOD(0))
PXRM TAXONOMY CHOOSE ENTRIES menu This is the menu for taxonomy choosing. D PEXIT^PXRMTXCE
PXRM TAXONOMY CHOOSE ENTRY action D XSEL^PXRMTXCE
PXRM TAXONOMY CHOOSE SELECT action D SELTAX^PXRMTXCE
PXRM TAXONOMY CHOOSE REMOVE action D REMTAX^PXRMTXCE
PXRM DIALOG TAXONOMY EDIT action D SELECT^PXRMTXDL
PXRM LEXICON EXIT action D EXITS^PXRMLEXL
PXRM EXCH LOAD WEB HF action D LDWEB^PXRMEXLM
PSO LM BACKDOOR TITRATION RX REFILL action D TIMTRX^PSOOTMRX
VALM HIDDEN ACTIONS menu
PSO LM BACKDOOR MARK AS TITRATION action D MARKTIT^PSOOTMRX
PSO SPMP3 MENU menu
PSO SPMP3 SHOW DETAILS action D SHOWHID^PSOSPMA3
PSO SPMP4 MENU menu
PSO SPMP4 VIEW ASAP DEFINITION action D ASAPDEF^PSOSPML4
PSO SPMP4 VIEW RX action D VIEW^PSOSPML4
PSO SPMP2 MENU menu
PSO SPMP2 BATCH EXPORT action D EXP^PSOSPML2("EXPORT")
PSO SPMP2 SELECT action D SEL^PSOSPML2
PSO SPMP4 MEDICATION PROFILE action D MP^PSOSPML4
VALM GOTO PAGE action D GOTO^VALM40
PSO SPMP2 VIEW RAW DATA action D EXP^PSOSPML2("VIEW")
PSO SPMP4 EXPORT RX action D EXPORT^PSOSPML4
PSO SPMP1 MENU menu
PSO SPMP1 SELECT action D SEL^PSOSPML1
PSO SPMP1 STATE PARAMETERS action D EN^PSOSPMSP
PSO SPMP1 MANUAL BATCH EXPORT action D MAN^PSOSPML1
PSO HIDDEN ACTIONS #5 menu This hidden action menu protocol contains the minimum standard hidden actions for an Outpatient Pharmacy Listman option. No customized actions should be attached to this protocol.
PSO SPMP5 SELECT action D SEL^PSOSPML5
PSO SPMP5 MENU menu
MAG CPACS A01 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes inpatient admission messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
VALM WORKBENCH menu
MAG CPACS A02 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes patient transfer messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
MAG CPACS A03 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes patient discharge messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
MAG CPACS A11 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes admission cancellation messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
MAG CPACS A12 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes transfer cancellation messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
MAG CPACS A13 SUBS-HLO subscriber This protocol routes discharge cancellation messages a commercial PACS using the HL7 Optimized package.
IB NIF QUERY DRIVER event driver
IB NIF QUERY SUBSCRIPTION subscriber
IB NIF RESPONSE SUBSCRIPTION subscriber
IB NIF RESPONSE DRIVER event driver
GMRC CONSULTS TO HCP action Creates and sends an REF^I12, REF^I13, or REF^I14 HL7 message to the Healthcare Claims Processing System when a consult is generated for a fee basis service. D EN^GMRCHL7H(.XQORMSG)
VALM DEMOGRAPHICS action D EDIT^VALMW2("DEMOGRAPHICS EDIT"),HDR^VALMWB
GMRC HCP REF-I12 SERVER event driver Sends HL7 REF^I12 v2.5 messages to HCP application for new Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP REF-I12 CLIENT subscriber Sends HL7 REF^I12 v2.5 messages to HCP application for new Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP REF-I14 SERVER event driver Sends HL7 REF^I14 v2.5 messages to HCP application for canceled or discontinued Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP REF-I14 CLIENT subscriber Sends HL7 REF^I14 v2.5 messages to HCP application for canceled or discontinued Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP REF-I13 CLIENT subscriber Sends HL7 REF^I13 v2.5 messages to HCP application for updated Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP REF-I13 SERVER event driver Sends HL7 REF^I13 v2.5 messages to HCP application for updated Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP RRI-I13 CLIENT subscriber Receives HL7 RRI^I13 v2.5 messages from HCP application for updated Non-VA Care Referrals.
GMRC HCP RRI-I13 SERVER event driver Receives HL7 RRI^I13 v2.5 messages from HCP application for updated Non-VA Care Referrals.
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO PROVIDER ADD action D PRVADD^IBJPS3(1)
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO PROVIDER DEL action D PRVDEL^IBJPS3(1)
VALM CAPTION EDIT action D EDIT^VALMW2("CAPTION EDIT")
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO PROVIDER EDIT action D PRVEDIT^IBJPS3(1)
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO PROVIDER DIVISIONS action D EN^IBJPS4(1)
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO ASSOCIATIONS MENU menu
IBJP IB TRICARE PAY-TO DIVISION ADD action D DIVADD^IBJPS4(1)
IBCEM CSA CANCEL/CLONE BILL action This action allows a user to cancel/clone a bill that has been returned to the site in error. D CLONE^IBCECSA4 I '$D(IOUON) D ENS^%ZISS
RCDPE ERA WORKLIST CHANGE VIEW action D CV^RCDPEWLP
RCDPEX RX_COMMENT action This option allows the user to enter a comment for an unreleased prescription. D EDITRXC^RCDPEX32
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST CHANGE VIEW action D CV^RCDPEWL
RCDPE APAR EEOB LIST MENU menu This is the menu that contains the actions that can performed manually on the EEOBs for APAR. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
ORB BLANK LINE2 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
VALM MUMPS CODE EDIT action D EDIT^VALMW2("MUMPS CODE EDIT")
RCDPE APAR SELECT EEOB action Protocol allows the selection of an EEOB line item off the AUTO-POST - AWAITING RESOLUTION screen. D ENTEREOB^RCDPEAA1
RCDPE APAR VIEW/PRINT ERA action This option allows the user to view the summary or summary and detail information for an electronic remittance advice (ERA). D VIEWERA^RCDPEAA2($G(RCIENS))
RCDPE APAR CHANGE VIEW action Provides capability to change and save preferred view for the next time the option is executed. D CV^RCDPEAA1
RCDPE APAR SELECTED EEOB MENU menu The APAR selected EEOB menu contains the actions that can be performed manually on the EEOB item that did not get a receipt when the associated ERA record was processed during the auto-post nightly process. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE MARK FOR AUTOPOST action Protocol will check the EEOB for auto-posting criteria and mark the EEOB for auto-posting if all criteria are met. D MARK^RCDPEAA2(RCIENS)
RCDPE APAR SPLIT LINE action This option allows the user to split the payment and adjustment amount of an EEOB line item to redistribute the funds to more accurately reflect the disposition of the payment/adjustment. D SPLIT^RCDPEAA3(RCIENS)
RCDPE APAR EEOB REFRESH action This option allows the user to 'refresh' the APAR scratch pad entry to remove all previously entered edits/splits/adjustments and restore it to the state it was in before any manual changes were made. D REFRESH^RCDPEAA3(RCIENS)
RCDPE APAR RESEARCH action This option allows the user access to the IB options for cancel, edit, add patient charges from within the APAR screen of EDI Lockbox. D RESEARCH^RCDPEAA3
RCDPE APAR EEOB REVIEW action Allows addition of comments or used as a bookmark on a specific EEOB line in case processing was interrupted, thereby allowing the user to more easily resume where they left off. This option must be turned 'on' each time the user enters the EEOB to enter or view comments. D REVIEW^RCDPEAA3(RCIENS)
RCDPE APAR VIEW/PRINT EOB action This option allows the user to view the detail of a selected EOB presented in the APAR Scratch pad screen. D PREOB^RCDPEAA3($G(RCIENS))
VALM OTHER FIELDS action D EDIT^VALMW2("OTHER FIELDS")
RCDPE APAR EEOB RESEARCH MENU menu This is the main menu that contains the actions that can be performed to research a payment/denial for a claim when reviewing an EOB. I $G(RCFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
RCDPE APAR VERIFY action This option allows the user to access the options for verifying the EEOBs against the data on the VistA system to ensure the payments are being made for the correct claim. D VERIF^RCDPEAA3(RCIENS)
MHVSM DFT-P03 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM DFT-P03 Subscriber subscriber
MHVSM ACK-P03 Event Driver event driver
MHVSM ACK-P03 Subscriber subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z06 CLIENT subscriber
EAS ESR 050 ORU-Z06 SERVER event driver
DGEN HBP 11.1 MENU menu This protocol menu contains all the activities for patient Health Benefit Plan data display and edit. D PEXIT^DGR111
DGEN HBP VIEW action This protocol action allows the user to view the Health Benefit Plan(s) which have been added to or deleted from a patient's profile. D ACT^DGR111("VH")
VALM PROTOCOL INFORMATION action D EDIT^VALMW2("PROTOCOL INFORMATION")
DGEN HBP DETAIL action This protocol action allows the user to view the detailed description of the Health Benefit Plan(s) available for assigning to a patient's profile. D ACT^DGR111("VD")
DGEN HBP 11.1A MENU action D PEXIT^DGR111
PSO REJECT TRICARE HIDDEN MENU menu This is the hidden menu option for the Reject Information (UNRESOLVED) [PSO REJECT TRICARE] ListMan screen. This is specifically for TRICARE and CHAMPVA rejects.
PSO REJECTS PRINT TO EXCEL action D PRTEXCL^PSOREJP0
MDC OBSERVATION UPDATE extended action This protocol will be triggered when an observation in the OBS file MDCOBS("PATIENT_ID","E")="SIMPSON,BARTHOLOMUE" MDCOBS("PATIENT_ID","I")=2 MDCOBS("STATUS","E")="Unverified" MDCOBS("STATUS","I")=0 In case of an error, MDCOBS("ERROR") will be populated with the error number and error text from FileMan. enters or leaves VERIFIED status. The local array "MDCOBS" will be populated as follows: MDCOBS("OBS_ID","E")="{35627230-5C66-49E3-AD93-97C269CB257D}" MDCOBS("OBS_ID","I")="{35627230-5C66-49E3-AD93-97C269CB257D}" MDCOBS("OLD_STATUS","E")="Verified" MDCOBS("OLD_STATUS","I")=1 D EN^MDCPROTD
OR EVSEND VPR extended action
PSB EVSEND VPR extended action The purpose of this protocol is to send notification of events that modify the BCMA MEDICATION LOG file (#53.79).
HMP ADT-A04 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol is used to process HL7 ADT/A04 messages published by above, It adds a HMP (Health Management Platform) 'freshness' event. the VAFC ADT-A04 SERVER protocol. The client causes a HMP 'freshness' event for each new patient registration that occurs. This is especially important for new patients, as it is the only MAS event mechanism available that can be used to discover new patient entries. Note: The ROUTING LOGIC does not send any HL7 messages. As mentioned
HMP ADT-A08 CLIENT subscriber This client protocol is used to process HL7 ADT/A08 messages published by above, It adds a HMP (Health Management Platform) 'freshness' event. the VAFC ADT-A08 SERVER protocol. The client filters A08 events. It adds to the HMP 'freshness' queue only if the A08 was the result of the patient's sensitivity being modified via the DG SECURITY EDIT/EDIT option. All other A08 events are ignored and should not add to the 'freshness' queue. Note: The ROUTING LOGIC does not send any HL7 messages. As mentioned
HMP APPT EVENTS action This protocol will track appointments for HMP. D SDAM^HMPEVNT(SDATA)
VALM LIST REGION EDIT action D EDIT^VALMW2("LIST REGION EDIT")
HMP DG UPDATES action This protocol will track Patient file changes for HMP. D DG^HMPEVNT(DGDA,DGFIELD,DGFILE)
HMP GMPL EVENT action This protocol will track new and updated problems for HMP. D GMPL^HMPEVNT(DFN,GMPIFN)
HMP INPT EVENTS action This protocol will track patient admissions and discharges for HMP. D DGPM^HMPEVNT(DGPMA,DGPMDA,DGPMP,DGPMT)
HMP PCE EVENTS action This protocol will track PCE visit data for HMP. D PCE^HMPEVNT
HMP XQOR EVENTS action This protocol monitors order events for HMP. It is placed on the * EVSEND OR protocols to check for updates being sent from ancillary packages to Order Entry; it monitors when orders are completed. D XQOR^HMPEVNT(.XQORMSG)
HMP GMRA EVENTS action This protocol will track Allergy data updates for HMP. D GMRA^HMPEVNT("")
HMP NA EVENTS action This protocol monitors order events for HMP. It is placed on the OR EVSEND * protocols to check for order numbers assigned to new orders placed from the ancillary packages. D NA^HMPEVNT(.XQORMSG)
HMP MDC EVENT action This protocol will track new and updated observations for HMP. D MDC^HMPEVNT(.MDCOBS)
HMP PSB EVENTS action This protocol will track medication administrations for HMP. D PSB^HMPEVNT(.PSBIEN)
HMP PCMM TEAM action D PCMMT^HMPEVNT(SCPTTMAF,SCPTTMB4)
VALM CHANGE LIST action D INIT^VALMWB S VALMBCK=$S($D(VALMQUIT):"",1:"R")
HMP PCMM TEAM POSITION action D PCMMTP^HMPEVNT(SCPTTPAF,SCPTTPB4)
HMPM EVT QUE MGR MENU menu Main protocol menu used by the VPRM EVT QUE MGR ListMan template. S XQORM("B")="Update"
HMPM EVT QUE CHANGE SERVER action Allows user to change which server's freshness queue events to display in the viewer. D CS^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE FRESHNESS REPORT action View overview freshness queue information for all HMP servers. D FSHRPT^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE CHANGE DOMAIN action Allows user to indicate only freshness events for a particular domain, like med, task, visit, etc., or all domains should be listed in freshness viewer. D CD^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE REFRESH action Refresh/update the current list of freshness queue events using the current criteria/filters specified. D REFRESH^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE DISPLAY DETAILS action Display details related to an event listed in the freshness queue viewer. D DETAIL^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE FILTER action Allows user to indicate only freshness events with a state of 'processed' or 'waiting to be processed' or all events should be listed in freshness viewer. D FILTER^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE SHOW TEMP GLOBALS action Show VPR temporary global usage report. The report displays summary information related to VPR processing use of ^XTMP and ^TMP globals. D SHOWHMPN^HMPEQLM
HMPM EVT QUE SELECT PATIENT action Allows user to specify that only the freshness events for the selected patient should be used in the freshness queue event viewer. D SELPT^HMPEQLM
VALM EDIT ALL extended action S VALMALL="" K VALMALL S VALMBCK="R" D BLD^VALMWB
HMPM EVT QUE CHANGE MAX LISTED action Allows user to select the maximum events to display in the freshness queue viewer. (10 - 1000) D CM^HMPEQLM
HMP DGPF ASSIGN FLAG action Used to trigger a JDS update when the DGPF ASSIGN FLAG action protocol is used. A patient must have been selected and the DFN value is in DGDFN. I $G(DGDFN),$L($T(POST^HMPEVNT)) D POST^HMPEVNT(DGDFN,"patient",DGDFN)
IBCNB LIST TRICARE/CHAMPVA VIEW action K IBCNSORT D EN1^IBCNBLL(7)
SDEC ADD APPOINTMENT action Adds an appointment to the CLINICAL SCHEDULING package when the corresponding appointment in VistA scheduling is added. I $G(SDAMEVT)=1 D ADDEVT^SDEC07($G(DFN),$G(SDT),$G(SDCL),$G(SDDA))
SDEC CANCEL APPOINTMENT action Cancel an appointment in the CLINICAL SCHEDULING package when the corresponding appointment in the VistA Scheduling is cancelled. I $G(SDAMEVT)=2 D CANEVT^SDEC08($G(DFN),$G(SDT),$G(SDCL))
SDEC CHECKIN APPOINTMENT action Check in an appointment in the CLINICAL SCHEDULING package when the corresponding appointment in VistA Scheduling is checked in. I $G(SDAMEVT)=4 D CHKEVT^SDEC25($G(DFN),$G(SDT),$G(SDCL))
SDEC NOSHOW APPOINTMENT action This protocol will no-show an appointment in the CLINICAL SCHEDULING package when the corresponding appointment in VistA Scheduling is no-showed. I $G(SDAMEVT)=3 D NOSEVT^SDEC31($G(DFN),$G(SDT),$G(SDCL))
GMRA ASSESS SELECT PATIENT action D PATIENT^GMRAFA S VALMBCK="R"
GMRA ASSESS MENU menu
GMRA ASSESS DET REVIEW action D RR^GMRAFA1 S:$G(VALMBCK)="" VALMBCK="R"
VALM PROTOCOL EDIT action D FULL^VALM1,4^VALMW S VALMBCK="R"
GMRA ASSESS DET MENU menu
GMRA ASSESS DET ASSESSMENT action D UASSESS^GMRAFA1 S:$G(VALMBCK)="" VALMBCK="R"
GMRA ASSESS DET ALL EIE action D ALLEE^GMRAFA1 S:$G(VALMBCK)="" VALMBCK="R"
RCDPE EFT ERA MANUAL MATCH action D MATCHWL^RCDPEM2
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST RECEIPT PROCESSING action This option will jump to the receipt profile listmanager D RECPROC^RCDPEWL4
RCDPE ECME INFORMATION action D GOECME^RCDPEWL2
IBJT ERA 835 INFORMATION action D EN^IBJTEP
IBJT ERA 835 MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBPRVSCR)'="IBJTEP",$G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT 835 ADDITIONAL DATA action D EN^IBJTAD D EXIT^IBJTAD
IBJT ERA 835 PRINT EEOB action D EN^IBJTPE D EXIT^IBJTPE
VALM RUN LIST action D RUN^VALMW2(VALMIFN)
IBJT EXIT MENU menu K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT)>2 S VALMBCK="Q"
IBJT ERA 835 RECEIPT PROF action D RECEIPT^IBJTEP1
RCDPE APAR CLAIM COMMENT action This protocol is used to capture a comment about the current claim. D COMNT^RCDPEAA3
RCDPE WORKLIST ERA MARK FOR AUTO POST action This option allows the user to mark an ERA for auto-posting. If the ERA passes validation, the ERA will be marked as an auto-post candidate to get posted by the Nightly Background Job. D AUTOPOST^RCDPEWL8(1)
RCDPE EOB WORKLIST MARK FOR AUTO POST action This option allows the user to mark an ERA for auto-posting. If the ERA passes validation, the ERA will be marked as an auto-post candidate to get posted by the Nightly Background Job. D AUTOPOST^RCDPEWL8(2)
PSO SPMP3 COPY VERSION action D COPYVER^PSOSPMA3
PSO SPMP3 EDIT DELIMETERS action D EDTDELIM^PSOSPMA3
PSO SPMP3 CUSTOMIZE SEGMENT action D CUSSEG^PSOSPMA3
PSO SPMP3 CUSTOMIZE DATA ELEMENT action D CUSELM^PSOSPMA3
PSO SPMP3 DELETE CUSTOMIZATION action D DELCUS^PSOSPMB3
VALM INPUT TEMPLATE EDIT action D FULL^VALM1,^DIB S VALMBCK="R"
BPS PRTCL CMT ADD PHARM action D ADDP^BPSCMT01
BPS PRTCL USRSCR RESUB NO REVERSE action List Manager action protocol to allow the ECME user screen user to be able to resubmit an ECME claim without doing a reversal no matter what the previous ECME claim status happens to be. This action is used to help get claims back into sync with payers. D RESNRV^BPSSCRRS
BPS PRTCL USRSCR OPECC REJECT INFORMATION action This action protocol allows the OPECC on the ECME User Screen to go into the Reject Information details using a version of the pharmacy Reject Information Screen. D EN^BPSSCRRJ
BPS OPECC REJECT MENU menu This is the parent menu protocol for the OPECC Reject Information screen.
BPS OPECC REJECT VIEW ECME RX action This is the action protocol from the BPS OPECC REJECT INFORMATION screen to view the ePharmacy prescription data. D VER^BPSSCRRJ
BPS OPECC REJECT INFO VIEW RX action D VIEW^BPSSCRRJ
BPS OPECC REJECT INFO PATIENT INFORMATION action This is the action protocol to get from the ECME OPECC Reject Information screen to the Patient Information screen. Variable parameters RXIEN and RXFIL are common variables to routine BPSSCRRJ. D PI^BPSSCRRJ(RXIEN,RXFIL)
BPS OPECC REJECT INFO MEDICATION PROFILE action This is the action protocol to get from the ECME OPECC Reject Information screen to the Medication Profile screen. Variable parameters RXIEN and RXFIL are common variables to routine BPSSCRRJ. D MP^BPSSCRRJ(RXIEN,RXFIL)
BPS PRTCL USRSCR OPEN/CLOSE NON-BILLABLE ENTRY action This is the action protocol on the ECME user screen which allows the user to open or close a non-billable entry. This is a toggle action in that this action can open a closed entry, and it can close an open entry. D OC^BPSSCRN0
PSO REJECTS VIEW ECME RX action Action protocol from the Third Party Payer Rejects - Worklist screen hidden menu to jump into the View ePharmacy Rx report. D VER^PSOREJP0
VALM LIST ENTRY menu
PSO LM BACKDOOR PRTCL USRSCR VERIFY action Action protocol from the PSO LM ORDER SELECTION screen hidden menu to jump into the View ePharmacy Rx report. D VER^PSOBPSU3(RXN,DFN)
PSO LM BACKDOOR PRTCL USRSCR RESUBMIT action Action protocol from the PSO LM ORDER SELECTION screen hidden menu to resubmit a claim. D RES^PSOBPSU3(RXN,DFN)
PSO LM BACKDOOR PRTCL USRSCR REVERSE action Action protocol from the PSO LM ORDER SELECTION screen hidden menu to reverse a claim. D REV^PSOBPSU3(RXN,DFN)
PSO BPS PAT INFO MENU menu This menu protocol was created to mimic the main Patient Information screen, but the actions available on this menu protocol are simplified because this screen is being used by the OPECC from the ECME User screen and they should not have access to some of the functions on the normal Patient Information screen.
PSO BPS MED PROF MENU menu This is the menu protocol for the Patient Medication Profile screen when coming from the ECME User Screen. This is from the OPECC Reject Information screen on the ECME user screen. The OPECC is not allowed to have access to the normal Patient Medication Profile screen actions so this simplified menu protocol was created.
KMPV MANAGEMENT MENU menu
KMPV RESTORE CFG action D RESTCFG^KMPVLM
KMPV EDIT CFG action D EDITCFG^KMPVLM
KMPV VIEW CFG action D VIEWCFG^KMPVLM
KMPV START MONITOR action D STARTMON^KMPVLM
ORB BLANK LINE3 action Displays a blank line. (Item text is 3 spaces.) Use to get whitespace.
VALM DEMO MENU menu Allows user to list a package's options and take some actions against those options.
KMPV STOP MONITOR action D STOPMON^KMPVLM
KMPV DELETE DATA action D KILL^KMPVLM
IBCE VIEW LOC PRINT MENU menu
IBRFI INITIAL WL MENU menu Protocol Menu used to display all of the actions that can be invoked from the RFAI Management Worklist. K IBFASTXT I $G(IBFASTXT) S VALMBCK="Q"
IBRFI RESORT action D SORT^IBRFIWL(1)
IBJP IB REVENUE CODES MENU menu
IBJP IB REVENUE CODES DEL action D RCDEL^IBJPS5
IBJP IB REVENUE CODES ADD action </